r 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 z 
 
 1.0 
 
 1.1 
 
 Li 12.8 12.5 
 u^ liii 12.2 
 
 2.0 
 
 uiy 
 
 I 
 
 L25 lU U liA 
 
 I 
 
 Hiotograiiiic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 
 23 WIST MAIN STIKT 
 
 WItSTIt.N.Y. 14SM 
 
 ( 71* ) •72-4503 
 
 '^ 
 

 V 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Instituta for Historical IVIicroraproductions / Institut Canadian de microraproductions historiquas 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 Couverture endommagAe 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur^ et/ou pelliculte 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 I I Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes g^ographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Enci-e de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured platas and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Reli6 avec d'autres documents 
 
 yi Tight binding r^iay cause shadows or distortion 
 ' along interior margin/ 
 La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intArieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches aJout6es 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais. lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas 6t6 filmies. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentalres suppldmentaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6tA possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la methods normale de filmage 
 sont indiqute ci-dessous. 
 
 r I Coloured pages/ 
 
 n 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommag6es 
 
 Pages restored and/oi 
 
 Pages restauries et/ou pelliculAes 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxe( 
 Pages dAcolortes, tachettes ou piqutes 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages d^tachdes 
 
 Showthroughy 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of prir 
 
 Quality in6gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary materii 
 Comprend du materiel suppKmentaire 
 
 I — I Pages damaged/ 
 
 I — I Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 
 r~^ Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 
 I I Pages detached/ 
 
 Hyl Showthrough/ 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 I I Includes supplementary material/ 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Mition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une palure, 
 etc., ont it* film^es d nouveau de fa9on A 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filmA au taux de rMuction indiqu* ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 22X 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 1 
 
 a4x 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
TtM copy fllmMl h«r« haa baan raproduead thanka 
 to tha fianaroaity of: 
 
 Library 
 Agriculture Can«da 
 
 L'axamplaira film* fut raprodult grAca i la 
 ginArotit* da: 
 
 Bibliotiikiua 
 Agriculture Canada 
 
 Tha Imagaa appaaring hara ara tha baat quality 
 poaaibia conaidaring tha condition and lagibillty 
 of tha original copy and in Icaaping wKh tha 
 filming contract apacif icationa. 
 
 Original copiaa in printad papar covara ara fiimad 
 baginning with tha front covar and anding on 
 tha laat paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa- 
 aion, or tha back covar whan appropriata. All 
 othar original copiaa ara fiimad baginning on tha 
 firat paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa- 
 aion, and anding on tha laat paga with a printad 
 or illuatratad impreaaion. 
 
 Tha laat racordad frama on aach microfieha 
 ahall contain tha symbol -h^ (moaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or tha aymbol Y (moaning "END"), 
 whichavar applias. 
 
 Laa imagas auh^antaa ont 4t« raproduitas avac la 
 plus grand soin, compta tanu da la conditfon at 
 da la nattat* da l'axamplaira filmA, at mn 
 conformity avac laa conditions du contrat da 
 filmaga. 
 
 Laa axamplairaa originaux dont la couvartura 9n 
 iwpiar aat imprimia aont filmte an common .jnt 
 par la pramiar plat at an tarminant soit par la 
 darnMra paga qui comporta una amprainta 
 d'imprassion ou d'illustration, soit par la sacond 
 plat. sa!on la caa. Toua laa autras axamplairaa 
 originaux aont filmis an commandant par la 
 pramlAra paga qui comporta una amprainta 
 d'impraaaion ou d'illuatration at an tarminant par 
 la darnlAra paga qui comporta una talla 
 amprainta. 
 
 Un daa symbolaa suivanta apparattra sur la 
 darniira imaga da chaqua microfieha. salon la 
 caa: la symbols -i»- signifia "A SUIVRE", la 
 aymbola ▼ aignifia "FIN". 
 
 Mapa. plataa, charta, ate., may ba fiimad at 
 diffarant raduetion ratioa. Thoaa too larga to ba 
 antiraly included in ona axpoaura ara fiimad 
 baginning in tha uppar laft hand CT>mar. laft to 
 right and top to bottom, aa many iramaa aa 
 raquiraJ. Tha following diagrama illustrata tha 
 mathod: 
 
 Laa cartaa. planchas, tablaaux, ate, pauvant Atra 
 fllmto k daa taux da reduction diffArants. 
 Lorsqua la document aat trop grand pour Atra 
 raproduit an un saul cllchA. il aat filmA A partir 
 da I'angla aupAriaur gaucha. da gaucha A droita, 
 at da haut an baa, an pranant la nombra 
 d'imagaa nAcaaaaira. Laa diagrammaa suivants 
 illuatrant la mAthoda. 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
■-- ■ ,.i 
 
 Lessons in French. 
 
 PART II. ^ ; . 
 
\ 
 
Lessons in French. 
 
 PART II. 
 
 A THEORETICAL FRENCH GRAMMAR 
 WITH ADVANCED EXERCISES AND COMPOSITIONS. 
 
 BY 
 
 F. H. SYKES, M.A. 
 
 Master in. Eugliah^ French, and, German intheParlcdale 
 Collegiate Institute,, Toronto. 
 
 '^txt-§ook in jdfwttch (grammar hib (tompoaition 
 ^ttthorUeb bj) the ^tptnimtni of dbucatton of ©ntario. 
 
 TORONTO : 
 THE COPP, CLARK COMPANY, Limited. 
 
 9 FRONT STREEt WEST. 
 1890. 
 
»- . n ■ 
 
 .. ) 
 
 » — • 
 
 Entered aocordinf? to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousand eight 
 hundred and ninety, by Thb Copp, Clark Company (Limitkd), Toronto, Ontario, 
 in the OfDce of the Minister of Agriculture. 
 
 5 -' 
 
 ^■■^-.■'■^j': J- -j\ 
 
 ■ ''>-'"-^ ■■ ftV't.- . 'Vr*' v*"'^:*:'- 
 
1 ■• 
 
 .* V 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The character of the Second Part of the Lessons in French has been 
 determined by the eharacter of the First Part, as well as by the require* 
 ments of students of French in the advanced classes of High Scl ools. 
 The admirable practice in the elements of French afforded by the 
 exercises of Fasquelle renders possible more thorough and more advanced 
 work than the First Part itself supplies ; while the attention paid to 
 the study of French in our secondary schools — an attention due not only 
 to the force and beauty of the language, but also to its position as one 
 of the languages of our country — renders this advanced and thorough 
 work desirable. Under these circumstances the present Second Part is 
 offered in the hope that it may be of some service in promoting the study 
 of French. 
 
 It is intended by the Second Part to supply whatever was omitted 
 from the First Part on account of the more elementary character of that 
 work ; to furnish a systematic theoretical grammar for reference ; and 
 to carry forward with increased difficulty the practical study of Frerch, 
 especially in the direction of the writing of continuous prose. 
 
 Certain new theories, aiming at a rational study of certain parts of 
 French grammar, will be found embodied in the work, which, however, in 
 the main does not deviate from the system of theoretical grammar at 
 present in vogue. In the extracts for translation the author has made 
 with an unwilling hand occasional verbal changes, for the purpose of 
 rendering the selections more suitable themes to the theory to which 
 they are appended. In one or two instances in the exercises, likewise, 
 some sacrifice has been made of English idiom for the sake of avoiding 
 difficulties in advance of the lessons in which they occur. 
 
 The grammarians to whom the author is indebted in the writing of the 
 Second Part are many. Something is due to the works of Eugdne* 
 
 Q.7945 
 
1 ' vi ^.^;,. " ,, ^ 
 
 Fasnaoht, Baume, Bu6, Brachet, De Fivas, Roulier, Kittell, and 
 Whitney. But he is under the greatest obligations as to theory and 
 exercises, to the Orammaires franfaisea of lArousse, Larive et Floury ; 
 to that splendid tribute to the Frenoh'language, — the Pramo'.ische Gram- 
 matik of Edouard Mfttzner ; and to the dictionaries of Littr^ and the 
 French Academy. 
 
 The author takes the opportunity here aflfbrded to thank for most 
 kind help in the readihg of' proofs, Prof.' Dr. Archibidd MabMeohan of 
 Dalhousie College, Halifax ; Rev. T. Z. Lefebvi^, B.G.L., 6f Quebec ; and 
 £. J. Mclntyre, F^., B.A., of the OoUejopiate Institute, St. Oaitharines. 
 
 Parhdak Collegiate Institute, 
 Toronto. 
 
 -',-■ : .(■ -,- 
 
 > .'j ;> :/■ ■.::■.:■- 
 
GRAMMATICAL INDEX. 
 
 Paob. 
 1-2 
 
 2-23 
 
 [The numlMn in the paragraphs refer to sub-seotion numbera.] 
 pEtiMiNARY Section 
 
 Contraction, 1. EUiion, 2. Um of Capital!. 8. Derivation and Analogy 
 of Words in English and French, 4-6. 
 
 The Nouh 
 
 Gender, 6-22.— To Determine the Gender— by Meaning, 6-7, by Form, 8. 
 Nouns dlflering fai Meaning as they differ in Gender, 9. Formation of 
 the Feminine, 12-22. Number, 28-88.— Plural of Common Nouns, 23-28 ; 
 of Compound Nouns, 28-35 ; of Proper Nouns, 36 ; Nouns used only in 
 the Plural, 37-38. Uses of the Noun and of the Article, 80-67.— The 
 -ti- . Particular Noun, 42-46 ; the General Noun, 47-48 ; the Partitive Noun, 
 49-53 ; the Indefinite Noun, 64-56 ; the Indeterminate Noun, 67. 
 
 The Adjective 27-50 
 
 Formation of the Feminine, 68-60. Of the Plural, 61-62 ; of Compound 
 Adjectives, 63. Agreement, 64-72. Place, 73-81. Comparison, 82-86. 
 Complements, 87-91. Adjectives used adverbially, 92. Numeral Ad- 
 jectives, 93-94 ; Fractional, Multiplicative, Collective Numerals, 95. 
 t Indefinite Adjectives, 96-109. Possessive Adjectives and Possessive 
 Pronouns Contrasted, etc., 110-118. Limitations in the Use of Possessive 
 Adjectlveis, 114-115. Demonstrative Adjectives and Demonstrative 
 Pronouns Contrasted, etc., 116-120. Interrogative Adjectives, 121rl22. 
 
 The Pronoun. 
 
 50-62 
 
 Possessive, 110-111. Demonstrative, 116-120. Interrogati' h 123-125. 
 indefinite, 126-137. Relative, 138-147. Personal, 148-164 ; Place of 
 Personal Pronouns, 156-159 ; Repietttioii, 160-161. • '" y 
 
 The Verb 64-123 
 
 « 
 
 General Remarks— on Conjugations, 162-164 ; on Root and Terminations, 
 165-167 ; on Formation of Tenses, 168. Paradigms : Auxiliaries and the 
 Regrulat' Conjugations, 169-17^. Peculiarities to the First Conjuga- 
 tion, 176. Interrogative Verbs, 176-177. Negative Verbs, 178-180. 
 Passive Verbs, 181-185. Reflective Verbs, 186-187. Auxiliaries of In- 
 transitive Verbs, 188-190. Impersonal Verbs, 191-192. The Irregular 
 Verbs ; Suggestions for a new grouping of Verbs, 193-198 ; Irregular 
 Conjugations, 199 ; Index of the Irregular Verbs, 200. Agreement, 
 201-204. Place of Verb and Subject Noun, 205-206. Complements 
 of Verbs, 207-212. Place of Complements, 213-214. Tenses of the In- 
 dicative, including the so-called Conditional, 215>226. The Impera- 
 tive, 227. Indicative and Subjunctive Contrasted, etc., 227-236. Tenses 
 of the Subjunctive, 287-289. The Infinitive, 240-249. The Participle— 
 
 • • 
 
 vu 
 
Vlll 
 
 Verbal Adjective, 250 ; Oerund, 251 ; PresAiit PMrtlclple, 252-258 ; the 
 PMt Participle, 254-258. 
 
 The Advirb 125-129 
 
 Adverb* o( Time, 260 ; of Place, 260 ; of Quantity, 261 ; of Afflrmatlon, 
 262; of Negration, 268-266 : of Order, 267 ; of Repetition, 268 ; of Man- 
 ner and the Formation of Adverbe of Manner, 260-270. Comparison of 
 Adverb, 271-272. Nouna ai Adverbe, 278. Place of the Adverb, 274. 
 
 The PRKPOSTTioy 131-134 
 
 The Principal Prepositions and their Uses, 275-801. Repetition of the 
 Prepositions, 802. 
 
 The GoNj(7Ncrrioy 180 
 
 Conjunctions with the Indicative or Subjunctive, 284 ; with the Indica- 
 tive, 285, a ; with the .Subjunctive, 285 I. The Conjunction of Sub- 
 stitution, 286. Use of et and and, 804. 
 
 The Interjection . . 135 
 
 The Common Interjections, 805. Other Parts of Speech as Interjec- 
 tions, 806. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS, BRACKETS. 
 
 The customary grammatical abbreviations have been employed : maae. or m. for 
 mtueuli'M; /em. or /. for feminine; ting, for sin^ittor; p{. tot plural; indie, for 
 indicative ; subf. for subjunctive ; pret. for preaent ; part, for participle ; P.P. for 
 past participle, etc. 
 
 In the exercises words in Italics are to be omitted; words In parentheses (),— If 
 Enffllsh, give a construction similar to the French construction,— if French, supply the 
 word used to translate the preceding English word ; words In square brackets [ ], 
 though unnecessary to the English sentence, are essential to the French ; the hyphens 
 between words not actually requiring them denote that the French equivalents will be 
 single words. 
 
Lessons in French. 
 
 PART II. 
 ' I.— PRELIMINARY SECTION. 
 
 I. CONTRACTIOK (CONTRACTION). 
 
 1. De ; A. The forma le and les of tha Article after de beoome du, des ; after 
 &. au. auz. 
 
 So also with lequel, etc.; J>« livret auxquela je penae. Not so, however, in the 
 pronoun 2e, let : J'aime & le (les) voir. 
 
 An old contraction of en and let is BtiU to be noticed in a few expressions : maUre 
 da arts ; baehelier hs lettret, etc. 
 
 II. Elision (Elision). 
 
 3. The elision of the vowel before another vowel or K* mute takes place with the 
 following words : 
 
 1. The article le, la : Toiseau ; r^;)^e ; rAo7n)n«. ' ' ' 
 
 2. The pionouns le, la, Je, te, me, se, ce before verbs or the pronouns en and y. 
 
 8. The relative que and the conjunction que ; also de and ne : Je venae qu'il 
 fcuse ee qu'il dU. 1 1 n'a pas A'argent. 
 
 4. Jusque : Jl vient jusgu'iei. But jusque sometimes adds a to avoid elision : 
 jtuqtus d quand. 
 
 6. Iiorsque, pulsque, quolque ; but only before <Z, elU, on, its, elle$, trn, une: 
 Lorsqu'im homme vierU ; quoiqu'il soit grand. 
 
 6. Entre ; but only in compound nouns and verbs : entr'acte ; entr'ouvrir. 
 
 7. Presque, but only \npresqu'tle , quelque, but only before un(e) : quelqu'un. 
 
 8. Grand' occurs in many familiar words : grand'mhre, grantPohose, grand'/aim, 
 
 9. 81 ; but only before il and Us : B'll veut, slls veulent. 
 
 Non— Elision does not take place before onze, omiime, out, ottate, uhlan, yaeht. 
 
 *H is aspirate in the following words and their derivatives : hache, hate, haillon, 
 haine, hair, hdle, haletant, halle, hallebarde, halte, hamac, hameau, hianche, hangar, 
 hanneton, hanter, harangue, haras, harceler, hardes, hardi, harem, hareng, haricot, 
 hamais, harpe, harpie, hasard, hdte, hauban, haubert, hautain, haut, havre, havresac, 
 hennir, Henri, heraut. h^ron, hiros (derivatives mute), hetre, heurter, hibou, hideux, 
 hUrarehie, hister, hocner, hochet. Hollande, homard, Hangrie, honte, horde, hors- 
 d'ceuvre, HotterUm, houblan, houille, hu4e, hussard, hurler, etc. 
 
 III. Use of thb Capital Letter (Emfloi de la Lettre majuscule). 
 
 8. The differences between the English and French use of the capitals are nudnly aa 
 follows : 
 
 1. The adjective is not written with a capital unless forming a compound with % 
 word that requires the capital : 
 
 VtiEn Bupr6me, un livre fWuiQiUs ; but : le Saint-Bsprit, les ]fit»ts-nni& 
 
 1 
 
2 
 
 Non— The adjeetive forming with a oommon noun a proper name takes the capital: 
 la mer Rouge, la foret Noire. 
 
 2. Oommon nouns in French used as titles are not written with capitals : le xvi 
 David, la mer Paciflque, le marechal Grammont. 
 
 3. The names of months, days of the week ; the points of the compass, unless form- 
 ing part of a title, are written without capitals : Jan/ier, fevrier ; lundi, mardi ; le 
 nord, le sud. (But : TAm^rique du Nord, rAmSrique du Sud.) 
 
 4. Names of religions are wiitten with small letters : le christianisme, le ma- 
 homdtisme. 
 
 6. Monsieur, madame, etc., unless abbreviated, are usually without a capital : je 
 voiis prie, messieurs, etc. But : MM. de Saint>Aignan et Dangeau. 
 
 IV. Derivation and Analogy of Words in English and French. 
 
 4. English words derived from French have changed but little if the French primi* 
 tives ended in : 
 
 •able : capable, aimable. 
 •acle: miracle, spectacle. 
 ■ode: parade, promenade. 
 •eige : rage, image, &ge. 
 ' aire into 'ary : ordinaire. 
 •al : canal, general. 
 •anceinto-ancy: Constance. 
 •ant : constant, instant. 
 •i(e) into -y : libertc, arm^e. 
 •iffe : college, cortege. 
 
 -el : cruel; or •al: patemel. 
 •ent : present, prudent. 
 •ence : presence, prudence. 
 •eur into -(<tt)r : labeur. 
 •eux into -ous : g^n^reux. 
 •ible : possible, sensible. 
 ■ice : notice, avarice. 
 -ide into -id : livide. 
 •ie iiito -y . melodie, fuiie. 
 •ten into •ian : Chretien. 
 
 -ine : m6decine, famine. 
 ■in into ■ine : masculin. 
 •ion : attention, religion. 
 •ique into ic: math^matique. 
 -ir into -ish : flnir, vemir. 
 -ifinto -ioe : natif, actif. 
 -ismeinto t»m;enthusiasme. 
 ■igte into -ist : artiste. 
 ■ure : culture, nature, 
 -user into -tise: abuser, etc. 
 
 NoTB. The A, ^ often indicate the older French 8 preserved in some English deriva- 
 tives. Maltre, master ; r^pondre, respond ; p&te, paste ; d^ployer, display, etc. 
 
 6. The proper names in -a. in English usually end iu -e in French ; classical names 
 in -o and -es in English, in -on and -e in French. 
 
 California, 
 
 Californie 
 
 Africa, 
 
 Afrique. 
 
 Louisa. 
 
 Louise. 
 
 But Prussia, 
 
 Prusse. 
 
 Cicero, 
 Plato, 
 Socrates, 
 Diogenes, 
 
 Cic6ron. 
 Platon. 
 Socrate. 
 Diog^ne. 
 
 ir. THE NOUN (DU NOM). ' 
 
 X'Jj: 
 
 ' I. GENDER (DU GENRE). 
 
 I. To Determine the Gender. 
 
 6, The gender of nouns may be determined from (1) the Meaning, 
 (2) the For\n. 
 
 The student of Latin has a third means— from the gender of the original word In 
 Latin. French nouns have almost always preserved the gender of Latin nouns from 
 which they are derived. Masc. and neut. nouns in Latin are masc. in French ; (except 
 abstract nouns in -or which are usually fem. in French); fem. in Lat. are fem. in French. 
 
8 
 
 1. OKNDER ACCORDTNO TO MSAKINO. 
 
 7. Of masculine gender are 
 names of : 
 
 1. Males : oncle, tigre, cbieu, 
 
 etc. 
 
 ExcBPTiONS— bfite, fool, dupe, pratique, 
 ctistomer, sentinelle, sentinel, viotime. 
 
 2. Seasons, Months, Days of the 
 Week: 6t6, Janvier^ mercredi, etc. 
 
 3. Points of the Compass, Met* 
 
 als, Mountains, Winds : est, east, 
 
 ietf le Jura, acquilon, north wind, 
 
 etc. 
 
 ExcBPnoNS— bise, north toind (poet.), 
 brise, breeze, moussons, trade-winds. 
 
 4. ^ Measures in the French 
 decimal system: gramme, m^tre, 
 centime, kilogramme, etc. ' 
 
 6. Trees, Shrubs : ch^ne, oak, 
 pommier. apple-tree ; groseillier, 
 currant-biuih, etc. 
 
 ExcRpnoNS— dpine, thorn; aubepine, 
 hawthorn ; vigne, vine. 
 
 6. Countries, Flowers, Fruits, 
 Rivers, Towns, not ending in 
 e mute : Canada, Danemarc ; 
 oeillet, pink, pavot, poppy ; melon, 
 raisin, grape ; St. Laurent, Nia- 
 gara ; Londres, Paris, etc. 
 
 7. Other Parts of Speech used 
 as Nouns are masculines : 
 
 (1) Adjectives : (a) as abstract 
 
 nouns : le beau, le sublime. 
 (6) As names of colors : le 
 vert, green, le jaune, yeh 
 low. (c) As names of lan- 
 guages : le f ran9ais, le 
 chinois. 
 
 (2) Infinitives : le boire et le 
 
 manger, drinking ami eating. 
 
 (3) Letters of the alphabet, etc.: 
 
 un a, un si, un pourquoi. 
 
 Of feminine gender 
 names of: 
 
 axe 
 
 a. Females : tante, tigresse, 
 chienne, etc. 
 
 b. Festivals : la (f^te de) St. 
 Jean, Midsummer's Day ; la Saint- 
 Pierre. 
 
 Exceptions— Noel, Christmas ; thoujrh 
 one may say, as above, la (fete de) Nogl. 
 
 c. Some Kanges of Mountains : 
 les Alpes, )es Pyr^n^es, les mon- 
 tagnes Rocheuses, etc. 
 
 r y 
 
 d. Virtues and Vices : vertu, 
 charity, intemperance, etc. 
 
 Exceptions— coun^re,in^rite,menBonge, 
 lying ', orjrueil, pride, vice. 
 
 e. Countries, Flowers, Fruits, 
 
 Rivers, Towns, ending in e 
 
 mute : Angleterre, Russie ; pen- 
 
 s^e, pansy, marguerite, daisy ; 
 
 figue, datte ; Tamise, Thames ; 
 
 Rome. 
 
 ExcBPTiONb— le Mexique, le Hanovre, le 
 Bengale, le Danube, le Rh6ne, le Tibre, 
 le Tage ; ch^vrefeuille, honeysuckle. 
 
 '<'-..f 
 
2. OEN^jER 4C0ORDIKO TO FORM. 
 
 8. Nouns masculine are : 
 
 1. Those ending in a conson- 
 ant. Except the following 
 
 masculines : 
 
 bastion ; tison, fire-hrand ; poison ; pois- 
 ' son, Ash; soupQon, suspicion. 
 
 masculines : 
 
 bonheur, good-fortune; malheur, bad- 
 fortune^ honneur, honor; d^honneur, 
 dinhonor. 
 
 2. Those ending in any vowel 
 except e mute. Except the 
 
 masculines : 
 
 apart^, words aside ; arrit^, resolution ; 
 oomit^, committee ; comt^, county ; cdM, 
 tide ; p&te, pie ; traits, treatise ; the, tea. 
 
 Many nouns (3000' in e 
 niute are masouline : 
 3. Masculine endings in e mute 
 
 are : -age, -asme, -isme, -cle, 
 
 •4me, -6ge, -6me. Except 
 
 the . 
 
 Nouns feminine are: 
 
 feminines : 
 
 olef, key; net, ship ; soif, thirst i IsAia, 
 hunger ; fin, end; main, Aand; chan- 
 son, song ; fagon, manner ; leQon, les- 
 son', rancon, ransom; brebis, sheep ; fois, 
 time ; vis, screw ; oasis ; dent, tooth ; 
 dot, dowry ; lovet, J'^rest ; gent, people ; 
 niort, death ; part, share ; paix, peace ; 
 ohaux, lime; faux, scythe; perdrix, par- 
 tridge ; croix, cross ; noix, aut ; poix, 
 piim; voix, voice; Umx, cough, 
 
 a. Those ending in -cion, -gion, 
 -nion, -sion, -tion, -xion, 
 •son, -goji. Except the follow- 
 ing 
 
 b. Abstract nouns ending 
 in -eur, and the words : fleur, 
 flower ; liqueur, liquor ; lueur, 
 gleam ; rumeur, rumor ; sueur, 
 sweat ; tumeur, tumor ; vapeur, 
 vapor. Except the f oUowing 
 
 feminines : 
 
 apris-midi, afternoon; bru, daughter- 
 in-law ; eau, water; toi,Jatth; fouriui, 
 ant ; loi, law ; peau, skin ; tribu, tribe ; 
 vertu, virtue. 
 
 e. Those ending in -t^, -ti^. 
 Except the following 
 
 Most nouns (7000) in e 
 mute axe feminine ; 
 
 feminines : 
 
 page, rage, image, plafre, coast ; nage, 
 sw»nmii\g ; deb&ole, breaking up qflhe 
 ice ; crftme, cream. 
 
/ 
 
 niftHculinej : 
 silence, espaoe, space ; grade. 
 
 d, F«minin« endings in « mute 
 are : -ace, -aae, -0110(8)6, 
 •enc(8)e, -i^re, -ine, -ique, 
 •are, etc. Except the foUowiuf; 
 
 e. 
 
 masculines : • 
 
 iiitervalie, interval ; ch^vrefcuille, 
 honeysuckle ; libelle, libel ; verinicelle, 
 vermicello ; vaudeville ; Uerre, tv;/; par- 
 terre, flotoer-garden ; tonnerre, thun- 
 der; verre, glass; carosse, carriage 
 amulette, amulet; squelette, skeleion; 
 and noung ending in -urre. 
 
 masculines : 
 
 oamee, cameo ; oolis^e, coliseum ; lyc^e, 
 college ; mausol^e, mausoleum ; mus^e, 
 museum; genie, genius; inoendie, 
 conflagration. 
 
 4. Compounds of which a 
 verb rorius part. Except the 
 
 e mute preceded by a 
 doubled consonant (nn, 11, 
 pp, rr, ss, tt) Except the 
 
 /. 
 
 o miute preceded by aji- 
 other vowel. Except the 
 
 feminines : 
 
 garde-rohe, 
 snow-drop. 
 
 wardrobe ; perce-neige. 
 
 II. Nouns that differ is Meaning as they differ in Gender. 
 
 9. Masc. 
 help(jn,), aide, 
 eagle (jn.), aigle, 
 
 TAf- )<»«»•«• 
 
 crape, crSpe, 
 
 critic, critique, 
 
 forgery, fauz, 
 
 foudre de ^ 
 
 puerre= Ifoutuo, 
 great war- r**'"***»'» 
 
 rior, etc J 
 
 kwive, fotirbe, 
 
 guard 
 (soldier), 
 
 hymn, poem, hymne, 
 book, livre, 
 
 Fem. Masc. 
 
 help,helper(t.).\ cabin-boy 
 (standard, 
 \ eagle (t). 
 /As noun: 
 I thing. 
 
 couple, two. 
 
 pan-cake, 
 criticism,, 
 scythe. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 moss. 
 
 I garde. 
 
 / thunder, 
 \ lightning. 
 
 knavery. 
 
 ^protection, 
 ■I guard 
 
 \ (troops). 
 churchhyinn. 
 
 pound. 
 ( sleeve, Eng- 
 handle, manche, \ lish Chan- 
 
 ( nel. 
 
 {working (ot 
 machines), 
 etc. 
 memoir, biU, xndmoire, mermry. 
 thanks, merd, mercp. 
 
 mood(ifnm.),mo&e, fashion. 
 
 mouM, moule, mussel. 
 
 oeuvre. 
 
 mousse, 
 
 great com- ' 
 
 position ; 
 
 le grand 
 
 eeuvre (in 
 
 alchemy), 
 duty,divine\ 
 
 service, 
 
 pageOioy), page. I^J^k^f 
 
 paraUeHcom- l„a~.iiAi« J a parallel . 
 parison), / P*™""®*®' 1 (line), 
 pendule, clock, 
 
 (definite ve- 
 
 p^rlode, • • *- 
 
 (work, (lea 
 J oeuvres de 
 1 =the 
 
 \, works of. 
 
 pantry. 
 
 personne. 
 podle, 
 
 pendulum, 
 
 acme, in- 
 definite 
 period. 
 
 As pronoun 
 = nobody, 
 
 stove, 
 
 post, station, posted 
 
 hackney- 
 coach, 
 
 balance (of 
 accountX 
 
 slumber, 
 
 smile, 
 
 trios, 
 
 trumpeter, 
 
 vase, 
 
 veil, 
 
 somme, 
 
 souris, 
 
 tour, 
 
 triod, sen- 
 tence. 
 I As noun=: 
 \ ijerson. 
 frying-pan. 
 post (office^ 
 ' coam-house, 
 remittance, 
 pay (fit 
 
 soldiersX 
 sum. 
 mouse, 
 tower. 
 
 trompette, trumpet, 
 vase, slime, 
 
 voile, saU, 
 
t 
 
 10. Amour, love, d^lice, delight, oiirue, organ, ara mawulin* in th« sinyular, 
 feminine in the plural. 
 
 11. Oens, people, requires adjectives tiiat pn cede it to be feminine, adjectives or 
 pronouns tliat follow it to be masculine. 
 
 Ces vieilles gens sont 80up9onneuz. Los meilleures gens que J'aie Jamais 
 vus. 
 
 Tous, however, remains in the masculine un'.ess accompanied by an adjective with a 
 termination specially feminine. 
 
 Tous les gens. Tous les honnStes gens. But : toute9 ces vieilles gens. 
 
 The phrases gens de robe, lawyers, gens d'^p6e, soldiers, gens de lettres, 
 tmitera, require, from their masculine force, all adjectives in the masculine. 
 
 III. Formation of the Feminine of Nouns. 
 
 » 
 
 12. First Bule.— Add to the masculine e mute: marquis, mar- 
 quise ; g^ant, gdante ; Louis, Louise, etc. 
 
 Should the addition of e mute be made to -er, the first e becomes grave. Cf. 58, 1. 
 Ouvrier, ouvricre ; ^colier, ^coli^re ; berger, berg^re. ^ 
 
 13. Second Bule — Nouns formed from present participles (as 
 cltanteur from chantant) change -ear into -euse. 
 
 danseuse. 
 demandeuse. 
 parleuse. 
 pScheuse. 
 
 danseur, 
 
 demandeur, 
 
 parleur, 
 
 pScheur, 
 
 porteur, 
 
 rieur, 
 
 porteuse. 
 rieuse. 
 
 chasseur 
 chanteur 
 
 chasseuse, 
 
 chasseresse (poetical), 
 chanteuse, 
 
 cantatrice (professional 
 singer). 
 
 14. Third Bule — Nouns in -teur often become -trice, especially 
 when not derived from present participles. : -; ^ 
 
 acteur, actrice. 
 
 admirateur, admiratrice. 
 
 bienfaiteur, bienfaitrice. 
 
 conducteur, conductrice. 
 
 conservateur, conservatrice. 
 
 consolateur, consolatrice. 
 
 d^biteur, d^bitrice, debtor. 
 
 directeur, directrice. 
 
 15. Fourth. Bule — Change -e into -esse. 
 
 inspecteur, 
 instituteur, 
 pers^cuteur, 
 protecteur. 
 
 Also : 
 ambassadeur^ 
 empereur, 
 
 inspectrice. 
 institutrice. 
 pers^cutrice. 
 protectrice. 
 
 ambassadrice. 
 imp^ratrice. 
 
 abb6, 
 
 comte, 
 
 hdte, 
 
 maltre, 
 
 nSgre, 
 
 pretre, 
 
 prince 
 
 abbesse. 
 
 comtesse. 
 
 hdtesse. 
 
 maitresse. 
 
 n^gresse. 
 
 pr^tresse. 
 
 prince'ss. 
 
 traltre, traltresse. 
 tigre, tigresse. 
 
 Also ; 
 d^fendeur, defendant, 
 
 (law), d^fenderesse. 
 demandeur, plaintiff, 
 
 dieu, d^esse. 
 
 enchanteur,enchanteresse. 
 larron, larronnesse. 
 p^cheur, p^cheresse. 
 vendeur, vendor (law), 
 
 venderesse. 
 vengeur. vengeresse. 
 
 (law), demanderesse. 
 proph^te, proph^tesse 
 
 16. So also borgne. drdie, ivrogne, mulfttre, pauvre, 
 Suisse become, when used as nouns, borgnesse, drdlesse, ivrog< 
 
I th« singular, 
 
 nesse, etc., though when used as adjectives, they do not change for the 
 feminine. See 59, 1. < • 
 
 17. Fifth Bule — Change -en into -eune, -on into -onne, -et 
 into -ette : arithm^ticien, arithm^ticienne ; chien, chienne ; musicien, 
 musicienne ; baron, baronne ; lion, lionne ; sujet, sujette. 
 
 18. The following nouns do not fall under the above rules : 
 
 ^poux, Spouse. mulct, mule. 
 
 gouvemeur, gouvernante. nourricier, nourrice. 
 ^ros, hdrolne. 
 
 Jean, Jeanne, 
 
 jouvenceau, jouvencelle. 
 loup, louve. 
 
 19. The following feminines are from ai£ferent roots : 
 
 canard, cane, 
 chat, chatte. 
 
 cochon, coche. 
 
 compagnon, compagne 
 czar, czarine. 
 
 dindon, dinde. 
 
 paysan, paysanne. 
 serviteur, itervante. 
 veuf, vonve. 
 
 vieillard, vieilie. 
 
 boeuf, 
 cerf, 
 [cheval, 
 [coq. 
 
 vache. 
 biche. 
 jument. 
 poule. 
 
 fr6re, s(Bur. 
 
 gendre, bru (belle-iille). 
 
 m&le, femelle. 
 
 mari, femme. 
 
 monsieur, 
 oncle, 
 
 madame. 
 tante. 
 
 papa, 
 parrain. 
 
 maman. 
 marraine. 
 
 20. The following are used in masculine or feminine without change : 
 
 artiste, 
 camarade, 
 compatriote, 
 domestique, 
 
 ^16ve, 
 
 enfant (masc. in plu.), 
 
 esclave, 
 
 malade, 
 
 pensionnaire, boardeVf 
 pupille, ward. 
 
 21. Notns such as artisan, cJief, docteur, 4crivain, imposteur, peintre, 
 philosophe, poUe, t4moin, being generally applied only to men, are used 
 only in the masculine, even when applied to women. 
 
 Madame Rosa Bonheur est un peintre de premier ordre. 
 
 22. Names of animals that have received a fixed gender may have 
 mdle or femeUe added to indicate sex : 
 
 un moineau mdfe, ■ i une alouette mdfe, 
 
 unmoiueau/eme^^. | une alouette/eme^^ 
 
 TniiMS 1. ^ 
 
 Translate. Comment on tb' Gender of the nouns employed. 
 
 1. Bonjour, mes ^l^ves. Nous commengons cette apr^s-midi la se- 
 conde partie des Lemons de frangais, n'est-ce pas ? 2. Si, monsieur. 
 Mais k propos du mot partie, puis-je vous faire une question ? Quelle 
 diff(^rence y a-t-il entre partie, part et parti f 3. Prenez cette pomme. 
 Divisez-la en quatre parties. Nous sommes quatre ici. Dounez un 
 morceau k chacun. Mamtenant chacun a sa part. 4. Les partis politiques 
 ne partagent pas ainsi, cependant, les fruits de leurs victoires. 5. Quels 
 sont les fruits dont vous avez appris les noms, Georges ? 6. Les fruits qui 
 yiennent sur des arbres^ sont les pommes, les poires, les prunes, les cer- 
 ises, lez pSches, les abricots, les bananes ; sui des arbrisseaux, les gro- 
 seilles, les framboises, 7* En ajoutant -ier au nom du fruit nous saurons 
 
le nom de I'arbre sur lequel il vient. Ainsi,—- pommier, poirier, abri- 
 cotier, groseillier, etc. 8. Citez les principaux pays de TAm^rique, 
 Marie. 9. Dans TAm^rique du Nord,— la puissance du Canada, les 
 Etats-Unis, le Mexique ; dans TAm^rique du Sud,— le V6n6zu61a, lea 
 Etats-Unis de la Colombie, I'Equateur, le P6rou, la Bolivie, le Chili, la 
 r^publique Argentine, le Br^sil. 10. Les principaux fleuves de la 
 France, Fran9oise. 1 < . La Seine, la Loire, la Garonne et le BhOne. 
 12. Les priucipauA ^^taux, Victor. 13. Le fer est le plus utile, I'or lu 
 plus beau, it y a d'autres m«^taux, — retain, le plomb, le cuivre, lu 
 piatine, etc. 14. Citez des femmes renomm^es. 12. Catherine II ^tait 
 le chef d'un grand empire. 16. Jeanne d'Aro a ^t^ le sau^'^eur de la 
 France. 16. Madame ae Stael ^tait un charmant ^crivain. 17. Madame 
 de S^vign^ est un des meilleurs auteurs de la France. 18. Si j'^tudie 
 les sciences deviendrai*je savante, monsieur ? 19. Certaines gens ^tudient 
 toute leui vie ; k la mort, ils ont tout appris, excepts k penser. 20. Jo 
 suis amateur de tableaux, comme beaucoup d'autres dames. 21. Citez 
 des vices. 22. La poltronnerie, la malice, la haine, le mensonge. 23. 
 II faut bonne m<^moire apr^s qu*on a menti. 24. Citez des vertus main- 
 tenant, Jacques. 25. La reconnaissance, I'honneur, le courage, la bien- 
 faisance. 26. Ne vous rappelez-vous pas un certain verset de la sainte 
 Bible, Philippe ? 27. Maintenant done ces trois vertus demeurent : la 
 foi, I'esp^rance et la charity ; mais la plus grande esh la charity. 28. 
 Heureux ceux qui ayant bier, v^cu, meurent dans le Selgncnr, car leur.s 
 bonnes oeuvres les suivent. 
 
 Exercise 2. : - 
 
 1. The mother thinks always of the future of her dear children ; their 
 happiness will make her own. 2. Every day she imagines to herself 
 what they will become. 3. Mary is a musician ; she will become a great 
 performer. 4. Henry likes reading ; he is fond of the works of the poets 
 and historians ; his national hymn is, in my opinion (selon moi)^ very fine ; 
 he will be an author. 6. Justice is the consoler of the afflicted and the 
 avenger of the innocent. 6. John will be a lawyer ; plaintiffs, defend- 
 ants will be his society. 7. Frances, however, will be his friend and 
 his companion. 8. George loves travel, adventure, war. 9. Red, white 
 and blue are his favorite colors. 10. He wishes to become a soldier. 11. 
 He will be a faithful sentinel at his post. 12. Madame B. will be his 
 friend 7nd benefactress in India. 13. The great powers of Europe are 
 England, Germany, France, Russia, Austria, Iv'aly. 14. The north, the 
 south, the east, and the west are the four cardinal points. 15. Feb- 
 ruary is the shortest month. 16. After midsummer the days become 
 shorter ; after Christmas, longer. 17. The little ship-boy is singing in (d) 
 the shrouds. Do you hear his voice ? 18. The ancient hymns of the 
 Church have the merit of simplicity. 19. Mary is a great laugher and 
 a great talker. 20. A Canadian who did not know French too well was 
 traveUing in Belgium. 21. He alighted at a hotel. 22. He begged the 
 servant to (de) show him the way to (of) the office, using, L'^wever, the 
 wordoj^ce. 23. "Excuse me, sir, I beg you. Stranger., are not ad- 
 mitted to the pantry," replied the astonished servant. 
 
 24. ** There is no land like England, where'er the light of day may be ; 
 There are no hearts like English hearts, such hearts of oak as 
 they be." 
 
Composition 3. 
 
 hildren ; their 
 
 The Spring. 
 
 The silence and desolation of winter are gone*. The birds are singing 
 
 in the wood ; the breeze brings the perfume of the gardens and the fields ; 
 
 the sweet warmth of the sun makes itself felt^; spring is come. What 
 
 I a' beautiful season I I do not wonder^ that spring has been'^ represented 
 
 i as a young laughing girl ladon with^ flowers ; for it represents youth, 
 
 I happiness and hope. Everything is renewed. In the meadow the 
 
 violet, the primrose, the hepaticas, all the spring flovvers may be found*; 
 
 (the field has a new robe of verdure ; along the river and in the forest, 
 
 Ithe willow, the beech, the birch, the maple, the oak, vie with one an- 
 
 ■other in reclothing themselves with^ leaves of^ the most delicate tints. 
 
 |How joyous, too, is the song of the birds I Everj' tree is an orchestra 
 
 rhose strains gladden the heart. Man divests himself of the cares of 
 
 the world in listening to' them* And the perfume 1 The soft showers 
 
 >f spring have (are) fallen and have watered the earth ; the buds swell, 
 
 ind become leaves and flowers which emit a fragrance that embalms the 
 
 lir. It is the season, too, of move lent and activity. There is not one 
 
 blade of grans, not one. plant, not one shrub, that does not feel a new life, 
 
 nd that does not lift its head to welcome the gentle warmth of the sun. 
 
 ?he old world becomes young again ; the heroic ages return. Life is no 
 
 tonger a struggle, a labor, but an aspiration, a hope, a victory, when 
 
 spring gives to the world its perfume and its songs. 
 
 'r'orff. *8eniir. Use the infinitive. '55. Ve'/onncr, with subjunctive. ^Act. voice 
 rith on. ^chargide. i8erevetir(irreg.)arenvide. 8d, Hcouter. 
 
 II. Formation of the Plural (Formation du Plurikl). 
 
 ,. General ilule : Add s to 
 the singular. - 
 
 Nouns in French add s to form 
 Ithe plural : voisin, voisins ; voi- 
 Isine, voisines, etc. 
 
 ■landau, landaus, (sort ot) carriage ; bleu, 
 Ibleus, bhie. 
 
 al, baZZ; oai, callosity; car naval : cha 
 
 i\. Jackal; no™' ' '-' — "■ --—' 
 
 treat, which ad 
 
 rail, i/(ut; vtu, ciutosiiy ; carnavai : cna- 
 sal, Jackal ; nopal, nopal (plant) ; regal, 
 
 24. Bxceptional Bules : 
 
 1. Nouns ending in -s, -X, -Z 
 remain unchanged : le lis, les lis ; 
 la voix, les voix j le nez, les nez, 
 
 etc. _^; 
 
 2. Nouns ending in -eu, -au, 
 add X : feu, feux ; chapeau, cha- 
 peaux, etc. Except 
 
 .S. Nouns ending in -al change 
 al into aux : canal, canaux ; 
 g^n^ral, g^n^raux, etc Except 
 
v^ 
 
 ^ 4. Seven lioutis in -ail cliange 
 
 ' ail into aux ; and seven in -ou 
 
 " add X : 
 
 bail, 2ea<«. bijou, jewel, 
 
 oorail, corot caillou, pebble. 
 
 v.» imaW, enamel. chou, cubbctge. 
 
 Boupirail, atr-Ao7e. eenou, Jbnee. 
 
 BoaB-hai], under-lease, hibou, ow^. 
 
 " yantaW, lea/ of a door. Joujou, p/ay- 
 yitraW, stained window. thing, 
 
 * •. , Also: b^tail, caf(/e, bes- pou, 2ouM. 
 tiaux. 
 
 Other nouns in •ail and 'OU follow, of course, the General Bulc. 
 ^ventail, fan, (^ventails ; detail, details ; verrou, boli, verrous ; filou, 
 ro^ue, filous, etc. 
 
 25> A few nouns have two plural forms with a difference in meaning : 
 
 aieul 
 
 ciel 
 
 (grand-father, aieuls. 
 
 I ancestor, aieux. 
 ( sky, cieuJS.. 
 
 < aky in pictures, bed-tester, eli- 
 \ male, etc., dels. 
 
 {eye, 
 ceil- 
 ot 
 d 
 
 , yeux. 
 
 •de-bcBuf, oval window, OBll-de- 
 
 chat, cat's-eye (stone), etc., CBils- 
 de-Doeuf, etc. 
 
 ( work, travaux. 
 travail -{ report of a minister, brake, etc., 
 
 I. travails. 
 
 26. The parts of speech invariable by nature, when used as nouns, 
 remain invariable. The cardinal numerals are likewise invariable. 
 
 Les si, les pourquoi, les mais. | Trois quatre et un z^ro font 444\ | 
 
 27> The following foreign nouns are likewise invariable : 
 
 un (des) pater. un (des) Te Deum. I un (des) in-quarto. 
 
 un (des) av^. un (des) iu-folio. | un (des) in-octavo. 
 
 28. The following foreign nouns keep their foreign plural : 
 
 dilettante, 
 dilettanti (or reg. ) 
 
 lazarone, 
 lazaroni. 
 
 quintetto, 
 quintetti. 
 
 gipsy. 
 
 gipsies. 
 
 II. The Plural of Compound Nouns (Pluribl dans les noms 
 
 , - C0MP0S]6s). 
 
 29. The mode of forming the plural of compound nouns depends on| 
 (1) the Form of the compound, (2) The Meaning of its parts. 
 
 30f As to Form. The only words in French that admit of the^ 
 plural sign s (or a;, etc.) are nouns and adjectives ; consequently when j 
 the compound word contains a pronoun, a verb, an adverb, or a preposi- 
 tion such parts of speech remain iix variable. 
 
 un (des) passe-partont (by which to pass everywhere), pas8-key{s).\ 
 un (des) rendez-vous (verb and pronoun), place{8) of meeting. 
 des arri^re-boutiques, back shops. 
 
 31. The compound made up of a noun and an adjective, or of two | 
 
11 
 
 ice m meaning : 
 
 lNS les noms 
 
 ^asse-cour, basses- '^ours. 
 keau-fr^re, beaux-fr^res. 
 Ihat-huant, chats-huants 
 
 ouns, one used adjectively to the other, adds the plural sign to both 
 parts. 
 
 chef-lieu, chcfs-lieux. 
 oiseau-mouchc, oisoaux-mouches. 
 chien-Ioup, chiens-loups. 
 
 Feminine compounds with grancC do not talce the plural sign with the adjectives : 
 les srrand'meres, des grand'tantes. 
 
 32. The compound made up of two nouns connected l)y a preposition 
 Ids the plural sign only to the first. (Cf. fathers-in-law.) 
 
 i un arc-en-ciel, des arcs-en-ciel (bo"WS in the sky), rnin-hows. 
 un chef-d'oeuvre, des chefs-d'ceuvre 'nieces of "work), master-pieces. 
 I un croc-en- jambe, des croc8*en-jambe, trip^n), etc. 
 
 [n the words hdtel-Dieu, chief hosjntal, tltnhre-T^ste, vostage-stamp, theprepo* 
 Mon de is understood. Consequently we write des hdtels-Dieu, des timbres-poste. 
 
 Where the compound assumes the form of an ordinary noun by 
 
 omission of the hyphen, the General Rule applies. 
 
 ^Consequently we must say, notwithstanding their composition : 
 
 |un pourboire, des pourboires, tipia). 
 
 |un pourparler, des pourparlers, conference{s). 
 
 The following words still vary : 
 
 ptilhomme, gentllshommes, nobletnan. 
 tnsteur, messieurs, 
 iemoiselle, mesdemoiselles. 
 
 inonseijarneur, messeigneurs, my Lord. 
 madame, me8dames> 
 
 [34. As to Meaning. — I'he influence of the Meaning often affects 
 ^e application of the rules as to Form. It sometimes happens that the 
 >un in the compound has a singular force even when the compound is 
 lural. When this is the case the noun remains invariable. 
 
 un (des) abat-jour (to cast down the light), 8Jmde(s), 
 un (des) reveille-matin (to waken in the morning), alarm-clock{8). 
 une (des) perce-neige, (flowers which pierce the snow), snow-dropis). 
 un (des) porte-monnaie, purse{s). 
 [un (des) porte-malheur, person(8) bringing had luck, etc. 
 
 So also we may regard the words : 
 
 in (dea) coci-k-l'Ane, ramblinff speeehies). * 
 
 in(deB)t&te-ik-t&te, private conversation(8). 
 I (des) pied,-&-terre, lodging(s) on the road, temporary lodgings. 
 
 35. Verb and noun. — With compounds of a verb and a noun 
 bject, in which the noun may be taken in a plural sense when the com- 
 |>und is plural, there are sometimes two plural forms possible. 
 (Acac£mie.) (LittrI) 
 
 tive, or of two I 
 
 In porte-drapeau, ensign, des porte- 
 
 Idrapeau. 
 
 In porte-montre, watch-stand, des 
 
 I porte-montre. 
 
 des porte-drapeau or porte-dra- 
 
 peaux. 
 des porte-montre or porte-mon- 
 
 tres. 
 
12 
 
 The form with the plural sign ia more common ho\70ver, and no doubt | 
 
 will prevail : des garde-robes, des garde-fouE, etc. 
 
 The plural noun maybe required by the sense evtn with the singularnoun : \\n:\ 
 porte-olefs, aiurnkey. 
 
 III. — Plural of Proper Nouns (Pluribl dans les noms proprksJ 
 
 36. Proper Names of Counties follow the General Rule : lei| 
 deux Ameriques. 
 
 Proper names of persons 
 are invaj?iable ; 
 
 1. Used strictly as proper 
 names. 
 
 Lcs Turenne, les Duval, les deux 
 Corneille. 
 
 2. Used oratorically for a real 
 singular. 
 
 Les Corneille, les Moliire, les 
 Racine ont illustr^ le r^gne do 
 Louis XIV. (r^Corneille, Molidre, 
 Racine ont, etc.) 
 
 3. Used figuratively for names 
 of books. 
 
 J'ai achet^ deux Shakespeare, 
 deux T^l^maque. 
 
 Variable ; 
 
 rt. Used figuratively to indicat 
 a class of persons resembling thos 
 wliose names are employed. 
 
 Les Shakespeares sont rares. 
 
 b. Used to indicate great his 
 torical families. 
 
 Les Stuarts, les Scipions, It! 
 Bourbons. 
 
 c. Used figuratively for names i 
 of paintings, editions, etc. 
 
 II a des Elz<Jvirs precieux, <h 
 Raphaels. 
 
 IV. Nouns used only in the Plural. 
 
 are used only in the plural : ' ' ? 
 
 frais (d^pens), expense. 
 fun^railles (obs^ues), funeral. 
 moeurs, manners. 
 t^n^bres, darkness, - 
 vivres, prt visions. 
 
 meaning of the plural in the following nouusj 
 
 lingular : 
 
 lumi^re, lumi^res, Ught(s). 
 
 lumi^res, enlightenmeni\ 
 vacance, vacances, vacancies. 
 vaoances, holidays. 
 
 ' Th^me 4. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the formation of the Number of the nouns. 
 ' 1. Comment forme-t-on le pluriel d'un nom ? 2. En ajoutant un s d 
 singulier, monsieur. 3. Pas toujous, mon ami. 4. C'est 1^ la r^gl^ 
 g^n^rale, monsieur, ; les noms terminus au singulier par s, x, z son! 
 in variables, et les noms en au, eu, prennent x au pluriel, et presque touj 
 lea noms en al font leur pluriel en aux. 5. R^citez les noms en al e| 
 ceux en ail qui ne suivent pas la r6gle g^n^rale. 6. Traduisez : 
 
 37. The following nouns 
 alentours, neighbourhood, 
 archives (f.), archives. 
 catacombes (f.) catacombs, 
 environs, neighbourhood. 
 debris, ruins. 
 
 38. With the secondary 
 
 there is no corresponding a 
 
 ciseau, ciseaux, chiselfs). 
 ciseaux, scissors, 
 gage, gages, pledgefs). 
 gages, wages. 
 
13 
 
 r, and no doubt ' 
 
 singular noun : \m 
 
 following nounsi 
 
 hno« oompte vingt rois dans ses aleux. 7. Lea hommes sont toujours 
 penoux devant le pouvoir. 8. Lea hiboux gont des oiseaux de uuit qui 
 It les yeux ronds. 9. Lea abaeuta ont toujoura tort. 10. R^ponuez 
 Ix pourquoi d'un enfant et voua en ferez un homme. 11. La m^moire 
 [ mea aKeux m'eat ch^re. 12. Lea Pope, lea Swift, lea Addiaon ont 
 latrd le r^gne d'Anne d'Angleterre. 13. Sur le rivage on trouva lea 
 ivemaila dea vaisaeaux. 14. Lea agneaux ae mettent k I'abri de la 
 ipdte 80U8 lea arbriaaeaux. 15. Lea bateaux pour I'Angletenre par- 
 it le jeudi et le aamedi. 16. Lea ai et lea maia arrdtent tout. 17. Lea 
 karda ont viait^ lea baaaea-coura. 18. Un petit livre contient aouvent 
 is que dea in-quarto. 19. Faitea-moi gr&ce de toua cea d^taila. 20. 
 ^ttez troia un et deux quatre et voua aurez 1 1, 144. 21. Mea aceura ont 
 I n.aux de denta atroces. 22. Lea aouviceaux aont lea petita dea aouria. 
 Lea ah ! La oh 1 expriment la aiirprise ; lea ha ! lea ho ! mar- 
 )nt la douleur. 24. Lea pourquci aont aouvent tr^a embarraisanta et 
 [parce que tr^a embarraaa^a. 25. Comment ^cr^t-on au pluriel ka mota 
 ipoa^a qui auivent : ver k aoie, timbre-poate, arc-en-ciel, tire-bouton, 
 i-Douchon, arri^re-boutique, vice-pr^aident, eau-de-vie, chien-loup, 
 B^a-verbal, chef-lieu, fer k cheval, arri6re-gaide, garde-barri^re, baa- 
 bf, grand'm^re, grand-p^re ? 26. Indiquez comment aont form^'i lea 
 Kela: chauvea-aouria, coffrea-forta, corpa-de-garde, rougea-gorgea, 
 la-d'oeuvrea, gardea-champStrea, hdtela-Dieu, garde-robea, loupa- 
 pua, bouche-troua, manches k balai, toilea d'araign^Oi contes de f^9S) 
 liea, dea poat^acriptum, des Te Deum, des on dit. 
 
 EXERCISK 5. 
 
 The animals that play the principal parts {rdle m.) in fables are the 
 Bs, monkeys, lions, wolves, rabbits, hares, frogs, rats, grasshoppers, 
 I and asses. La Fontaine's Fables are masterpieces ; they are read 
 ^he palaces of kings and the huts of peasants. 3. Let us take our La 
 itaines and go to the woods where the birds, the brooks, the flowers 
 the trees will contribute to the pleasures of reading. 4. That is a 
 1 idea, I love walks. 5. Shall we take our Shakespeares and Moli^res 
 I? 6. We shall have enough books. Books stop thoughts — ard 
 ^ues also sometimes. 7. I should like to know who are the Lp j?'on- 
 les and Moli^res of our country? 8. Tell me who are ita (llo) 
 eros and its Plat'os, and I shall tell you who are its great poets. 9. 
 kll, if we have no great writers, we certainly have great travellers and 
 Uorers. 10. Yes, the Jacques Cartiers, the La Salles, the Champlains 
 re made illustrious the history of French Canada. 11. With regard 
 m propo8 de) the exploits of these men, have you ever read Park- 
 Va works ? 12. It is in those books that I have found the details of 
 ir labors, their adventures, their trials and their victories. 13. They 
 he heroes, these first French colonists. 14. But here we are arrived, 
 cool the wood is ! 15. Let us sit down on the grass. We can see 
 clouds of the sky and the water of the lake, and even hear the waves. 
 Here we shall soon forget the dust and k uming winds of the town' 
 disputes, the clamors, the passions of men. 17. Before reading our 
 ms, give me some sentences to translate into French, — difficult ones. 
 Well, translate : The Cond^s, the Guises, and the Bourbons are the 
 %t historical families of France, as the Tudors, the Stuarts, and the 
 plphs are those of England. 19. Bolts may stop robbers, but they 
 
IP 
 
 Hi 
 
 14 
 
 cannot itop thought. 20. The iathmus of Panftma unites the two Atntq 
 ioan. 21. Cakes and playthings attract the eyes of children more tliJ 
 the splendour of jewels or stained windows. 2*2. Siuoo's and why's arJ 
 the scarecrows of poetry. 23. Autumn rewards the works of the liibori 
 ers. 24. Our brothers-in-law, our sisters-in-law, our great-uncles arii^ 
 great-aunts have arrived. 25, In descending the rivers of these couiitnj 
 we saw on the banks the flocks of the shepherds ; the fields, the orchariL| 
 the hedges of the farmers ; the white houses, the churches, the scIuk: 
 of the villagers. 2G. Sometimes (tantdt) ruined castles raised tk] 
 towers surrounded with {de) trees, crowned with (de) vines. 
 
 Composition 6. 
 
 Perrette. 
 
 Ferrette, having on her head a milk-jug^ was going gayly to maik( 
 The morning was hne ; the birds were singing ; it was the month of Howt 
 and songs. Perrette's heart began to sugsest to her poems, project 
 enterprises. She formed sweet dreams for herself as she reckoned in li ' 
 thou^t the price of her milk. Eight pints at four cents a' pint iiiai ^ 
 thirty-two cents. Thirty-two cents are even more than enough' to* b 
 a hen. I shall have eggs, and the esgs will become chickens. It will 
 very easy to raise the chickens in the little yard of our house, aiul 
 defy the fox, cunning as*^ he is, to* approach them. In selling my chu 
 ens I shall have enough to buy a new dress - red — yes, red suits me t 
 best. I shall not lack' lovers, but I shall refuse them all even wi 
 disdain. Thereupon^ Perrette makes with* her head what she hud lo 
 ceived in her imagination : behold'*' the milk-jug on the ground'^ Far 
 well, eggs' ^, chickens, dresses, lovers. 
 
 Who IS the man who does not build castles in the air''? The wise ] 
 
 well as the foolish . Every day these aerial editices are built and every dii 
 
 they fall. The poetry of our dreams becomes the prose of the comiii(i| 
 
 place realties of life. Every day each of us repeats the story of hi 
 
 rette and her milk- jug. 
 
 ^potaulait. •43,2. Metrop. *pour. Hout ruaA que. Me. tmanquer de. Hii-d^ 
 ana. ^de. iOooti<l. "d terre. *'48,2. ^'/aire den chateaux en Espagne. 
 
 III. THE USES OF THE NOUN. 
 
 39. The Noun in French is used in two chief senses : 1. In a Det 
 minate Sense ; II. In an Indeterminate Sense. 
 
 40> I. '^he Determinate Sense : — 
 
 * 1. May refer to a particular object, person, quality, eto.: 
 
 ^, * Le garfon a le livre. L'Angleterre est le pays que j'aimi 
 
 I^ vertu de ce vieillard. 
 
 Thus used, the noun is said to be Particular. 
 
 2. May refer in a general way to all objects, persons or to 
 
 quality signified by the noun. 
 
 Les filles aiment les fleurs. L'homme est mortel. 
 vice est odieux. 
 
 Thus used, the noun is said to be General, 
 
3. May refer to apart (some) of the object, objects, pertont, etc., 
 
 ■igniKed by the noun. 
 
 Nous avons des livres, de la craie {chalk). VoWh dea 
 hommes. 
 Thus used, the noun is said to bo Partitiye. 
 
 4. May refer vaguely and indefinitely to any object person, etc., 
 
 signified by the noun. » . 
 
 Un jour dans un salon (dratoing'room) il y avait uu Bb- 
 pagnol et uu Anglais. 
 
 Thus used, the noun is said to be Indefinite. 
 
 41.11. The Indeterminate Senae X r V 
 
 The noun may again be used, not with reference to the objects 
 that it may signify, but to the qualities that these objects may 
 be thought to possess, to the intention, rather than the exten- 
 sion of the noun. It may by itself be used adjectively, or by 
 the help of a preposition may become adjectival or adverbial in 
 force. 
 Son p^ro est m^decin. Un bateau in. vapeur. Agissez en 
 homme. 
 Thus used, the noun is said to be Indeterminate. 
 
 ) pays que j aim^ 
 
 I. 1. The Particular Noun. The Use of the Article. 
 
 < 
 
 42- The Particular Sense is indicated by placing before the noun the 
 article le, la, les, or other definite word such as mon, ce. 
 Tht Article consequently is used he/ore Particular Nouns : 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 43. A. With Common Nouns. 
 
 1. L'homme et le (ifargon sont ici. 
 Get elcve a nion livre et le votre. 
 Viens, mon ami ; allons, mon flls. 
 
 2. The Weights and Measures for sell- 
 ing. 
 
 Le drap se vend dix francs le m^tre. 
 
 Ces cerises se vendent ciiuiuantc cen- 
 times le kilogramme. 
 
 3. Often after avoir to denote a char- 
 acteristic of Mind or Body. 
 
 Cet homme a les cheveux noirs. ( = les 
 oheveux de cet homme sont noirs. 
 
 Ces femmes ont le tcint beau {Atie com- 
 I plexions) et le nez aquilin. 
 
 NoTK.— Notice that what is singular in 
 the individual remains singular in describ- 
 ing more than one. 
 
 44. Tho Article is not used with Par- 
 ticular Nouns : 
 
 a. Often in Titles of Books, Chapters, 
 etc. ; in Addresses of Kesidence ; with 
 the Vocative Noun. 
 
 Chapitre X. Gramniairefrangaise. Livre 
 de lecture. 
 
 Hotel Corneille, rue Corneille 5, quar- 
 tier Latin. 
 
 Courage, soldats, tenez ferme. 
 
":i(r- 
 
 Id 
 
 46. B. With Proper Names of Local- 
 Uie». 
 
 1. CoONTRiKs : Le Canada et les Etats- 
 Unis. 
 
 Masc. names of cotintries jrenerally 
 keep the Article, even wbea used od- 
 jectively. 
 
 Bois du Bresil. 
 
 Puissance du Canada. 
 
 Un esclave du Congo. 
 
 Histoire du Portugal. 
 
 2. Continents: L'Europe et I'Afrique. 
 
 3. Mountains: Le mont Blano est le 
 sommet le plus ^leve des Alpes. 
 
 4. Rivers: Le Volga, le Danube etie 
 Rhin sont les prlncipaux fleuves de I'Eu- 
 rope. 
 
 5. Skas: La Mediterran6e, la mer 
 Noire. 
 
 6. Large Islands : La Corse, la Sar- 
 daigne. les Azores. 
 
 (With smaller islands, tie is generally 
 preferred : I'ile Sainte-Hel^ne ; but the 
 name may be used without the Article : 
 Sainte-Helene, Malte, etc.) 
 
 46. 6. 1. With Proper Names of Per. 
 sons, Towns, Villages, Months, Days o( 
 the Week. 
 
 Jean, Jacques et Louise sont all^s i 
 Paris. 
 
 Janvier et fevrier sont les premiers 
 mois. ■ 
 
 Nous partirons niercredi ou Jeudi. 
 
 Note.— Preceded by a qualitative ad- 
 jective or noun, these proper names would 
 take the article. 
 
 Le petit Jean, la belle Louise ; le vieux 
 Londres; la reine Victoria: le docteur 
 Rameau ; le rigoureux Janvier. 
 
 (But saint. Sir, Lord, etc., are ex- 
 cepted as applied to persons : Saint Ber- 
 nard, St. Pierre, Sir Thomas Bienvenu.) 
 
 2. En may precede singxilar feminine 
 names of countries, which then do not 
 take the article. 
 
 Aller en Angleterre, en France. De- 
 meurer en Suisse. 
 
 (But : Aller au Mexique, au Bresil. 
 Deuieurer au Canada, aux Indes.) 
 
 Note— -When the noun is qualified we 
 should use the Article : Dans 1' Ameriquu 
 du Sud. 
 
 3. De with venir, arriver, partir be- 
 fore a singular feminine noun follows the 
 same construction. 
 
 Venir de France. Partir d'Europe. 
 Arriver d' Angleterre. 
 
 (But: Venir du Japon. Partir du 
 Mexique, etc.) 
 
 For feminine nouns used adjectively 
 after de, see 57,4. 
 
 4. Names of countries with a capital of 
 the same name. 
 
 Naples est uu beau pays. 
 
 I. 2. The General Noun. The Use of the Article. 
 
 47. ^^e General Sense is indicated 
 by the use of the Article i 
 
 Le fer est plus utile que Tor. 
 
 Le boire et le nmnger sont n^cessaires 
 
 a la vie. 
 Le vice est odieux. 
 II vient nous voirle samedi (on Satur' 
 
 days). 
 
 J 
 
 48. Exceptions. 
 
 is omitted : 
 
 T/te Article 
 
 (1) Sometimes in Proverbs : 
 
 Contentement passe riciic^sse. 
 Mefiance est mere de srtretA\ 
 
 (2) Sometimes in Enumerations : 
 
 Citoyens, etrangers, unnemis.peuples, 
 rois, empereurs le plaignent {pity) 
 et le reverent. 
 
 The rules above (42-47) hold good even when the noun is understood. We must 
 say : L« cinquiimt et le tixUmo chapitre, because distinct objects are referred to. 
 
, en France. De- 
 
 17 
 
 Custom however permits in suoli a cas« the use of the plural : Les oinquiime et 
 sixi^me chapitres. 
 
 When but one object is referred to, the Article is not repeated unless for emotional 
 effect. 
 
 Le sage et pieux P6n61on. Le sage, le pieux, le vertueux F^n^lon. , . , ..; ' 
 
 Th£me 7. 
 Translate. Comment on the presence or omission of the Article. 
 
 1. J'ai lu quelque part que le bruit du canon et le sifflet des balles 
 ^talent la musique favorite de Charles XII, Croyez-vous que cela soit 
 vrai ? 2. Je le crois bien, car les guerriers aiment beaucoup la guerre. 
 3. A-t-on raison d'aimer la guerre ? 4. Je crois que non ; ce n'est pas la 
 guerre, c'est Tamour des peuples qui est la garde des rois. 5. Vous 
 aimez les plus doux plaisirs de la paix, n'est-ce pas ? 6. J'aime la mu- 
 sique et r6tude. 7. A quoi bon 1 (6tude ? je ne rainie pas. 8. L'^tude, 
 mon ami, gu^rit I'ennui. 9. Le temps, comme vous savez, s'arrSte sur 
 nos peines et fuit sur nos plaisirs. 10. Si Ton aime les livres, comme 
 dit le comte Xavier de'Maistre, les heures glissent alors sur vous et tom- 
 bent en silence dans I'^ternit^, sans vous faire sentir leur triste passage. 
 111. En outre T^tude m<irit I'esprit. Que deviennent la richesse, le plai- 
 '' sir, la sant^ quand on ne sait pas en user ? Je me rappelle sou vent le 
 proverbe : Si jeunesse savait, si vieillesse pouvait I 12. Pendant que 
 nous sommes jeunes et forts, travaillons. 13. J'aime les beaux sentiments 
 que voilk. Je vais m'appliquer k I'^tude du fran^ais. Ayez I'obligeance 
 de me lire les phrases du th^me, et je les traduirai en anglais. 14. 
 Ghaque jour nous avertit que la mort approche. 15. L^g6ret6, rapidit^i 
 prestesse, grace et riche parure, tout appartient k 1 oiseau-mouche. 
 16. Mon p6re demeure en Angleterre, le vOtre au Canada, mais le p6re 
 du pauvre Georges demeure aux Indes. 17. Dans le royaume des 
 aveugles le borgne est roi. 18. M rite n'est pas loin de la Sardaigne. 19. 
 F^vrier est le plus court des mois. 20. Les grands fleuves de I'Am^rique 
 du Nord sont le Saint- l^urent, le Mississipi et le Missouri. 21. L'em- 
 pire du Br6sil est dans I'Am^rique du Sud. 22. Les lies Saint-Pierre et 
 Miquelon appartiennent aux Fran9ais ; I'lle deTerre-Neuve aux Anglais. 
 23. Ces demoiselles ont les cheveux noirs, les livres vermeilles et le 
 teint clair. 24. Le m^ritc vaut bien la naissance. 25. Nobbsse oblige. 
 26. Le livre est intitule : Considerations sur I'etat de I'Europe. 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 1. Do you like studying languages, Charles ? 2. I am very fond of 
 studying them, sir j but there are so many words to learn that I make 
 but little progress. 3. It is the first step that costs, as the French pro- 
 verb says. 4. One must remember, I suppose, that little brooks make 
 large rivers, that ignorance is the mother of vice, and apply one-self to 
 study. 6. You believe, then, that the study of modem languages is an 
 important aflFair. 6. I do indeed (I well believe it). English, French and 
 German are the three great languages of to-day, as Latin, Greek and 
 Hebrew are those of past ages, France is the first nation of the world for 
 art, Germany for philosophy, England and the United States for commerce, 
 industrial genius and liberty. 7. In order well to understand the spirit 
 and genius of modern times one must understand the languages and 
 
TTT 
 
 r 
 
 M 
 
 ! 
 
 litentarea of these nations. 8. Yet Milton did not wish his daughters 
 to learn (imperf. aubj. ) the different languages. How do you explain 
 that ? 9. I cannot explain it. Do you know the reason ? 10. It is be- 
 cause, said he, one tongue is enough {auffit d) for one woman. 11. What 
 a (55) wretched jest ? I will remind punsters that the fear of the law is 
 the beginning of wisdom. 12. Do you not like witticisms ? 13. I do 
 not like bad jests, near {proche) relations of the ore you have just intro- 
 duced. 14. Pardon me the bad jest, and tell me what you are studying. 
 15. I am studying geography. 16. Gi^'e me a few of the difficult sen- 
 teijces and I will translate them. 17. Sicily and Sardinia are between 
 Europe and Africa. 17. The Spaniards in seeking the country of gold 
 and precious stones discovered America. 18. Silver comes from Mexico 
 and Peru, coal from England and the United States, diamonds from 
 South Africa. 19. In that earthquake, all was swallowed up ; churches, 
 palaces,huts, men, women, children, everything disappeared. 20. Moun- 
 tains are often the sources of rivers. 21 Mount Saint-Gothard, for {par) 
 example, is the source of the Rhone ; the Loire takes its rise (source f . ) 
 in the Cevennes, the Garonne in the Pyrennes, the Rhine in the Alps. 
 22. The inhabitants of the moon have blue hair, green lips and black 
 teeth,— 23. Nonsense {taissez done) I down with (a bus) geography. 
 
 Composition 9. 
 
 T/ie Flag. 
 
 One must^ have been a' soldier, one must have passed the frontier and 
 marched on roads that are no longer those of France ; one musfc have 
 been far* from one's country, severed from every word of the tone;ue that 
 one has spoken from infancy ; one must have said to himself* during the 
 days^ of fatigues that all that [which] remains of the absent country 
 is that shred of silk which tiutters yonder,' in' the centre of the 
 battalion ; one must have had no other rallying point^ in the 
 smoke of battle than that bit of torn stuff in order to understand, in 
 order to feel all that^ that sacred thing that one calls the flag contains 
 in its folds. 
 
 The flag, indeed'", know well", is, contained in a single word, rendered 
 palpable in a single object, all that was, all that is the life of each one of 
 U" : the hearth where one was born*-, the bit of land where you grew 
 up*', the mciher who rocks you, the father who scolds you, the first year, 
 the first tear, the hopes, the dreams, the fancies, the recollections ; it** 
 is all these joys at once*^ all gathered into one name, the finest of all : 
 the Fatherland*'. 
 
 Jules Claretie. 
 
 Hlfaut. '57. Hloigm. *f^4tredit. ^joumies. Ha-bas. ''a. ^point de ralliement. 
 • Place next, 'contains in,' etc. 'Otwaw. ^^ sachez-le bien. "199,60. ^'ffrandir. 
 Mc'. ^^dla/ois. ^^LaPatrie. 
 
 I. 3. The Partitive Noun. Use of the Partitive Sign. 
 
 49. Bule. The Partitive Sense of the noun is indicated by placing 
 before it de and generally the Article or other detiuite word such as 
 mon, ce. 
 
 t. 
 
19 
 
 Yoioi du pain, de la viande, de Tor, de I'encre et det plumes. 
 60- De + le (la, ks) must be uned : 
 
 1. IttY J \djective and the noun coa- 
 lesce to /ive a simple meaning to the 
 compounds, as in : 
 
 du beau monde, to- 
 
 ciety. 
 des beaux esprits, 
 
 wit». 
 des bons mots, viil- 
 
 ticisms. 
 
 des honndtes gens 
 honest ptople. 
 
 ded petita gargons, 
 boys 
 
 des petites lilies, 
 gir'.s 
 
 da bon temp8,a r/ood des petits pois. ^rreen 
 
 time. peas. 
 
 des grands hommes, des petits p&t^s, 
 
 great men patties. 
 
 des jeunes gens, des petits pains 
 
 young people. rolls. 
 
 2. With bien, much, many; la plu- 
 part, mogt : 
 
 II a bien des fleurs, la plupart des fleurs. 
 
 3. With ne— que, only, but. 
 II n'a que du pain, de largent 
 
 4. Where the negative is only a rhetor- 
 cal negative. 
 
 N'avez-vous pas des amis 7 You have 
 some friends 2 believe. 
 
 51. The article is omitted 
 before Partitive Nouns : 
 
 a. Preceded by an Adjective : 
 
 Ce sont de vaines paroles. 
 
 Vous avez de tr^s belles gravures. 
 
 Note— Should the Partitive Noun be 
 understood, the construction above holds 
 good with the adjective : 
 
 Vous en avez de tr^s belles. 
 
 You have some very fine ones. 
 
 b. Preceded by one of the Quantitative 
 Adverbs combien, beau,coup, trap, etc.: 
 
 Combien avez-vous de livres ? 
 Nous avonn bcaucoup de livres. 
 II a assez de livres. 
 Pen de distance. ; . - 
 
 Autant de fer que d'argent. 
 
 c. Preceded by a Negation : 
 
 II n'a pas d amis ; sans avoir d'amis. 
 
 Nous n'avons plus de livres. 
 
 Elle n a guere d'ainis. ', ' 
 
 02. Though preceded by an Adjective (a), or a Quantitative Adverb (6), or a Negative 
 (c), the noun may be rendered more definite by the addition of a clause and take the 
 Article. 
 
 Ca^ J'ai encore des bons livres que vous m'avez donnes. 
 
 (b) J'ai assez des romaiis dont vous parlez. 
 
 (c) Ce neat pas de Targent que je vous demande, ce sont des oonseils. My demand is 
 not money, but counsel. - 
 
 c 
 
 Je ne vous fais pas des reproches f riv^les. Jl/y reproaches are not frivolous. ' 
 
 [The negative in these sentences applies to the complement rather than to the noun 
 itself.] 
 
 53* Both de and the article are omitted bc'^ore Partitive Nouns. 
 
 (1) When these nouns are connected by ni ni, neither nor. 
 
 Nous n'avons ni maison lu jardin ; ni or, ni argent. 
 
 (2) When these nouns are governed by the prepositions sans and de. 
 
 L n homme sans peur et 
 
 sans reproche. 
 Sans or ni argent. 
 Sans or et sans argent. 
 
 Un verre de vin. 
 
 Une sorte de fr\ut. 
 
 II a besoin d'argent. 
 
 U?>', nvic-re couvertedevaisseaux. 
 
 Une corbeille pleine de 
 
 roses 
 La tetc couronnee de 
 
 fleurs. 
 
 ivord such as 
 
m 
 
 li ' ! 
 
 I. 4. The Indefinite Noun. Use of Un. ■ 
 
 , 61. The Indefinite Sense is generally indicated by un or other indefi- 
 nite word, aucun, cha^ue, plusieurs, etc., placed.before each noun 
 used indefinitely. 
 
 J'ai appris une nouvelle f&ohexise. Plusieurs hommes m'en ont pcurlSt 
 
 55. Un is not used : 
 
 1 After quel. 
 
 QuelKsoquin de valet ! What a rogue of a servant . ' . 
 
 2. After Jamais Introducing^ a clause. 
 
 Jamais nuit ne parut plus lente ^ devoiler I'horizon. 
 Never did anight seem slower in unveilin(/ the horizon. 
 
 8. After servir de, traiter de, tenir lieu de, etc. 
 
 Vous leur servez de m^rt II I'a traitCt de fou. I II vous a tenu lieu de p^re. 
 
 You serve as a mothei ti then i He has culled him a fool, \ He has been a father to you. 
 
 66. The Partitive and Indefinite, signs are sometimes omitted in Proverbs, 
 Pierre qui roule n'am,)8se pas mousse. 
 
 THtiME 10. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the ^ign of tho Partitive and Indefinite nouns. 
 
 1. L'heure de notre le90ii est entin arriv^e. J'en suis bien aiae. 2. Henri, 
 ditesmoi de quelles parties tie compose une maison. 3. Une maison se 
 compose d'une cuisine, d'une salle i manger, d'un salon, d'un vestibule, 
 de chambrea k coucher, d'un cave. 4. De quelles parties un train est- 
 il compos6 ? 5. Un train se compose d'une locomotive, de wagons et 
 d'un wagons de bagages. 6. Et la biblioth^ue de notre lyc^e ? 7. EUe 
 se compose de dictionnaires, de romaus et de quelques pontes. 8. II n'y 
 a pas dans la biblioth^que des livres aussi beaux que lea vOtres — ou faut- 
 il dire : de lives aussi beaux ? Je ne parle jamais sans faire des fautes. 
 9. Jja premiere phrase est correcte. Voir 52 (c). 10. C'est pourquoi Ton 
 dit : Je n'ai pas de I'argent pour le'd6penser follement. 11. Oui, mais 
 c'est pour une autre raison qu'on dit : N 'avez-vous pas de la sant6, de la 
 fortune, des amis ? que vous faut-il de plua? 12. J'aimeraia bien le fran- 
 9ais, monsieur, s'iln'y avait pas tant der^glea, 13. Pas de roses sans 
 Opines. 14. Cela me rappelle que les rosiers sont converts de fleurs. 
 Un bouquet de roses servirait d'ornement au pupitre. 15. Je vais 
 cueillir un bouquet de violettes aussi. 16. Georges est-il encore absent? 
 17. II est k la campagne, monsieur. II y a avec lui des jeunes gens qui 
 disent des bons mots. II prend du bon temps. 18. II faut que nous nous 
 divertissions un pen aussi. Vous avez entendu parler de 1 homme, qui, 
 voulant vendre sa maison, ^tait si sot qu'il en colportait une pierre pour 
 servir d'^chantillon. 19. C'est Moli^re, je crois, qui a dit dans une de 
 ses comedies: "Quoi! quand je dis : Nicole, apportez-moi mea pan- 
 touffles, et me donnez mon bonnet de nuit," c'est de la prose ? Oui, c'est 
 de la prose." 20. Voil^ de la prose, voici de la po^sie : 
 
 La vie est br^ve, 
 Un pen d'amour, -^ 
 Un pen de rSve, 
 Et puis— bon jour ! 
 
 La vie est vaine, 
 Un pen d'espoir, 
 Un peu de haine, 
 Et puis — bon soir I 
 
r other indefi- 
 ore each noun 
 
 1 lieu de pire. 
 father to you. 
 
 ^erbs, 
 
 le. 2. Henri, 
 ae maison se 
 an vestibule, 
 m train est- 
 e wagons et 
 ^e? 7. Elle 
 3. 8. Iln'y 
 es— ou faut- 
 B des fautes. 
 Durqtiot Ton 
 ^ Oui, mais 
 sant6, de la 
 )ien le fran- 
 3 roses sans 
 8 de fleurs. 
 5. Je vais 
 sore absent? 
 es gens qui 
 e nous nous 
 omme, qui, 
 pierre pour 
 ans une de 
 '■ mes pan- 
 Oui, c'est 
 
 21 - 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 1. That poem has grace, sentiment, and much melody, but it is a kind 
 of poem that I ?.ca. not too fond of. 2. It contains too much pessimism 
 for me also. 3. There are lives that are not vain, but full of noble 
 thoughts and good actions, and I prefer to look on the bright side of 
 things {voir lea clw^ea en beau). 4. But there are, are there not ? so many 
 tears, disappointments, sorrows in lite that the poet is right to look 
 on the dark side of things. 5. I know young people who think as you 
 do. But you know well that if there are tears m life, there also smiles, 
 pleasures, joy, happiness. If there are sad tragedies, there are also bril- 
 liant comedies ; and life itself {mSme) is neither a funeral train {convoi 
 fun^bre) nor a carnival. 6. There are poets who say that the world is 
 a theatre, without beginning and without end, where heroes, villains, 
 parents, children enter and {se) withdraw ; but where is only one Spec- 
 tator. Is that philosophy, poetry or common sense ? 7. It is poetry. 
 But now some sentences of English to translate. 8. There are mines 
 of gold and silver, but there are no mines of friendship and truth. 9. 
 Thrushes and other birds fill our woods with {de) melodious songs. 10. 
 I have still some of the engravings that you sent me, but I have none 
 of the books that you gave me. 11. What a beautiful view t Have you 
 not eyes ? 12. She has no other relatives than her cousin. l.S. Chatham 
 and Burke were great orators. 14. Firmness united to gentleness is a bar 
 of iron surrounded with {de) velvet. 16. A great heart, said {disait) a 
 king of Persia, receives little presents witb. {de) one hand and makes 
 large ones with the other. 16. The principal group of North American 
 lakes (lakes of N. A.) is the group of Canadian lakes which comprises 
 Lake Superior, Lake Michigan, Lake Huron, Lake Erie {Eri^) and Lake 
 Ontario. 17. But no more {phis) sentences 1 Are there not soldiers in 
 town to-day ? Is there not a review? There will be more spectators as 
 soon as we [shall] have finished this last piece of French, this proclama- 
 tion of Napoleon to his army of devoted soldiers. 18. *' Soldiers," said 
 Napoleon, " you have in a fortnight {qiiinze jours) gained six victories, 
 taken twenty-one standards, fifty pieces of cannon, several fortresses, 
 fifteen thousand prisoners, killed or wounded more than ten thousand 
 men. 19. You have won battles without artillery, crossed rivers with- 
 out bridges, made forced marches without shoes, bivouacked {bivouaquer) 
 without brandy and often without bread. 20. Thanks be rendered you 
 soldiers 1 The fatlierland has the right {le droit) to expect great things 
 from you. 21, You have yet combats to wage (linrcr), towns to take, 
 rivers to cross. 22. Friends be the liberators of the peoples, do not be 
 their scourges {fliau). 
 
 Composition 12. 
 Not Enough Exercise. 
 
 The scene occurs* in a doctor's office. A young man enters with' a 
 weary air and lets himself fall upon a chair. 
 
 The Doctor {apart) : One more angemic' { Aloud, ^ taking Ms hand). Let 
 us see your tongue !— Hum 1 tongue coated^ ! And the pulse— feeble, 
 feverish. {Rising with a consequential air^.) Always the same story I 
 People pretend to live without fresh air, without exercise ; it is impossi- 
 ble. Look at me. What fine health [que] I have. Well, like you 
 
22 
 
 * , ■ ' " . ■ ' ' . 
 
 I should take the road to (of) the cemetery if I stayed all day seated in 
 my room, without fresh air and exercise. You must take long walks, 
 you need fresh air. If I made you a long prescription^ of a half-dozen 
 of medicines, you would think (find) me no doubt clever. Oh, no, my 
 only prescription is to' walk, to keep walking, always to walk. 
 
 The Patient : But doctor* .... 
 
 The Doctor : Just so', now discuss ! You know more than I about (of) 
 it. I repeat it to you, I counsel you to''' take long walks, several times 
 
 ilO 
 
 day. 
 
 The Patient : But really, doctor, I am on my feet". . . . 
 
 The Doctor : Yes, yes, 1 !:now (it) ; like others you walk a great deal. 
 Walk ten times more. 
 
 The Patient : But, doctor, it is my profession to. . . . 
 
 The Doctor : Of-course^'; the profession does not permit, etc. That's 
 oWl Take another profession which may permit" you to take exer- 
 cise ; health before everything ! But what do you do ? 
 
 The Patient : I am a** postman. 
 
 The Doctor (in-consternation^*) : Oh 1 oh ! — Let us see till*' I examine 
 
 your tongue once more. 
 
 *«e passer. Me. 'anvtnique. *tout haut. Hhdrgf. *air d'importance. fordonnance. 
 hnonsietir le docteur. ^c'est cela. ^^par. "sur pied, ^^entendu. ^^connu. i*per- 
 mettre pres. Bubj. '^sg, Maiasourdi, ^fque. 
 
 ill 
 
 II. THE INDETERMINATE NOUN. 
 
 Omission of the Article. 
 
 The Noun used in an Indeterminate Sense, since it is adjective or ad- 
 verbial in function, does not take the Article. 
 
 1. The Indeterminate Noun is used pre dicatively with the verbs itre, devenir, se 
 /aire, etc. to denote the Nationality, Proi'ession, Trade, Station, Ranlc of the subject. 
 
 Votre p^re est m^decin. 
 Your father 18 a doctor. 
 
 Mon fr^ve est devenu soldat. 
 My brother has become a soldier. 
 
 Mon oncle se fait avocat. 
 My uncle turns lau^er. 
 
 Note 1.— The Noun force of the Indeterminate Noun is strengthened when an adjeo- 
 tive qualifies it, so that it must usually be treated as a noun, and take un or le. 
 
 Votre p^re est un habile medecin. 
 Your father is a skUful physician. 
 
 Ferdinand dtait un puerrier accompli et 
 un politique consomm^. 
 
 Ferdinand was a skUful soldier and a fin- 
 ished statesman. 
 
 las always its full force as a noun : C'est un 
 
 Note 2.— After &est the predicate noun '. 
 Anglais. Ce sont des :nedecins. 
 2. It is used likewise with verbs of Creating, Calling, Believing, etc.: 
 
 Napoleon le cr^a colonel. 
 Napoleon made him a colonel. 
 Je le orois honnete homme. 
 / believe him an honest man. 
 
 8. It is used in Appositions: 
 
 Ottawa, capitale du Canada. 
 Ottawa, the capital qf Canada. 
 Henri huit, fils de Henri sept. 
 Henry the Eighth, the son qf 
 Henry the Seventh. 
 
 Mendoza dtait appele troimeme roi d'Espt^fne. 
 Mendoza was called the third king of Spain 
 II faut se montrer homme de courage. 
 One must show one's self a man of courage. 
 
 Soldat, savant, matelot, ti la fois, Colomb dtait. . . . 
 A soldier, a scholar and a sailor at the same time 
 
 Columbus was 
 
 Lamartine, cdlehre poe' . et prosateur franqais. 
 Lamartine,a celebrated Frenchpoet andp' ose writer. 
 
 ^& 
 
^ 
 
 an I about (of) 
 , several times 
 
 ;. etc. That's 
 to take exer- 
 
 ill" I examine 
 
 )7oTR 1.— If the appesittve noun is used for tbe purpose of distingruishinx rather thart 
 
 it qualifying, its force as a noun is involved, and the Article must be employed. 
 
 Ce qui avait 6t^ dit par J^r^mie le proph^te. 
 
 What had been said by Jeremy the prophet. 
 
 Je vous parle de Rousseau, le po^te, et pas de Rousseau, le philosophe. 
 
 / apeak to you qf Jiousgeau the poet, and not qf Rousseau the philosopher. 
 
 Note. 2.— The noun force rather than the adjective force is felt likewise in such a 
 
 BPtence as: 
 
 " L'homme qui a tu6 votre m6re, une enfant hdroique, une sainte, un ange." 
 TM nuin who killed your mother, (killing) a heroine, a saint, an angel. 
 
 NoTS 8. —Before a Superlative, the Article would be used. 
 Paris, ville de France. But : Paris, la plus belle ville de Franc*. 
 
 4. By means of prepositions it enters into many Adjective Phrases. 
 
 UQon de boutique. 
 
 kop-boy, 
 
 gateau a vapeur. 
 teamboat. 
 
 une voixde femme. 
 a woman's voice. 
 march^ k volatile. 
 poultry market. 
 
 une vie d'homme. 
 a human li/e. 
 un homme sans peur. 
 a man without fear. 
 
 vins de France. 
 
 French wines. 
 
 roi (reine, couronne) 
 
 d'Angleterre, 
 king (queen, crown) 
 
 df England. 
 
 6. By means of prepositions, it enters into many Adverbial Phrases. 
 
 ^couter avec int^ret. 
 Suivre h regret. 
 Riohe a millions. 
 
 II le fait par amour (par 
 haine, etc.).. 
 
 Jler k pied. 
 
 gir en homme. 
 
 fx francs par personne (par 
 
 an, etc.) 
 
 6. It may complete the meaning of a verb, forming a Verbal Phrase. 
 
 parler f rangais (anglais, *etc.) 
 
 bjouterfoi, believe. 
 hvoir carte blanche, have 
 
 full powers. 
 Ivoir besoin, chaud,f roid, 
 compassion, coutume, 
 dessein, envie, faini, 
 honte, lieu, patience, 
 soif, sommefl, soin, 
 sujet. 
 
 I avoir cong^, have holiday. 
 mal, have a pain. 
 " bonne (mauvaise) 
 opinion, 
 courir risque.run th£ risk. 
 faire attention, pay at- 
 tention. 
 banqueroute, fail. 
 beau ( mauvais ) 
 temps, be fine 
 (bad) weather. 
 cas, esteem. 
 envie, excite envy. 
 connaissance, be- 
 come acquainted. 
 fortune, make afor- 
 tune. 
 
 
 (I 
 
 <c 
 tt 
 
 <l 
 
 It 
 « 
 
 faire honneur, do honor. 
 " horreur, cause horror. 
 " mention, make men- 
 tion, 
 " naufrage, suffer ship- 
 wreck. 
 place, make room. 
 plaisir, give pleasure. 
 present, present. 
 reflection, rejitct. 
 chercher fortune, seek for- 
 tune. 
 " querelle, seekaquar- 
 rel. 
 demander justice, ask jus- 
 tice. 
 " asile, ask shelter. 
 " pardon, ask par- 
 don. 
 donner avis, inform, 
 entendre raillerie, bear jokes. 
 (entendre la raillerie, know 
 how to joke.) 
 mettre fin, put an end. 
 " ordre, put in order. 
 
 CI 
 
 raison, talk sense. 
 
 chasse, musique, etc. 
 talk of hunting, viu^ic, etc. 
 perdre courage, lose courage. 
 porter envie, envy. 
 porter bonheur (malheur), 
 
 bring good ^bad) luck. 
 prendre conge, take leave. 
 " courage, take cour- 
 age. 
 " feu, take fin. 
 garde, take heed, 
 haleine, take breath. 
 jour, appoint a day. 
 medecine, take medi- 
 cine. 
 part, share. 
 patience, wait pa- 
 tiently. 
 plaisir, take pleasure. 
 racine, take root. 
 rendre visite, pay a visit. 
 tenir lieu, take the place. 
 
 " parole, keep one/ sword. 
 trouver moyen, find means. 
 
 « 
 
 K 
 t< 
 
 <C 
 « 
 
 i< 
 <I 
 
 " k mort, put to death. 
 
 *With qualifications or comparisons the Article is used : 
 
 II parle le frangais du Bas-Canada. 
 II parle le frangais mieux que I'anglais. 
 
 ^ ^ * ' ThJime 13. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the use of the Indeterminate Noun. 
 
 ]. Bonjonr,' Charles, vous paraissezbientriste. Qu'avez-vous ? 2. Ah, 
 monsieur, mon p^re a achet^ un piano k queue, et mes trois soeun 
 
r .^ 
 
 prdnnent des lefons de musique trois foia par semaine. 3. Vous vous 
 aonnez des airs de saule pleureur pour bien peu de chose. 4. M;u» 
 elles jouent trois heures par jour, monsieur, et parlent toujours musique, 
 musiciens, etc., de sorte qu'il m'a ^t6 impossible d'^tudier ma le9on de 
 fran9aiB. G'est en fort2;eant qu'on devient forgeron ; c'est en 6tudiaiU I 
 qu'on devient savant. Mais si je n'^tudiais pas, une vie d'homme n'y ^ 
 suffirait pas. 6. G'est parler raison, cela. Mais tout de mSme vous 
 devez prendre patience. Peut-Stre si vous preniez des le9ons de violon, 
 elles mettraient fin & leur musique. 6. G est alors, monsieur, que la 
 fin couronnerait I'oeuvre. 7. (Eil pour ceil, dent pour dent. Maintenant 
 k I'oeuvre, Gharles ; faites bien attention aux phrases du theme ; tra- 
 duisez. 8. Tel entend tambour et se croit g^n^ral. S. Fuisque tu cs 
 homme, tu dois 6tre humain. 10. Fr^d^ric second, qui, tout roi qu'il 
 ^tait, fut un penseur profond. 11. Tout ce qui reliiit n'ost pas or. 12. 
 Un ami, don au ciel, est le vrai bien du sage.. 13. On appelle phare unc 
 tour illumiuce pendant la nuit. 14. Les cuillers k th6 et les verresn 
 vin sont sur le buffet. 15. L'orgueil, vice qui se nourrit de vertus, 
 16. Napoleon ^tait k la fois l^gislateur, empereur et soldat. 17. Agissez 
 avec sagesse, parlez avec prudence, travaillez avec Constance et vous 
 ferez honneur k votre ^cole, k vos parents et k votre nom. 18. J'ai 
 appris par cceur ZaKre, trag^die de Voltaire. 19. Vous avez fait con- 
 naissance avec M. A. G'est un homme sans penr et sans reproche. 
 20. Vingt mille hommes rest^rentsur le champ de bataille. 21. Unc 
 foule de nfegres, hommes, femmes et enfants, le regardaient travailler 
 avec curiosity. 22. On appelle fleuve un grand cours d'eau qui se jette 
 dans la mer. Un plus petit cours d'eau s'appelle riviere. 23. L'in- 
 fortun^ Golomb avait perdu sa femme, I'amour, la consolation et I'eu- 
 couragement de ses jours. 
 
 24. '' Rien ne p^se t>ant qu'un secret ; 
 Le porter loin est difficile aux dames; 
 Et je sais mSme sur ce fait 
 Bon nombre d'hommes qui sont femmes." 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 1. George La Salle, a friend of my father, paid us a visit yesterday. 
 He has just passed his examination, and is now a physician. 2. He n 
 physician ! what a clever family I His brother is a professor, his sister n 
 musician, and his father a celebrated lawyer. 3. He will do honour to 
 his family, for all his professors esteem him and have a good opinion of 
 his talents. 4. Unfortunately he came to take leave ; he is going to 
 leave for Montreal to-morrow. As soon as he shall have visited his 
 parents and put [A] his affairs in order, he will seek his fortune in the 
 United States. 5. What a pity ! From indifference or disdain we let so 
 many of our men of genius depart to become citizens of another country. 
 6. You are not yet gone, however. 7. Are you not ashamed? You 
 know that I cannot-bear jokes. 8. I beg your (to you) pardon. It is I 
 who do not know how to joke. 9. But tell me, is George a relative of 
 La Salle, the French traveller who explored the Mississippi and gave to 
 the country that he discovered the name of Louisiana ? 10. I do not 
 know. He has never mentioned it. His father is a French Ganadian.. 
 and his ancestors have long lived in Ganada. He himself is a Ganadian 
 
25 
 
 (de) birth. But a little secret. His father has given him full power 
 
 invite his Toronto friends to accompany him to Montreal. I shall 
 
 tve to-morrow with him. 11. I envy you. You will have a fine time 
 
 i Montreal. Do you go by steamboat, or by rail ? 12. We shall go by 
 
 steame:. ; it is always pleasanter in summer to travel thus. One sees 
 the Thousand Ishmds and the Rapids, a pleasure of which I never 
 >w tired (a^ennuyer). 13. But you run the risk of being shipwrecked 
 I at least of being sea-sick (avoir le mal de mer). 14. It is always fine 
 father in summer, and if it were stormy, storms never frighten me. 
 >aforgetthatmy uncle was a ship-owner (anna^eur). 15. And that 
 
 irhy you are a genuine Jack-Tar (loup de mer).^ For the same reason 
 
 lould (devoir) speak Chinese, for my brother is a merchant in Hong- 
 ^ng. 16. I hope that vou will find means to accompany us to the 
 ht. 17. I shall have a holiday to-morrow, and I shall be there to wish 
 
 ihaiter) you bon voyage. Inform me of the time of your departure, 
 
 1 1 shall take care to be there on (d) time without faiL 1 8. Keep your 
 »rd, or we shall not believe your words again. 19. I shall make you a 
 
 sent of my copy of Frechette's poems. In going down (descendre) 
 
 river you will be able to read : 
 
 " Bosquets que I'onde berce aux doux chants des oiseauz, 
 Des z^jjhvrs et des nids pittoresques.asiles, 
 Myst^rieux et frais labynnthe, Mille-Iles 1 
 Chapelet d'^meraude ^gren^ Bur les eaux." 
 
 Composition 15. 
 
 • Answers. 
 
 . A Frenchman and an Englishman were disputing with each other» 
 lich of the nations was the greater. The discussion grew warm'. 
 I last the Frenchman wishing to put an end to it in» a polite manner 
 cclaimed: "I willingly confess that if I were not a Frenchman, I 
 kould like to* be an Englishman." "And I, sir, willingiy confess," 
 eplied the other, " that if I were not an Englishman, I should like to 
 e an Englishman." 
 
 2. A poor painter, who had a good opinion of his talent, was speaking 
 tie day of* painting the ceiling of his drawing-room*. " At first* " 
 lid he, "I shall coIor« it, and afterwards I shall paint it." ** You 
 ^ould do better," said one of his friends, " to* paint it at first, and after- 
 wards to* color it. " 
 
 3. A cunning fox saw a horse in a meadow. Running to his neigh- 
 our the wolf. •' Cousin," said he, "come owti see the queerest* animal 
 liat you have* ever seen. " " With pleasure," said the wolf. " It is a 
 rey that heaven without doubt has sent us." They go. "Sir," said 
 le fox to the horse, "we are your very humble and very obedient 
 ervants; we should like to become acquainted with you. Prav^° 
 Wiat is your name ?" The horse, who was not a fool, answered [to] 
 hem, " You can read my name, sirs, under my hoof, where my shoe- 
 laker put it. The fox excused himself : " I cannot" read ; my parents 
 re honest but poor ; they have taught me nothing. Those of the wclf 
 re nch, they have taught him everything. He is a grammarian, a poet. 
 
 , philosopher, a pohtician, and a rhetorician." The wolf, flatter^ b^' 
 
 N 
 
26 
 
 thii speech, approached" in-order-to read the name, and the home gave 
 him a kick'* tnat delivered him forever from all toothaches, and tuok 
 leave of the two friends. 
 
 " Cousin, I have compassion on your misfortune. Henceforth, m 
 must not believe the words of so impolite an animal," said the fox. 
 
 ^$edinmter. Victuiufer. *de [N.B. The English tferund is rendered into French by 
 an inflnftive or a noun, unless after 'in' {en).] *oouloir bien. ^4'abord. ^bculigeonmr. 
 Utmtite. He pltm drdle. 'Use pres. aubj. >0d« prdce, "Use eavoir. ^'^approcher, 
 ^kUtacher une made d. 
 
 III. THE ADJECTIVE (DE L'ADJECTIF). 
 
 I. FORHATIOir OF THE FeMIVINE (FORMATION DU F^MININ). 
 
 58. General Bole. — Add e to the masculine. 
 
 un grand jardin. I un homme poli. I il est ftg^. 
 
 une grande maison. | une femme polio. | elle est &gde. 
 
 NoTB 1.— In adjectives ending in -er, the addition of to form the feminine- requires 
 
 also a grave accent to the ending. 
 
 premier, I cher, I passager, I ouvrier, 
 
 premidre. j oh^re. | passagere, | ouvriere, 
 
 NoTB 2.— The syllable -(gyr 3 in French is mute (as Ague, ft(f), though gu is sounded. 
 Hence adjectives ending in -gn, when made feminine, require also the diaeresis to pre- 
 serve the sound of the ending, 
 aigu, aigue, <icute. | ambigu, ambiguS, anifngtunis. | oontigu, contiguS, contigtiom. 
 
 S9> Exceptional Hules — From etymological or phonetic reasous 
 the following deviations from the General Rule occur. 
 
 1. Adjectives ending in e mute remain unchanged. 
 
 un honndte homme, 
 une honnete femme. 
 
 un Jeune homme aimable, 
 une jeune fille aimable. 
 
 2. Adjectives in ^el) -eil* -en, -et, -on double the final consonant, 
 and add e mute. 
 
 cruel, 
 oruelle. 
 
 pj .'eil, 
 pareille, 
 
 Chretien, 
 chretienne. 
 
 net, 
 nette. 
 
 NoTK 1.— The following in -et follow the General Rule (Note 1): 
 
 (in)complet, 
 (in^compl^te. 
 
 concret, 
 concrete. 
 
 (in)discret, 
 (in)di8crete. 
 
 inquiet, 
 inquiete. 
 
 mignon, 
 mignonne. 
 
 secret, 
 secrete. 
 
 Note 2.— The following adjectives likewise double the final consonant before 6 mute: 
 
 bas, basse, low. 
 bellot, bellotte, pretty. 
 6pais, ^paisse, think. 
 expres, express?, express. 
 gentil, gentHle, pretty. 
 
 gros, gra8se,/a^ 
 
 ffros, grosse, big. 
 
 OS, losse, tired. 
 
 nul, nulle, null. 
 
 p&lot, TpUotte, palish. 
 
 paysau, paysanne, peasant, 
 
 prof^s, professe, professed 
 
 sot, sotte, foolish. 
 
 vieillot, vieillotte, oldish. 
 
 3. Adjectives in -f change/ into v ; those in -Z change x into s before 
 emute. 
 
 neuf, neuve, newly-made. | bref, br^ve, brief. 
 
 furieux, furieuse,/uriott«. 
 
97 
 
 i.— The following in -z ore irrefrular : 
 douce, «uwe(. I faux, fau88e,/al««. j vK ux (vieil), vieille, oM. 
 
 i, preAxe, prejlzed. | roux, rouase, red. | 
 
 Adjectives ending in -eur, if derived from present participles, 
 ige into 'Cttse ; if not so derived they change -tetir into -trice. 
 
 . Participles.) 
 
 }mpant) trornpeiir, trompeuse, deceitful. 
 kttant) flatteur, flatteuse, flatterimj. 
 
 (Not from Participles. ) 
 acciisateur, acousatrioe, aoetuinff. 
 conaolateur, conaolatrioe, eon$olin(;. 
 
 n 1.— Enchanteur, enchanterease, enchanting ; vengeur, vengeresse, avenginff ; 
 tut, pccheresse, tdnniny, are exceptions. 
 
 TE 2.— Adjectives ending in -drieur, together with majeur, mituur, meilleur ore 
 |ar. 
 
 The following adjectives are irregular : 
 
 blanche, white. 
 coite, tjtiiet. 
 f ratche, fresh. 
 trami\w, frank. 
 ••;; franqiie, Fiankish. 
 iW^t favoritti, favorite. 
 
 Chancre -c into que. 
 aninioniac, ammoniaque, 
 
 ammoniac. 
 caduo, cadiique, infirm, 
 public, publique, ^>uWic. 
 turc, turque, Turkish. 
 But : gree, grecque, Oreek. 
 
 b6nin, b^nlgne, benign, 
 long, longue, long. 
 malin, niallgneima^t^nant. 
 oblong, oblongue, oblong. 
 sec, s^che, dry. 
 tiers, tinrce, third. 
 
 ^ The following adjectives have a secondary form in the maso. 
 before a noun or adjective beginning with a vowel or h mute. The 
 fnine is made from the secondary form, 
 
 »elle feinme, Plu. de belles femmes. nouvelle. 
 
 lerali}', though not necessarily, vieil before a vowel for itieux. 
 
 fou,\ 
 fol,/ 
 folle. 
 
 mou, \ 
 mol./ 
 molle. 
 
 ) final consonant, 
 
 II. Formation of the Plural (Formation du pluriel). 
 
 General Hule— Add s to the singular to form the Plural. 
 
 fou, fous ; folle, foUes ; charmant, charmants ; charmante, char- 
 mantes. 
 
 DTe— As all adjectivtiS in the feminine end in •€, this rule will apply to any feminine 
 
 stive, however irregular the masculine may be. 
 
 . Exceptions: 
 Adjectives ending in -s, -X remain unchanged. 
 
 tionime gras et heureux, 
 [ homniesgras et heureuz. 
 
 un chapeau, gris et vieux, 
 deschapeaux, gris et vieux. 
 
 >nant before fl mute: 
 
 Adjectives ending in -au take x, 
 beau, beaux ; nouveau, nouveaux. 
 
 toTB— So also hdbreu, hdbreuz, Hebrew. Adjectives in -ou and -eu follow the 
 )eral Rule : fou, fous ; bleu, bleus. 
 
 Adjectives ending in -al change al into aux. 
 
 jkrincipe general I un devoir filial, municipal, national, 
 
 jriucipes generaux. | des devoirs filiaxix, municipaux, nationauz. 
 
 loTE— Formerly many adjectives in al followed the General Rule. These adjeo- 
 1 to-day with the exception of fatal, fatals ; final, finals, generally change al 
 aux. 
 
I I 
 
 ill 
 
 The Acadimle and Littii agree In reijrarding m without any iiiaao. plural the adjtl 
 tives /rui/al, glacial, natal, paieal, naval. The Aoud^nile would add to theie : autoil 
 nal, cdoual, jovial, for woich, however, Ltttr6 gives the plural In awe, , 
 
 Plural of Gomfound Adjiotivkd (plurikl dks ADjEonm uomposI 
 
 63< Compound Adjectives follow the rule of Compound Xouna 
 keeping unchanged the invariable, but changing the variable purts 
 
 speech. 
 
 un homme ivre-tnort, I un enfant premier-n6, I un enfant bien-almd, 
 
 del hommei ivres-morta. | dee enfante premiers-nds. | des enfanta blen-alm^s. 
 
 NoTi. — Mort in xnort-n6, still-bom, is invariable ; des ei\fants mort-n^«. 
 So also nouveau in thd one expression nouveau-nd : dea enfanta nouveai; 
 ni$. (But : lei nouveaux inariis, etc.) 
 
 III. Agreement of the Adjective (Accord de l'adjectif). 
 
 64. The Adjective in French agrees with the word to which it refer' 
 in Gender and Number. 
 
 Void le bon p^re et la bonne mdre de ces bons enfants. 
 
 ^ Should the adjective refer to two or more nouns it must b 
 made plural ; if one of these nouns is masculine, the adjective must l» 
 masculine. 
 Le roi et le paysan sont ^gauz. 
 
 Le p^re et la m^re sont morts. 
 
 
 1 
 
 La rose et la violetfce sont belles. c«l§ 
 
 Une prudence et un d^sint^ressi 
 ment ^tonnaoitB. 
 
 Nora 1— Care must be taken with adjectives that make a distinction in pronuncia 
 tion between the masculine and the feminine forms, to place the nouns qualifled » 
 that the masculine noun stands next the adjective. 
 U a la bouche et les yeuz ouverts. (Not : les yeux et la bouche ouverts.) 
 When the masculine and feminine do not differ in 'pronunciation the order of thj 
 nouns is a matter of taste. 
 
 Une noblesse etungoCitremarquables; ungoAt etune noblesse remarl 
 quables. 
 
 Nora 2— If the nouns qualifled by the adjectives are (1) synonymoue, or (2) such thai] 
 the lost sums up the preceding, the adjective remains in the singular. 
 
 (1) Touts sa viti n'a ^t6 qu'un travail, une occupation continuelle. 
 EUe trouvoit dans ce jeune homme une noblesse, une grandeur d'&me 6toni 
 
 nante. 
 
 (2) Le fer, le bandeau (bandage), la flamme est touts prdte. 
 
 66. Demi, AoZ/, nu, bare^ are invariable before, variable after the noun thcjj 
 qualify. 
 
 Une demi-heure. 
 (Also invariable used adverbially : une 
 nation demi-barbare.) 
 n va nu-bras et nu-tete.. 
 
 Une heure et demie (=une heure e!^ 
 
 une heure demie.) 
 Dix heures et demie. 
 Une epee nue. Les arbres sont nus. 
 
 67. Feu, late, preceded by the article or other determinate word is variable ;i| 
 otherwise, it is invariable. '^ 
 Yotre feue m^re. La feue prinoesse. | Feu votre m^re. Feu la prinoesse. 
 
 68. The participial adjectives attendu, considering, compris, including, ex' 
 Oeptd, excepting, pass^, past, suppose, supposing, vu, considering, used before j 
 
29 
 
 i 
 
 nun hav* a prapotltlonal force, and are invariabi* ; UMd afUr tha noun thay hava 
 jeotival force, and are variable. 
 
 jttfi une femme. I 
 
 ipris la nourriture. I 
 
 I bIx htturea. I 
 
 Cei femmea exoept^s. 
 La nourriture non compriae. 
 Six heurea poaa^es. 
 
 The cxpreMiona ci-lnolu8, encloned, d-lolnt, annexed, are invariable when 
 \nK a sentence, or wlien precedini; a noun used witliout the article or other de- 
 lative word. 
 
 La copie de sa lettre est oi-inoluse. 
 VouB trouverez ci-inoluse la copie de sa 
 lettre. 
 
 ^cIuB la copie de sa lettre. 
 trouverez ci-lnclus (cl-Joint) 
 sple de sa lettre. 
 
 I Frano de poste, pout-paid. Is Invariable before, usually variable after the 
 
 trith which it is used. 
 
 ju firano de poste (or franco) toutes voa lettres. | Une lettre franohe de poste. 
 
 Avoir I'alr. The expression avoir Fair Is used sometimes In the lenseof 
 tre ; the adjective following then agrees with the subject. 
 
 lits ont I'air gUtia. 
 fruits appear spoiled. 
 
 But : Elle a I'air trnp doux. 
 She has too sweet a look. 
 
 |The nouns aurore, Jonquille, marron, olive, oranfire, ponceau, etc., 
 ^ed as Adjectives of Colour, are invariable. Rose, ^carlate, amarante, 
 : variable. 
 
 kbits marron ; des robes olive. | Des chapeaux rosea ; des robes ^carlates. 
 
 I Compound Adjectives of Colour are usually invariable. 
 |femme a les yeux bleu toned (deep blue), et lescheveux ch&tain clair (aubunt). 
 
 Bse invariable adjectives have de understood after the noun.] 
 
 noblesse remarl 
 
 after the noun thcjj 
 
 te word is variable;^ 
 
 Th^mk 16. 
 islate. Comment on the Form and Concord of the adjectives. 
 
 Traduisez la premiere phrase de notre th^me. 2. Le temps et la 
 
 sont impitoyables. 3. La deuxi^me, Marie, s'il vous plait. 4. 
 
 pr^f^re les mains pures aux mains pleines. 5. Les autres phrases, 
 ise. 6. Voil^ une femme et un homme heureux. 7« La vie du 
 ^nt est un combat, une lutte continuelle. 8. Le mont Blano est la 
 
 haute montagne de I'Europe. 9. Nous pr^fdrons les robes bleu 
 . aux robes jonquille. 10 Les nouveaux mari^s sont nartis k onze 
 ^es et demie. 1 1. Ma feue tante parlait tr^s bien Tangfais, mais pas 
 [en que feu mes soeurs. 12. A quoi bon recourir k des demi-rem^es 
 I les grands maux. 13. Un bonheur, une f^licit^ ^ternelle sera la r6- 
 [j)ense du juste. 14. Les moments perdus ne se retrouvent jamais. 15. 
 I jeunes filles sont tr^s belles ; elles ont les cheveux noirs, les yeux 
 jis, les l^vres vermeilles et le teint clair. 17. Cette jeune fille ne 
 [aille qu'aveo la langue ; c'est une parleuse perpttuelle. 18. 
 |>ir de parler est la plus vive jouissance de certaines personnes. 
 
 longue habitude du mensonge devient une maladie morale, 
 irice except^e, toutes les pasaluns s'^teignent aveo I'&ge. 21. 
 
 ins voyageaient nu-pieds et nu-tete ; aujourd'hui lis voyagent par le 
 lin de fer et se vStent k la mode. 22. Une femme qui fut t^moin de 
 
 la scdne demeure dans une maison conti^u^ k la v6tre. 23. Les 
 
 les lib^raux sont les avant-coureurs de la liberty. 24. Quelle difii6r- 
 
 Le 
 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 
 Les 
 
ji ,;^f~'vr~. 
 
 Ilii 
 
 i i 
 
 I < 
 
 i ■! 
 
 I H 
 
 I ji 
 
 i 
 
 30 
 
 enee y a-t-il entre : On demands un homme et une femme d^g^s, et. On (]«.' 
 mande un homme et une femme &g^e ? Et entre : Cette femme a I'air fier 
 Cette femme a I'air fi^re ? 25. Lea femmes, disait M"*- de Scud^ry, soni 
 coquettes quand elles sont belles, et grondeuses quand elles sont sages. 26 
 Je suis bien content de vous aujourd'hui, mesdemoiselles ; vous ferez dy 
 progrds rapides dans vos etudes, si voiis etes toujours aussi studieuses 
 aussi ob^issantes et aussi attentives qu'aujourd'hxd. Adieu. 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 1. I am always glad to find parents who are neither too rich nor tor 
 proud to {pour) let their children go sometimes barefoot, bareheaded 
 to the country. 2. She was a wise mother who allowed Henry IV. as a 
 child to traverse, barefoot like his peasant comrades, the mountains of 
 his native country. 3. France owes to her the greatest of her kings 
 4. One leaves the dusty streets of the noisy city. 5. Ontf finds one's 
 self in the green fields and woods. 6. One wades-through {passer d gui 
 the little streams or swims {passer A la nage) the larger ones. 7. One 
 gathers the raspberries (there are none so fresh and sweet in the shops) 
 8. One stops {s'arrSter) at sor.-i.3 pretty white farm house to drink pure 
 cold water or fresh milk, or rests {se reposer) near [of] the spring 
 shaded by the trees. 9. Nature is frank, honest, benign, and the boys. 
 who love the green woods, the blue lakes, the clear brooks will love 
 honest and generous sentiments. 10. Your sons have sun-burnt faces 
 and arms, what matter {qu'importe) ; they have their minds {dme f.) 
 clear, serene, cheered by {de) the remembrance of many happy days 
 11. Their life is not incomplete, formal and bare ; it is full of happiness 
 and joy. 12. All the places of the neighbourhood become familiar and 
 dear to them ; the earth has for them great and perpetual charms. 13 
 Later in life when they [shall] have become successful merchants, 
 famous soldiers, great scholars, they will return sometimes to the favorite 
 places of their early (first) years. 14. They will experience {4prouver) a 
 sweet satisfaction in (d) recognizing each hill, each valley, each tree. 
 15. They will wish perhaps to become again bare-foot, bare-headed 
 boys, young, happy, glowing with {rayonnant dc) the reflections of 
 the dawn of life. 
 
 Composition 18. 
 
 Madame de S^vignd. 
 
 A widow at twenty-five [years] with a large fortune and a remarkable 
 beauty, she devoted herself entirely to her children, to her daughter 
 especially, the beautiful and cold Mme. de Grignan, for whom she had : 
 the most passionate love till the end of her life. The severe Arnand | 
 used-to-scold her, saying that she was a pretty pagan, and that she was || 
 making of her daughter the idol of her heart. Let us excuse this inno- : 
 cent idolatry : we owe it to a correspondence which during twenty- 
 seven of the most curious yeava of the reign of Louis XIV., was always 
 as eager, as full of interest and liveliness as on the first day. It is 
 through* motherly love, it is to amuse her daughter, who is^ majestically 
 bored* in' the midst of the fetes and bickerings* of provincial society, 
 that she undertakes to* transport Paris and Versailles to Aix. Her 
 correspondence, like an enchanted mirror makes* us acquainted with* the 
 
81 
 
 eftg^s, «t. Ou(l«.:'i 
 femme a I'air fier 
 de Scud^ry, son! 
 les sont sages. 26 
 |3s ; vous f erez dej 
 aussi studieuses 
 idieu. 
 
 lurt and its intrigues, the king, the Church, the theatre, literature, 
 ir, fetes, banquets, toilets. All this becomes animated and bright in 
 ssing-thrcugh' the mind of this charming woman. " I never had my" 
 laginatiori so struck," said* the Duke of Villars-Brancas, after having 
 iished the reading of her letters; "it seemed to me that with* one 
 roke of her wand, as if by* magic, she had made*'' this old world come 
 \lio — to make it »>as8 in** review before me." 
 
 Demogeot. 
 
 [par. 57,5. Venn«j/er. >d. *traeasserie. ^de. ^faire connattre. traverser. H\ 
 $ait. io/aire sortir. ^^en. 57,5. 
 
 IV. Position of thk Adjective (Place dk l'adjectif). 
 
 The Determinate Adjectives (Demonstrative, Possessive, Nu- 
 
 ^ral, Indefinite) precede the Noun. 
 
 !)es hommes ; mes fr^res ; cent 
 imes ; la sixi^me phrase ; cer- 
 »s hommes ; diSerents (various) 
 ^ens. 
 
 Exceptions : Phrase deux (trois, 
 etc.): deux livres quelconques ; una 
 valeur septuple. 
 
 r4. The Qualitative Adjective may precede or follow, but usually 
 lows. 
 
 heureuses popu- 
 itions. 
 
 I peuplade&(<n&ed) 
 leureuses. 
 
 Les lies charmantes. I L'immense et nouveau con- 
 
 I tinent. 
 Charmante lie ! ' La temperature suave, ^gale 
 
 sereine. 
 
 I Lid, bt 
 et 
 
 The place the Qualitative Adjective holds is often decided by — I. 
 baning, II. Form, and III. Euphony. 
 
 I. ACCORDINO TO MEANING. 
 
 The Qualitative Adjective fol- 
 lows X 
 
 I. To distinguish the object 
 [alified from other objects signi- 
 ' by the noun. 
 
 |e occasion heurcuse (malheureuse). 
 I homme vertueux. Une femme v6n6- 
 ible. 
 I herbes ameres. 
 
 Indicative of (1) Mental, (2) 
 
 ^ysical qualities, qualities of (3) 
 
 le and (4) Space and Situation. 
 
 Jn homme vertueux (courageux, in- 
 
 tr^pide). 
 
 Eaufroide; maison blanche ; litdur. 
 JJDes regrets tardifs ; mortsoudaine. 
 IPaix interieure ; nations lointaines. 
 
 The Qualitative Adjective precedes ; 
 
 ■- #■ . 
 a. To ascribe a permanent, es- 
 sential quality — such a quality as 
 you say is inherent in all the ob- 
 jects signified by the noun. 
 
 L'heureuse enfance. (All childhood is 
 
 happy.) 
 Le vertueux Anstide. Levdn^rable Platon. 
 Ces ameres deceptions. 
 
 6. Indicative of Personal Emo- 
 tion on the part of the speaker. 
 
 Adieu, charmant pays de France. 
 Va-t-en, mideral)le garQon. 
 Heureux celui qui trouve un ami. 
 Grande fut notre surprise. 
 
 Introduced by que, comhun, the PredU 
 oate Adjective must be in the predicate. 
 
 Que cette ville est belle '. ' > 
 
fiirrrvim 
 
 76. The figurative sense of the adjective often, though not neces-^ 
 sarily, gives the adjective a different position from that given by the i 
 literal sense. 
 Eaufroide; un habit noir; une | La froide raison ; les noires pen. 
 
 pomne douce. 
 
 s^es ; la douce chaleur. 
 
 ADJECTIVES THAT CHANGE IN MEANINO AS THET OHANOB IN POSITION. 
 
 77. The following adjectives are especially worthy of notice as following when taken in % 
 their Primary, Literal Meaning, as preceding in the Secondary, Figurative Meaning. 
 
 Primary Meaning, after the Noun. 
 
 Certain, reliable : une histoire certaine. 
 Cruel, cruel : un homme cruel. 
 Difli§rent, different: des avia diif brents. 
 "FAMXtfavlty, wrong: une clef fausse. 
 Franc, frank : une f emnrie franche. 
 Furieux, furious : un lion fr.rieux. 
 Galant, attentive to ladies : un homme 
 
 galant. 
 . Haut : mer haute, (with the tide in). 
 'B.onn&te,jltting, polite: un prix hon- 
 
 n^te ; uu homme honnete ; un homme 
 
 malhonnete O'ndvil). 
 Maigrre : un chien maigre (lean); les 
 
 jours maigrea (fast days) ; repas maigre 
 
 (meal without meat), 
 Nouveau, new; un livre nouveau; 
 
 un habit nouveau (o/tfes latest fashion); 
 
 du vin nouveau (last year's wine). 
 
 But : un habit neuf (newly-made). 
 Parfait, perfect, faultless: un ouvrage 
 
 parfait. 
 Pauvre, lacking money : un homme 
 
 J)auvre. 
 aisaut, amusing, laughable : histoire 
 plaisante. 
 Pure, pure : &me pure ; eau pure. 
 
 8&vl, aloMt apart: homme seul; voix 
 
 seule. 
 Simple: corps simple (elementary); 
 
 sold at simple, (artless, silly). 
 Triste, sad: un homme triste. 
 Vral, true : une histoire vraie. 
 
 Secondary Meaning, before the Noun. 
 
 some: certains hommes, un certain espace. 
 tiresome : un cruel homme. 
 several : differentes per^onnes Tont dit. 
 imitation : une fausse (skeleton) clef. 
 doiimright,geniiine: un franc f ripon(ro£fue), . 
 excessibe : un furieux mangeur. ^ 
 
 gentlemanly : un galant homme. 
 
 haute mer : open sea. 
 honest : un honndte homme ; un malhon- 
 nete (dishonest) homme. 
 
 scanty, cold, insufficient: nn maigre 
 
 repas ; une maigre recep jion ; de 
 
 maigres raisons. 
 un nouveau (fresh) livre ; un nouvcl (an 
 
 other) habit ; de nouveau (jfist received) 
 
 vin. 
 
 perfect in the quality signified by th 
 noun : un parfait fripon. 
 
 lacking merit : v.a pauvre homme ; (fa- 
 miliarly) mon pauvre (poor) ami. 
 
 ridiculous : un plaisant homme. 
 
 une pure (mere) illusion. But : une illu. 
 
 sion toute pure (pure and simple), 
 only : un seul mot ; un seul Dieu. 
 
 un simple (private) soldat; une simple 
 
 (simple, mere, single) fleur. 
 "un triste accueil, a sorry welcome, 
 downright, genuine: un vrai fripon. 
 
 78. In their Primary Meaning the following adjectives precede. In their Secondary 
 Meaning they follow. 
 
 Cher, beloved: moncheraml. 
 Dernier, last of a series : la demi^re 
 
 pjin^edusiecle. 
 M^chant, xvorthless: une m^chante 
 
 ^pigramme. 
 Meme, same : la mime nuit. 
 Propre, own : mes propres habits ; les 
 
 propres (samx) termes. 
 
 expensive : une ^toffe chere. 
 Mst elapsed : I'ann^e detniere. 
 
 hUing : une ^pigramme mechante. 
 
 self, very : la vertu mime, la nuit mcnie. 
 clean: mes habits propres; les termes 
 propres (right). 
 
 The Adjectives bon, brave, grand, mauvais, have special meanings in a few -I 
 ' expressions only. In other expressions they have their literal meaning, and precede. ^ 
 
 Un bon homme =^ood easy m4in. 
 
 Un brave homme (femme, fllle, gar^on, 
 
 gens) = wort A J/ man, etc. ( familiar). 
 Jn grand homme =flT«at man. 
 Une grande dame=(aclt/ qf rank. 
 Uu air uiauvai8">?na2ietott« look. 
 
 Un homme bon (homme de bien), v;',rtuow 
 
 man. 
 Un homme (femme, garden, etc.) brave = 
 
 brave man, etc. 
 Un homme grand =to7{ man. 
 Une grande dame=/aW lady. 
 Un mauvais air - ill-bred look. 
 
33 
 
 II. According to Form. 
 
 In their Secondary 
 
 me m^ohante. 
 
 gfarQon, eto.)trave:: 
 
 Qualitative Adjectives follow : 
 
 1. If long. 
 
 Un cri gendral ; una femme acari- 
 fttre (cross). 
 
 The Adjectives in -able, -ible, 
 -aire, -al, -el, -atre, -eur, -ic, 
 -if, -que, consequently follow. 
 
 |2. Modified by a Long Adverb. 
 Un jour parfaitement beau. 
 
 Js. If followed by a Phrase. 
 Une action digne d'61oge. 
 
 k If derived from Participles or 
 Irooer Mouns. 
 
 A. 
 
 Les vents rafralchissants (refreshing). 
 L'cquipage (crew) revoke. 
 Des nouvelles ina,ttenduea(unexpected). 
 I Laiour£iffel^ La nation oanadietine. 
 
 Qualitative Adjectives precede ; 
 
 a. If one of the Short Adjec- 
 tives : beati, bon, court, grand, 
 gros, jeune, joli, mauvais, moindre, 
 meilleur, petit, sot, taste, vieux, etc. 
 
 Un beau jeune homme. 
 Une belle et noble mort. 
 
 h. These adjectives may be 
 
 modified by a Short Adverb and 
 
 still keep their place. 
 
 Un tr^s (si, trop, bien, fort) beau jour. 
 
 c. Present participles that have 
 become Verbal Adjectives often 
 precede. 
 
 Charmantpays. Cettebrillante nature. 
 
 d. A few Perfect Participles 
 may precede. 
 
 Ces pr6tendus savants. Un mad 
 
 coquin. 
 Une feinte reconciliation. Ladite 
 
 maison. 
 
 * Note.— In translating from English into French, it must be remembered that 
 e is not the same liberty in French as in English in the use of nouns ai^ adjectives, 
 way in which the adjective force in French is secured may be seen in the 
 >wmg : 
 
 vin de France = French wine, 
 bois du Bresil = Brasil wood, 
 voiture A deux roues = two- wheeled carriage. 
 But: Le clocher du village=the village 
 steeple. 
 
 ith names of persons, however : Maison Vauquer ; Hdtel Comeille, eto. 
 
 rociantde Iiondres=London merchant. 
 
 itre d'or = gold watch, 
 jisonde campagi>e= country-house. 
 
 clocher de village = a village steeple 
 
 III. According to Euphony. 
 
 Considerations of Euphony sometimes aflFect the position of the 
 ijective. Adjectives ending in a sibilant are sometimes placed with 
 [vantage before nouns baginning with a vowel. 
 
 I brillants atours. 
 heureux avantage. 
 
 Co-ordinate Adjectives follow the rules above, though when con- 
 3ted by conjunctions they often precede the Noun. 
 Vhere the adjectives differ in comprehension, the most restrictive 
 les first in English and last in French. / 
 
 Ces brillants astres is harsh, however, com- 
 pared with : Ces astres brillants. 
 
 grand homme sec. 
 fall thin man. 
 
 grande table ronde, 
 
 pauvre pe'^it cheval noir. 
 3U ^ternel et tout-puissant. 
 
 homme aimable et poli. 
 
 
 
 Arbres strangers utiles. ^ 
 Useful foreign trees. 
 Jurisdiction criminelle anglaise. 
 English criruinaljurisdictton. 
 
u 
 
 i i 
 
 TllfcME 19. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the I'osilion of the adjectives. 
 
 1. Bonjour, mes 616ves. Comment vous portez-vous, Charles ? 2. J'a 
 un groa rhume depuia la semaine derni^re, monsieur. 3. Vous pronnt 
 cez tr^s bien lessons nasaux, Charles. 4. A. quelque chose mallim 
 est bon. 5. Mais il va pleuvoir. Fermez, s'il vous plait, la fenetre i 
 derii^re et ouvrez la fenetre de devant. 6. Nous pourrons voir 1 
 tempete par la fenetre ouverte. 7. Lea nuages noirs ont dejk obscur 
 le ciel bleu. Le vent se 16ve. Quelle aflfreuse temp^^te ! 8. Les rougei 
 gorges, les moineaux^ tous les petits oiseaux s'abritent dans les arbre, 
 9. 11 pleut d^]k k seaux. Quelles grosses gouttea ! 10. C'est par « 
 tel temps que le voyageur sur la mer Atlantique se rappello lea ver 
 passioun^s de Theodore de Banville : 
 
 La grande mer sera notre cercueil ; 
 Nous servirons de prole au noir naufrage. 
 
 11. Que la salle de classe est obscure 1 Nous pouvons k peine lire 1. 
 
 Shrases du th^me. 12. Fermez lea livres, je vous lirai les phrases les pli 
 ifficiles. 13. Le scul nom du printemns sugg^re les id^es les plus riantc: 
 14. Ces rivieres arrosent les diflferents paya de I'Europe. 16. Si j'dta 
 riche, disait J. -J. Rousseau, sur le penchant de quelque agr6able collii ; 
 bien ombrag^e j'auraia une petite maisou rustique, une maison bland 
 avec des contrevents verts. 16. Oil sont situ^s le canal de Suez, le ca,, 
 Horn, le phare Eddystone, la foi'St Noire, I'ocean Glacial arctique? 17. 1 
 
 {)eintre oflFre k I'ceil du opectateur enchants les campagnes d^licieuses c 
 'antique Sicile : des temples d'une architecture majestueuae 616vent le; 
 front superbe par-dessus la foret sacr^e qui les entoure : I'imaginatu ^ 
 se perd dans les routes silencicuses de ce pays id^al ; des lointains ble ' 
 atres se confondent avec le ciel, et le pay sage entier, se rdp^tant dai 
 lea eaux d'un fleuve tranquille, forme uu spectacle qu'aucune langue t 
 pent d^crire, 18. C'est un de mes auteurs favoris qui a ^crit eel. 
 Aavier de Maistre. 19. A present la pluie a cess6 ; le temps s'^claircti 
 20. Que le ciel est bleu ! Apr^s la pluie, le beau temps. 21. C'est 
 derni^re phrase du th^me fran9ais ; traduisez la premiere phrade anglai| 
 du th^me vingt. 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 1. The azure sky, the blue sea, and the green earth are all the worig 
 of the Divine Artist. 2. The rough school of adversity is the be^ 
 school. 3. Our good or our bad fortune depends on (de) our good or o 
 bad conduct. According to (selon) a certain French writer the Canadii,; 
 lives (habiter) in eternal forests. What a ridiculous writer ! 5. The i 
 manceof a Poor Young Man, by Octave Feuillet is a very charniii; 
 novel. 6. Who are great men of past ages ? 7. I do not like your iie ^ 
 acquaintance. He is not a frank man, he is a downright rascal. 
 shudder at the mere thought of his presence. 8. The French Re vol; 
 tion is the most important event of modern times. 9. The steam engic 
 the railway, the electric telegraph are the greatest inventions of the nil 
 teenth century. 10. He is a tiresome man ; he is always relating absu 
 stories of the marble tables, the mahogany chairs, the magnificent librat 
 of his ancient dwelling. It is a pure illusion. 11, The private soldi^ 
 
I 10. C'est par ir 
 
 35 
 
 loved Colonel Genestas, who was a brave man. 12. The maple has a grace- 
 ful and delicato beauty, and is well worthy of being the Canadian national 
 pree. 13. During next winter wo shall have several instrumental con- 
 berts in the large hall of our Collegiate Institute. 14. Public gardens, 
 lagnificent churches, broad walks adorn that beautiful Italian town. 15. 
 [•he ministerial party is composed of capable and progressive 
 len. One cat not say that of all political parties. 16. The worthy 
 lan ! he has saved that boy from a dissolute, shameful, and wretched 
 ife. 17. I have a bad opinion of him who has a good opinion of nobody. 
 [8. The year 1899 will be the last year of the nineteenth century, 19. 
 The two boys gave prompt, vigorous, and even witty replies to the 
 Various questions. 20. In the sweet illusions of the ideal world we for- 
 et the bitter pains of the real world. 
 
 Composition 21. 
 
 Stony^ Arabia. — Let one imagine' a country without verdure and 
 ithout water, a burning sun, a sky ever dry,' sandy plains, mountains 
 ren more arid, over which the eye extends' and the sight is lost* with- 
 it being able to^ pause on any living object ; a land dead, and, so to 
 
 sak*, flayed by the winds, which presents only bones, scattered 
 (bblea, rocks standing^ or overturned : an^ absolute solitude a thousand 
 
 les more frightful than that of forests. Buffon 
 
 \Circm Children. — I have, I trust, [a] great tenderness for all children; 
 it I know that I have a special place in my heart for those poor little 
 matures who figure in circuses and shows, or elsewhere as '* infant 
 >digies." Heaven help^ such little folk I It was (is) an unkind fate 
 it did not make them commonplace, stupid, happy girls and boys like 
 own Fannys and Charleys and Harrys. Poor little waifs, that never 
 lew any childhood — sad human midges that flutter for a moment in the 
 i^^ of the gaslights and are gone. ]^itiful little children, whose 
 ider limbs and mmds are so torn and strained by though' less task- 
 sters that it seems scarcely a regrettable^^ thing when the circus cara- 
 halts^^ a while on its way to^' make a small grave by the wayside.^' 
 
 T, B. Aldrich. 
 
 iP/tr^e. 's^imaffiner. *^itendre. *8eperdre. ^pouvoir. *pour ainsi dire, ^debout 
 Iverb). 857,3. iquele del aide. ^Humiire iblouissante. ^^a regretter, ^/airehaite 
 .pour. ^>au bord de la route. 
 
 V. Comparison of Adjeotiybs (Comparaison des adjeotifs). 
 
 The Comparison of Adjectives is made by means of plus, more ; 
 
 [oins, less ; aussi (si), as (.so), for the Comparative ; and of le, (la, 
 
 3) plus, most ; le, (la^ les) moins, least, for the Superlative. An 
 
 ksolute Superlative may be made by means of any modifying adverb 
 
 sairis, Men, fort, injiniment. 
 These auxiliaries of comparison must be repeated before each adjec* 
 compared. 
 
 Positive : II est poll {jpolite). Elles sont polies. 
 
.S6 
 
 84. 
 
 De ces deux jeunes fllles, laquelle est la moins jnlit 
 Of these two young girla, which is the less pretty j 
 
 { SUPERIORITY : ( plus | 
 
 Comparative. ] equality : Elle ost I aussi polie que sa sanr. ' 
 ( INFERIORITY : ( moins 
 
 NoTB 1— In nc<;ativo sentences si may be used in place of aussi : Elle n'est pas aus, 
 
 (si) belle que sa soour. 
 
 NoTB 2— The orticle must be employed with the comparative in such sentences ns ; 
 
 Celui-ci est le plus fort des deux. 
 This is the stronger of the two. 
 
 Note 3— Should the comparative be of the nature: ''The more diligent or 
 is, the happier one is," the comparison in French must follow the rule : Plu. 
 on est diligent, plus on est heureux. 
 
 ( SUPERIORITY : Elle est la plus jolie de toutes. 
 85. Superlative. < inferiority : Ellessontles moins joliesdetoute. \ 
 ( ABSOLUTE : Vou8 ^tes infiniment bon. 
 Note 1— The Possessive Adjectives may take the place of the Article : 
 
 Voililimon plus errand, dictionnaire: There is my largest dictionary. 
 
 Note 2— In the absolute construction, wfterc there is no notion of comparison tti 
 
 others, le plus, le moins, le mieux (best) are employed to denote the hisrhest d 
 
 gree of the quality possessed by the object. They are adverbial in function, and co 
 
 sequently invariable. 
 
 C'est le soir que cette jeune iille est le plus (le moins) belle. 
 
 It is in the evening that that young girl is the most (least) beautiful. 
 
 Compare with the preceding sentence : 
 
 Ce soir c'est une jeune fille qui est la plus jolie. 
 This evening it is a young girl who is the prettiest. 
 
 In the former sentence there is no idea of comparison with others,— the superlati 
 
 is absolute. In the latter the comparison la plus jolie de toutes is completed mentall 
 
 —the superlative is relative, and le must vary. 
 
 86. There are three adjectives which of themselves indicate comparison : meilleu 
 better, best ; pire, worse, worst ; moindre, less, least. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 rmoilleure 
 
 best 
 
 (plus mauvaise) 
 
 pire 
 
 worst 
 
 moindre 
 
 ^least 
 
 Note 1— Plus bon is used in the expression plus ou moins bon, better 
 worse ; Cs livre est-il plus ou moins bon que I'autre. 
 
 Note 2 — Petit, plus petit, le (la) plus petit must be used with reference to size. E 
 tu plus petit que tes f r^res ? Je suis le plus petit. Are you smaller than your brotlw 
 I am the smallest. 
 
 Note 3— The Adjective when compared is under the same rules as to position ast 
 positive adjective ; but le must be repeated when the adjective follows the noun. 
 
 Positive. 
 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 
 bon, 
 good,. 
 
 •8-5 
 
 'meilleur (never: plus bon) * 
 better 
 
 iNi 
 
 mauvais, 
 bad. 
 
 ll 
 
 (plus mauvais) 
 
 plus 
 
 worse 
 
 que le mal. 
 than the evi 
 
 petit, 
 little. 
 
 ^g 
 
 moindre 
 
 [less J 
 
 1-2 
 
 z ■ 
 
 ■I. 
 
 Le plus petit livre. 
 The smallest book. 
 
 Les livres les plus utiles. 
 The most useful books. 
 
 Vn fort beau jour. 
 A very Jine day. 
 
 There are also a few words that have the force of absolute superlatives : richiSSC^ 
 (extremement riche), illustrissime, r^v^rendlssime, etc. 
 
37 
 
 -the superlati; 
 
 VI. COMPLKMENTS OV ADJECTIVES (COMPLEMENTS DES ADJECTIFS). 
 
 87. As in English, adjectives in French are often followed by a Com- 
 llement. 
 f ne homme poli envers tout le monde. \ Un vaisseau prSt & partir. 
 
 The preposition to be employed before the complementary phrase de- 
 jnds on the character of the adjective. Generally speaking, adjectives 
 lat in English take to, in French take k ; those taking of, from, with^ 
 |ike de ; those taking towards, envers. 
 
 [88. Adjectives followed by k — The primary meaning of k being 
 endency or Direction, adjectives that signify Tendency towards, Fitness 
 r, etc., will be followed by k. 
 
 rcable, 
 *;, 
 
 lent, 
 '» 
 
 loTB— De I'eau bonne a boire, good drinking water, 
 md good for grapes. 
 
 IB9. Adjectives "with de — The primary meaning of de being 
 
 rigin. Separation, Means, adjectives that denote Feeling will take de 
 
 denote the origin of the feeling ; those denoting Absence, Scarcity will 
 
 te de to denote separation ; while with many Adjectives de pre- 
 
 les the noun signifying the Instrument or Agent. 
 
 agreeable. 
 
 cher, 
 
 dear. 
 
 facile, 
 
 easy. 
 
 easy. 
 
 difficile, 
 
 difficult. 
 
 iutcresse, 
 
 interested. 
 
 zealoiis (at). 
 
 cruel, 
 
 cruel. 
 
 nuisible. 
 
 hurtful. 
 
 fit. 
 
 exact, 
 
 exact. 
 
 occupc, 
 propre. 
 
 busy, 
 fit, etc. 
 
 Un terrain bon pour la vi^^ne. 
 
 loureux, in love with. 
 
 Me, eager. 
 
 Intent, content. 
 
 frieux, curiotis. 
 
 Bireux, desirous. 
 
 d^sole, grieved. 
 
 fach6, sorry. 
 
 fatigue, tired. 
 
 honteux, ashamed. 
 inconsolable, inconsolable. 
 
 indigene, 
 
 inquiet, 
 
 mecontient, 
 
 ravi, 
 
 reconnaissant, 
 
 indignant. 
 
 uneasy. 
 
 displeased. 
 
 glad. 
 
 grateful. 
 
 ferent, different. \ eloigne, remote, far. 
 
 vide, empty. 
 
 I absent, absent. 
 
 les as to position aatt 
 follows the noun. 
 
 Jeri, beloved. 
 tim6, esteemed. 
 
 couronne, crowned. 
 entoure, surrounded. 
 
 ivre, intoxicated. 
 »\x\\\i followed. 
 
 rempli, filled, etc. 
 
 JoTE — The complement after Adjectives of Dimension, etc., is introduced by de. 
 
 1 mur haut de six pieds. 
 lest &ge de vingt et un ans. 
 
 Une parnison forte de quinze mille hommes. 
 II est plus age que vous de deux ans. 
 
 1 90. Adjectives with en. After some adjectives denoting Plenty, 
 \c. , en is used. 
 
 andant, abundant. I fertile, fertile. | riche, rich. 
 
 ^nAfpniifie. V. expert, «a;^rt. [• sto. 
 
 [91. Adjectives with envers. After adjectives denoting a Feel- 
 towards in reference to persons, etc., envers is used. 
 
 1, good, kind. 
 Writable, charitable. 
 ipatissant, compassianate. 
 r, harsh. 
 
 pen^reux, generous. 
 mdulgent (or a, pourXindulgent. 
 ingrat, ungratefuL 
 liberal, liberal. 
 
 officieux, obliging. 
 poli, polite. 
 
 reconnaissant,«7rafe/«i. 
 respectueux,rcsj;ec^tt;. 
 
 fOTB— C616bre pour, par, celebrated for. 
 

 'III 
 
 ' il 
 
 
 II I 
 
 38 
 VII. Adjeotives Employed Adverbially (Adjectifs employes comme 
 
 ADVERBES). 
 
 92. 'Hie Adjectives bas, low, bon, cher, dear, court, short, faux, 
 false, irano, frank, juste, accurate, liaut, high, net, clear, etc., are 
 sometimes used to modify certain verbs. Employed thus adverbially, 
 they must remain invariable. 
 
 Cette femme parle bas. 
 Get homme parle hauL 
 Ces fleura sentent bon. 
 II a vendu sa vie bien cher. 
 
 Ces robes me coOtent oher. 
 Chante-t-elle faux ou Juste. 
 II nous a arr§t(^8 (stopped) tout court. 
 Elle a refus'^ frano et net ^flatly). 
 
 But : Des roses fralches cueillies, recently gathered ruses. 
 
 Th^mb 22. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the Forms of Comparison, Complement, eto. 
 
 1. Aujourd'hui le temps est meilleur. II ne pleut plus. Frofitons d'un 
 fort beau jour f^our voir les phrases les plus dimciles sous un jour favor- 
 able. La premiere phrase, mademoiselle A. 2. Les belles actions ca- 
 ch^es sont les plus agr^ables. 3. Turenne 4tait aussi modeste et aussi 
 sage que vaillant. 4. Toi la meilleuro et la plus aimde des soeurs. 5. 
 New York est la ville la plus commercante de* rAmeriqne. 6. L'hon- 
 neur est plus puissant, plus sacr4 que la loi. 7. G'est Thomme le plus 
 poli du monde. O'e^t un livre des plus ennuyants. 8. ,Au moindre 
 signe vous serez ob^i. 9. Sentez-vous quelque douleur ? Pas la moindre. 
 10. Le Canada est un pays fertile en hl6. 1 1. La crainte du mal est pire 
 que le mal mSme. 12. L'homme qui est esclave de ses passions irest 
 aim^ de personne. 13. Les grands hommes sont les plus exposes & la 
 calomnie. 14. C'est k la haine des envieux qu'ils sont le plus exposes. 
 
 15. Heureux ceux qui sont amoureux de I'^tude et qui y sont assidus I 
 
 16. Charles-Quint avec une arm^e forte de quatre-vingt mille hommes ne 
 put s'emparer de la ville de Metz. 17. L'ignorance est toujours prSte h 
 s'admirer. 18. Le plaisir d) la critique nous dte celui d'etre vivement 
 touches de tr^s belles choses. 19. On paie bien cher le soir les folies du 
 matin. 20. Tenez-vous droit, mesdemoiselles, ne vous penchez pas. 21. 
 Elle n'est pas forte sur le piano, mais elle est riche en vertus et en 
 beauts, suolime de soins pour son vieux p6ro. 22. Cela est bon pour 
 (centre, k) la fl^vre. 23. Voild. du bois bon k brtiler. 24. Le paysan a 
 achetS un cheval bon pour la charrue. 25. Les Grecs tinrent ferme 
 centre les Perses. 26. Ldonidas vendit sa vie bien cher. 27* M. de 
 Bismarck avait amen^ une femme qui a les plus grands pieds d'Outre* 
 Bhin, et une fille qui marche dans les traces de sa m^re. ., 
 
 28. Elle 4tait de ce monde, oii les plus belles choses 
 , ' . Ont le pire destin ; ■ "^ 
 
 Et, rose, elle a vScu ce que vivent les roseS| ' ;v 
 L'espace d'un matin. \ ~; 
 
 ■ *De after a superlative represents in English in. ; ^ i 
 
 XERCISE 23. 
 
 1 . In love with a country {champ^tre) life and curious to learn something 
 of the Breton peasants, I was spending my summer holidays in a little 
 Breton fishing village, celebrated for its picturesque beauty. 2. It is 
 
39 
 
 tfPLOYis COMME 
 
 le of the greatest pleasures, after the noise of the great world, to (de) 
 
 id one's self thus remote from its tumults and its passions. 3. The 
 
 sasants liked to see strangers, for their village was the prettiest in 
 
 krittany, and they were justly proud of it. 4. There was nothing 
 
 lore agreeable to them than to {de) welcome young artists eager to 
 
 fansform an exceedingly pretty landscape into (en) a very bad picture. 
 
 English peasants would have refused flatly to receive a stranger into 
 
 leir house {chez etix); the French peasant, polite to everybody, delighted 
 
 the opportunity of talking of Paris, England, America, receives him 
 
 [ith (d. 4/.) open arms. 6. I was well pleased with my reception in 
 
 ie house of Jean and Marie. 7. They (c*) were a happy couple, Jean 
 
 kcl Marie, beloved by their friends and relatives, respected by all the 
 
 llage. 8. The husband kind and generous to the best and dearest of 
 
 ives ; she, grateful for his love, devoted to her children and happiest 
 
 ^ar {aupris de) them. 9. I liked to see her busy with her work, to 
 
 ^ar her sing the old Breton songs. 10. She believed, no doubt, that 
 
 her life would be filled with happiness, crowned with flowers. 
 
 But a few days after my arrival I was a witness of the most afflicting 
 
 snt in human life. 12. Death is always sad ; but it is saddest when 
 
 surprises us in the midst of health and hope. 13. Misfortune with 
 
 ez) flshermen is always the same story. 14. A tempest, unexpected, 
 
 Bsistible, arises, seizes the frail boat upon the waves, dashes it against 
 
 cruel cliffs, and, perhaps in vievV of the cottage that is dear to him, 
 
 lan has lost his life. 15. The morning sun looks upon {regarder) a 
 
 )se on the beach near the smiling sea. 16. One night there was a 
 
 lous storm, and Jean a ad other flshermen were absent from the 
 
 llage. 17. The poor wife, uneasy about the safety of her husbant', 
 
 Ltched {veiller) all night. 18. Early in the morning there was a 
 
 lock (on frappa) at the door ; men were speaking .'ow — they ware 
 
 trying something dripping with water. 19. There wat; a great cry of 
 
 [rror ; some one fell ; and great tears gushed {couler) from the eyes of 
 
 flshermen, tender-hearted (compassionate) towards the poor lyomau 
 
 10 had lost what she had [of] dearest on earth. 
 
 Composition 24, 
 A Child's Heart. 
 
 [*' The other day an old woman, holding a bundle in her* hand, worn 
 bh walking, sat-down^ on the roadside to res*. A group of three little 
 lldren, the oldest about nine', stopped in-front-of* the old woman, 
 ring not a word, but watching her face. She smiled. Suddenly the 
 
 jile faded (disappeared) and the corner of the calico apron went-up* 
 
 [wipe-away* a tear. The oldest chUd asked : 
 
 7 Are you sorry [de ce] that you have n't any children ?» 
 Fl had children once, but they are all dead,' whispered' the old woman. 
 I I'm sorry,* said the little girl, as her chin quivered^. * I'd give you 
 one of my little brothers, but I have only two, and I don't believe 
 Lt I'd like* to spare*" one. ' 
 
 [God bless you, child, bless you for ever,' sobbed the old woman and 
 I a moment her face was buried (hidden) in her apron. 
 I But,' seriously continued the child, 'you may kiss us all once, and 
 little Ben isn t afraid, you may kiss him four times, for he's just as 
 let as candy.' 
 
i! 1 
 
 ii! i 
 
 111 
 
 Pedestrians who saw throe well-dressed" children put their arimi 
 around*' that strange old woman's neck, and kiss her, were greatly 
 puzzled. They did not know the hearts of children, they did not hear 
 the woman's words as she rose to go. ' Oh, children, I am only a \m\ri 
 old woman, but you have given me a lighter heart than I [n'] have hail 
 for*' ten long hopeless years. ' " 
 
 >d la. *ifasaeoir. *89. *devant, ^Say : she raised, eto. ^essuyer. 
 with a trembling (tremblement) of, eto. H\)9,'I9. %e passer de. 
 de. ^Hepuis. 
 
 idire tout has. "Sav; 
 "bwn mis. >«ou<(/ur ' 
 
 VIII. Numeral Adjectives (Adjectifs NUMfiRAUx). 
 
 93. The Numeral Adjectives are either Cardinal, to denote the exact} 
 number of objects signified by the noun, or Ordinal, to denote the relaj 
 tive rank held by the object signified by the noun. 
 
 The Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals by ttie addition of -idine, the mute e of 
 the Ordinal, where such exists, being dropped. Premier (premiere), second(e) 
 cinqui^me, neuvidme are irregular. 
 
 ■.^ 
 
 Cardinal. 
 
 1 un, (une, f.) - 
 
 2 deux. 
 
 3 trois. 
 
 4 quatre. 
 
 5 cinq. 
 
 6 six. 
 
 7 sept. 
 
 8 huit. 
 
 9 neuf. 
 
 10 dix. 
 
 11 onze. 
 
 12 douze. 
 
 13 treize. 
 
 14 quatorze. 
 16 quinze. 
 
 16 seize. 
 
 17 dix-sept. 
 
 18 dix-huit. 
 
 19 dix-neuf. 
 
 20 viiigt. 
 
 21 vingt et un(e). 
 
 22 vingt-deux. 
 
 Ordinal. 
 
 Ist premier, (pre- 
 miere, f.) 
 
 2nd deuzidme, 
 8econd(e). 
 
 8rd troisi^me. 
 
 4th quatri^me. 
 
 6th cinqui6me. 
 
 6th sixieme. 
 
 7th septieme. 
 
 8th huiti^me. 
 
 9th neuvieme. 
 10th dixi^me. 
 11th onzieme. 
 12th douzieme. 
 13th triezieme. 
 14th quatorzieme. 
 16th (j^uinzi^me. 
 16th siezieme. 
 17th dix-sejiti^me. 
 18th dix-huitieme. 
 19th dix-neuvieme. 
 20th vingtieme. 
 21st vingt et unidme. 
 22nd vingt-deuxieme. 
 
 Cardinal. 
 
 23 vingt-trois, eto. 
 
 30 trente. 
 
 31 trente et un(e). 
 
 32 trente-deux. 
 
 40 quarante. 
 
 41 quarante et un(e). 
 
 42 quarante-deux. 
 60 cinquante. 
 
 51 cinquanteetun(e). 
 62 cinquante-deux. 
 60 soixante. 
 
 70 soixante-dix. 
 
 71 soixante et onze. 
 
 72 soixante-douze. 
 
 73 soixante-treize. 
 
 74 soixante-quatorze. 
 76 soixante-quinze. 
 
 80 quatre-vingts. 
 
 81 quatre-vingt- 
 
 un(e). 
 
 82 quatre-vingt- 
 
 deux. 
 
 83 quatre-vingt- 
 
 trois, eta 
 
 m 
 
 w 
 
 Cardinal. f^ 
 
 90 quatre-vingt-(li\J^ 
 
 91 quatre-vingt """^ 
 
 onze. 
 
 92 quatre-vingt 
 
 douze. 
 
 93 quatre-vingt 
 
 treize. 
 
 100 cent. 
 
 101 cent un(e). 
 
 102 cent deux. 
 
 121 cent vingt et un 
 
 122 cent vingt-deux 
 400 quatre cents. 
 490 quatre cent qm 
 
 tre-vingt-dix. 
 1,000 niille. (In AH 
 dates, when follow 
 edbyanothernuiii 
 ber,7m7{eisusuiilli 
 written mil.). 
 10,000 dix mille. 
 11,562 onze mille <;iii'i 
 cent soixanti 
 deux. 
 
 Note 1. — The final consonants in cinq, six, sept, huit, neuf, dix are sounded when tlit 
 words are used absolutely, or when followed by a vowel sound. Neuf is pronounced^ 
 neuv before a vowel sound. Cinq heures ; neuf honimes ; c'est le dix. But : Cin(qil 
 garcjons ; neu(f) livres ; di(x) bons enfants. The t of vingt is pronounced in all tklj 
 twenties, but not in the eighties ; g is silent in both. X in soixante is pronounced -si. ^ 
 
 Note 2.— The hyphen in the composites dix-sept, dix-huit, etc., must not be used! 
 when et joins the composing words ; nor in joining cent, mille, etc., to a foUowin;! 
 number. 
 
 Note 3. — The plural s in qvatre-vingta (80) and deux centa, trois cents, etcj 
 must be dropped (1) when another number follows ; (2) when they are used as ordinak| 
 Mille (mil), thousand, is invariable. (' Cinq milles ' means Jive miles.) 
 
41 
 
 1 put their aniH 
 ler, were greatly 
 hey did not ho;ii 
 I am only a \n>ut 
 n I [n'] have liul 
 
 tdire tout has. *S;iy: 
 i^bi'en TOW. ^*aulM\i 
 
 m£raux). 
 
 > denote the exactf 
 o denote the rula 
 
 -idme, the muto c of ij 
 mi^re), secondlei 
 
 90 quatre-vingtilix 
 
 91 quatre-vingt- ; 
 onze. 
 
 92 quatre-viiigt- 
 douze. 
 
 93 quatre-vingt- 
 treize. 
 
 100 cent. 
 
 101 cent un(e). 
 
 102 cent deux. 
 
 121 cent vingt et un.' 
 
 122 cent vingt-deux, 
 400 quatre cents. 
 490 quatre cent qua 
 
 tre-vingt-dix. 
 1,000 inille. (InA.li 
 dates, when follow j 
 ed by another nuiii'^ 
 ber, 7mKeisusuall)| 
 written mil.). 
 10,000 dix inille. 
 11,562 onze mille ciiiqi^ 
 cent soixante "^ 
 deux. 
 
 are sounded when the! 
 
 Nevf is pronounced! 
 
 le dix. But : Cin(q| 
 pronounced in all th(| 
 nte is pronounced ■ 
 
 tc, must not be usedl 
 U, etc., to a followinsi 
 
 t&, trois cents, etc,,| 
 y are used as ordinal$.| 
 ilea.) 
 
 94. I>i speaking of sovereigns and days of the month the French 
 employ the cardinal numerals, except for firat (premier). 
 
 Henry premier, Henry I. 
 Charles deux (second), Charles 11. 
 Jacques trois, James III. 
 Philippe cinq, Philip V, 
 Ijouis (luatorze, Louis XIV 
 
 le proinier Janvier, Jan. Ist, 
 le deux f^vrler, Feb, Snd. 
 le trois mars, March ^rd. 
 le quatre avril, Aftril Uth. 
 le cinq nmi, May 5th. 
 
 land so on with \\jA.xx^Jum: Juillet, Jnhj ; aoflt, August; eeptembre, octo- 
 I bre, novembre, ddcembre. 
 
 KoTB 1.— The Emperor Charles V. is always in French Charles-Quint, ('Charles 
 ! cinq • means Charles V , King of France.) * Sixtus V.' is Sixte-Quint, 
 
 NoTB 2 —In speaking also of chapters, pa/jes, sentences, etc., we may, if we wish, 
 I employ the cardinals as ordinals. Chapitre quatre-vingt — chapitre quatre-viiigli^me 
 = quatre- vingtieniechapitre, chapter eighty. So page quatre cent, phrase cent une, 
 [etc. 
 
 Fraclioruil Numbers 
 
 un demi. 
 (la moiti^). 
 un tiers, 
 un quart, 
 un cinaui6nie 
 un slxleme. 
 un septi^nie, etc. 
 PluraJized : 
 deux deniis. 
 trois tiers, 
 six quarts, 
 cinq septicmes. 
 iVdix vingt et unicmes, 
 
 Multiplicatives. 
 
 double, double. 
 triple, triple. 
 quadruple, quadruple. 
 quintuple, quintuple. 
 sextuple, sextuple. 
 septuple, septuble. 
 octuple, octuple. 
 
 decuple, ten-fold, 
 centuple, hundred-fold. 
 Or— neuf (dix, etc.) fois 
 autantmikyhe used. 
 
 Collective Numeral Nount, 
 
 une huitaine, some 8, 
 une dixainc, about 10, 
 une douzaine, a dozen. 
 une quinzaine, about 15. 
 une vingtaine, a score. 
 une trentaine, some SO. 
 une quarantaine about Ifi. 
 une cinquantaine, about 50, 
 une soixantaine, about GO, 
 une centaine, aomit 100. 
 un millier, about 1000, 
 un million, a million, 
 un billion, thousand millions. 
 
 etc. 
 
 NoTB 1.— The multiplicatives are either adjectives or nouns : ' . 
 
 Mille est un nonibre centuple de dix. C'est le centuple de dix. 
 
 Thousand is a number a hundred times ten. It is the hundred-fold of ten, 
 
 NOTB 2.— The Collectives, being nouns, must talce the construction of nouns. 
 
 J'ai id trois douzaines d' (Bufs. Une vingtaine de mille francs. 
 
 I have here three dozen eggs. About (some) twenty thousands francs, 
 
 Dix fois cent mille millions de francs font un billion de francs. 
 
 2'en times a hundred thousand francs miike a thotisand million francs. 
 
 IX. Indefinitk Adjectives (Adjectifs ind^finis), 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 Jfo, not any : aucun, aucune, 
 aucuns, aucunes 
 
 aucune 
 
 Vous n'avez 
 
 preuve. 
 Aucunes troupes ne fu* 
 rent mieux discipiindes. 
 
 'II ne prend aucun 
 
 soin. 
 II ne fait aucuns 
 
 pr^paratifs. 
 
 Aucun is rarely used in the plural, and when used thus is employed with nouns 
 ^hat have no singular, or that have a special signiflcanoe in the plum. 
 
 It has the force of any'in doubtful questions, or after sans : 
 
 Avez-vous aucun ami ? II est sans aucune reasource. 
 
 17. No^notany: nul, nulle, rNuIhommen'estpar* 
 
 ■{ fait, 
 nuls, nuUes, in ny a nuls frais. 
 
 Nul is synonymous with aucun (neg.) as above. 
 
 ). Some, certain: certain, certaine, (Vn certain M. An- 
 
 J ffier. 
 certains.certaines. I Certains terivains 
 
 \, iwritersX 
 
 II ne va nulle part 
 
 (no where). 
 Nulles troupes. 
 
 Dans une certaine 
 
 histoire. 
 Certaines gens croi* 
 
 eut(pelieve). 
 
42 
 
 99. Each, every : 
 
 100. Many (a): maint, 
 
 ohaque, chaque, 
 
 No plural. 
 
 I Chaqne honimo ot ohaque fDmm& 
 
 mainte, t J'ai lii iiiuint(8) I Voii« ava. eu mainto 
 I llvrL<8). I ocuasion. 
 
 maints, maintes. j Maintun tola et maintes foia, many and 
 
 101. Several: plusieurs, plusieurs. 
 
 many a time 
 Plusieurs hommes. | II a plusieurs plumes. 
 
 Quelque femme ni'a 
 
 dit eela. 
 II a quelques robes. 
 
 102. Some, any, quelque, quelque, /Quelque temps 
 a/ew : I apres. 
 
 quelques, quelques.-j Nous sommcs qua- 
 
 I rante et <|u^lqucs 
 V (forty odd). 
 
 NoTK 1— The Adjective quelque followed by que Is to be translated whatever. 
 Quelque livre que vous iiyez, whntever hook you have. 
 Quelquea bons ouvriers que vous ayez, whatever good workmen you have. 
 
 NoTR 2— Quelque is also used adverbially and is then invariable to modify an adjective 
 
 or an adverb. 
 
 II a achet6 quelque (environ, h peu pros) deux cents bariis de pommes. lie has 
 bonght abotit two hundred barrelm of ajiples. Qucl(|ue (d!) savants qu ils soient. 
 However learned they be. QuoUiue souenient qu'il aifisse. However vnsely he 
 acta, Quelque bons solduts que soient les Franguis. JJowever good tioldieru the 
 French may be. 
 
 103. Whatever: quelconque. quelconque 
 quelconques, quelconques 
 
 'II n'y a homme quelconqne. 
 There is no man whatever. 
 
 Donnez-moi deux livres quel- 
 conques (two books whatever, 
 any two books). 
 
 une telle femme. 
 de telles femmes. 
 
 lOi. Such: tel, telle /un tel homme. 
 tela, telles \de tels hommes. 
 
 NoTB.— Observe the place of tel after the indeflnite. Similarly: Une pareille sur. 
 prise. Such a mrprise. 
 
 Notice also : Monsieur un tel, Madame une telle ; Messieurs tels, Mesdames telles et 
 telles. Mr. So-and-So, etc. 
 
 106. One, not one, a : un, une | Je n'ai pas un livre, pas une plume. 
 
 106. Every, all : tout, toute 
 tous, toutes^ 
 
 /^Tout kge a ses plaisirs. 
 Tout le monae (fiverybody) 
 est icL 
 Tons lea Jours, every day ; 
 tous les deux Jours, every 
 other day; tous (les) quatre 
 m'ont dit oela, aU four 
 . have told me that. 
 
 Toute femme. 
 la France. 
 
 Toute 
 
 Toutes les trois sc- 
 maines, every three 
 weeks. 
 
 NOTK 1.— In the sense ot chaque, each, and ot plein, fuU, tout is used without 
 the Article. 
 
 Tout homme. Toute femme. Des livres de toutes sortes. II agit (flcts) en toute liberte. 
 
 NoTB 2.~~Tmit is also used adverbially, and then is invariable except before a 
 feminine adjective beginning with a consonant or h aspirate, when it agrees. 
 
 Les choscs sont tout <\ 
 vous (entirely yours). 
 
 But : Cette femme est toute I Ces dames sont toutes sur- 1 Cest toute la mdme 
 mouill^e (wet). | prises. | chose. 
 
 With a participle tout adds an idea of simultaneousness. 
 
 Tout en disant cela, elle e'en alia. While saying that, she tpent avoay. 
 
 lis ^talent tout (quite) ^tonn6s. I Elles dtaient tout ^tonnees. 
 
4d 
 
 sleuw plumes. 
 
 ne parellle 8ur< 
 
 dames telles et 
 
 is used without 
 
 NoTH 8.— Tout is Invarinblo immcfllntely »»oforo the name of a town : Tout Rome (/. )^ 
 tiiul, liiHboiiiio (J). Thcst! plinisi's nil] clliiiliriil for: tout Ir i»'iiple df, ctr. 
 
 It \» aUo invariable in expreHsiotis Hhiiiliir tn lh<> followiii); : 
 Kile ctuit tout yeux et tout oruillfti. She wan all rifcH and earn. 
 
 107. Either : I'un ou I'autre, I'une ou I'autre 
 
 108. SeUher: nirunnil'autre.nirunenl I'autre 
 
 109. Both, run et rautre. Tune et I'autre 
 
 I/tiii ou I'autre livro inocon- 
 viftulra. Either book will 
 suit me, 
 
 Ni I'liiiu iii i'autre anni'o no 
 Bont arriv^e8(n'e8t urrivOe). 
 A'eitUer army has arrived, 
 
 L'lnio et I'autre arin<^o sent 
 urriv('-cH. lluth armies have 
 arrived. 
 
 Notice in tlie tlirce expressions altove, tliat tlio noun must remain in ttie sinKulMr. 
 For the agreement of the verbs, see 203. 
 
 ThIsme 25. 
 Translate. 
 
 1. Oil est Charles cette apr^8-mi(li ? 2. II n'est pas encore do rctour, 
 monsieur. 3. Premier & talle, durnicr au travail? 4. Kou, monsieur, 
 il m'a dit qu'il va passer quelqucs jours b. la campagnc. II sera de 
 retour d'aujourd'hui en quinzo. 5. J'esp^ro que quclquo dl6ve lui 
 communiquera tons les devoirs que nous lerons pendant Bon absence. 
 Maintenant & Twuvre. Quelle page, mademoiselle? 6. Page 91, cha- 
 pitre 10. 7. La premiere phrn HO, s'il vous plait, Fran9oise. 8. Achaque 
 oiseau son nid est beau. 9. J >us uids d'oiseaux se trouvent dans tous 
 lea bois. 10. Certains gar9ons sont alius denicher dea oiseaux. 11. 
 Tout ftge a ses plaisirs. 12. Tout cruels que sont ces gar9ons, ils ne 
 savent pa<) ce qu'ils font. 13. Tout de meme, une telle conduite ne 
 leur fait pas honneur. 14. Quelques eflforta qu'ils fassent, j'esp6re qu'ils 
 n'y r^ussiront pas. 15. Nos (Aleves n'ont fait aucuns prth^aratifs pour le 
 concert qui aura lieu le vingt et un du couraut. 16. 11 y en a quar- 
 ante et quelques qui sont membres du comity. 17. Telle vie, telle fin ; 
 on meurt comme on a vecu. 18. C'est un drOle de corps que M. A. 
 J'ai re9U de lui, il y a quelques jours, une lettre qui ne contenait que ces 
 quulques mots ; Paris, le 14 juillet, 1890. Mon cher ami, je suis venu, 
 j'ai vu, ]e suis vaincu. Paris est la plus belle ville du monde. Tout k 
 vous, A. 19. C'est un honune qu'on ne saurait trouver, il est tantut 
 chez monsieur un tel, tantdt chcz madame une telle. 20. Lisez en 
 fran9ai8 : 83, 94, 100. 180, 181, 201, 340, 963, 1000, 2000. 21. 2002, 
 4865, 100,000, 2,000,252. 22. l**, 21™ eS"", KH""", 345'n«, 999™». 23. 
 h Vt* f^y \^%j. -xh^hi' 24. Deux points quelconques^tant donnas. 25, 
 Pour achever uotre le9on, voici quelques lignes d'un petit podme : 
 
 Sur terre toute chose 
 A sa part de soieil ; 
 Toute ^pine a ^ rose, 
 Toute nuit, son r^veil. 
 
 Tout arbre a sa verdure ; 
 Toute abeille, son miel ; 
 Toute onde, son murmure; 
 Toute tombe, son ciel. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 1. The day is divided into (en) twenty-four hours ; the hoars into 
 sixty minutes. 2. Every week has seven days. 3. The first day {jour) 
 of the week is named Sunday ; the second, Monday ; the third, Tuesday ; 
 
the fourth, Wednesday ; the fiftli, Thursday ; the sixth, Friday ; and 
 the seventh, Saiurtlay. 4. The time that the earth takes (employer) to 
 turn around the sun forms what is called a year, 5. There are three 
 hundred and sixty-five days and a quarter in a year. 6. If we {on) 
 give the year three times in succession {de suite) three hundred and 
 sixty- five days, we are obHged the fourth wme to give it three hxindred 
 and sixty-six. 7. When the year has three hundred and sixty-six days 
 itissaid-^9-be (dite) leap-year (bissextile). 8. Tell us some years that 
 were (have been) leap-years. 9. 1864, 1880, 1884, 1888; and 1892 and 
 1894 will be leap-years also. 10. The first month of the year is called 
 January ; the second, February ; the third, March ; the fourth, April ; 
 the fifth. May ; the sixth, June ; the seventh, July ; the eighth, August ; 
 the ninth, September ; the tenth, October ; the eleventh, November ; the 
 twelfth, December. 11. Every month has thirty-one days, February, 
 April, June, September and Nbvember excepted. 12. Kow look at the 
 clock. It is now 10.30. 13. What time have you ? 14. It is 10.25 by 
 (A) my watch ? 15. What time have you, Charles ? 16. It is 10.45 by 
 mine. 17. That reminds me of a man who had so queer a little clock 
 that, when it rang six o'clock and the minute hand (grande aiguille) 
 was at V. and the hour (petite) hand at VII.« he knew it was noon. 
 
 Composition 27. * 
 
 • TJie First Days of Canada. 
 
 One may say that Canada was discovered in 1497 and 1498, for in 
 those years the two Cabots explored the coasts of Labrador and New* 
 foundland. It is to Jacques Cartier, however, that we owe the dis- 
 coveries that began the nistoric life of the French in this country. 
 Leaving St. Malo on the 20th of April, 1534, he arrived at Newfound- 
 land on the 10th of May. During this first voyage he explored the Bay 
 of Ohaleurs, and landed in Gasp^. In his second voyage he left St. 
 Malo on the 19th of May, 1535, with three ships and one hundred and 
 twenty men, and entered, on the 10th of August — ^the Festival of St. 
 Lawrence — [in] a gulf to which he gave the name of that saint. 
 Ascending the River St. Lawrence, he discovered on the 1st of Septem- 
 ber the island of Orleans, and a few days afterwards Stadacona, now 
 Quebec. On the 2nd of October he arrived at Hochelaga, now 
 Montreal. After having lost* twenty-six men during the winter that he 
 spent near Quebec, he returned to St. Malo on the 16th of July, 1536. 
 In 1541 Cartier was for the third time sent-out by Francis I., built two 
 forts near Cape Eouge, tried to' ascend the Lachine rapids, and returned 
 to, France. In 1549 the Sieur de Roberval, who had endeavored in 
 1542 to establish » colony at Cape Rouge, was lost at* sea with some 
 hundreds of companions. During fifty years the French abandoned all 
 projects of colonization. Recommencing their efforts in 1598, they 
 finally founded, in 1608, the city of Quebec, which marks the perma- 
 nent establishment of Europeans in Canada. 
 
 Such were the first efforts to explore and to colonize a ooimtry 
 which, less than three hundred years later, contains five million one 
 hundred thousand inhabitants, and sends to the other countries of the 
 Vorld exports to the value of almost one hundred million dollars. 
 
45 
 
 X. PossESSlTB Adjective and Pronouns (Adjectifs possrssifs et 
 
 PRONOMS POSSESSIFS). 
 
 110. The Posccisive Adjectives are: 
 Hasc. Fbiil 
 
 Sing, mon, ma (mon*),\« 
 Plur, mes, /' 
 
 Sing, ton, Sa(ton*), 
 Plur. tes, 
 Sing, son, sa(8on*), 
 ses, 
 
 ■my. 
 
 yhy. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing, 
 Plur. 
 
 \hi8, her, 
 j its. 
 
 notre, 
 nos, 
 
 votre, 
 vos, 
 
 leur, 
 leurs, 
 
 j-owr. 
 j-yowr. 
 
 The Possessive Pronouns are : 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 Sing, le mien, la mienne, \ .„^ 
 Plur. les miens, las miennes, / "^" 
 Sing, le tien, la tienne, ) ,j,.„„ 
 Plur. les tiens, les tiennes, ) "'^^' 
 
 Sing, leaien, lasienne, \hi8,hers, 
 P^ur. les siens, lessiennes, J 
 
 Sing, le notre, landtre, 
 Plur. les ndtres. 
 
 Sing, levdtre, lavdtre, l.,^,„, 
 Plur. lesvdtres. \ yours. 
 
 SJng. le leur, , laletir, J^^.^^ 
 
 } 
 
 ours. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 les leurs, 
 
 * The second femiiiins form of the Possessive Adjective is used for ease In pronun- 
 ciation when the adjective or noun following the possessive begins with a vowel or 
 silent h. 
 
 Mon ep6e (f ); mon autre plume (f.); son esperance (f. hope) ; ton adresse (f . skill), etc. 
 
 111, The Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns agree in Gender and 
 Number, the Adjectives with the noun following them, the Pronouns 
 with the noun understood after them. 
 
 Possessive Adjectives^ Possessive Pronouns, 
 
 with the noun expressed: vnth the noun understood : 
 
 Lui donnez-vous mon livre ? Non, je lui donne le mien. (' Livre * is understood.) 
 Do you give him my book $ No, I give him mine. 
 
 Lui donnez-vous mes livres? Non, je lui donne les miens. (' Livres* is understood.) 
 Do you give him my books t No, I give him, mine. 
 
 Lui donnez-vous ma plume? Non, Jelui donne la mienne. (' Plume* is understood.) 
 Do you give htm my pen t No, I give him mine. 
 
 Lui donnez-vous mes Non, je lui donne les miennes. (' Plumes' is under- 
 pluniea (my pens)}.' stood.) 
 
 NoTB 1— The Personal Pronouns with & are often used instead of the Possessive Pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 Ce livre est i^ mol. Ces Jardins sont & lui et i son pere. 
 
 Note also . J'ai un cheval & moi, / have a horse of my own. 
 
 NoTH 2— The expressions un mi'infrire, une mienne cousinc ; unsiennev&u, unsien 
 ami, etc., are used familiarly for a brother of mine, a cousin of mine, etc. The student 
 will do well, however, to prefer the expressions un de m^es frhres, une de wm cousines, 
 etc - 
 
 NoTR Z—Lea miens, les tiens, etc., may he employed to denote persons related to or 
 dependent on the possessor : II a rume les siens, He has, ruined his family. 
 
 112. While in general the Possessive Adjective must be repeated be- 
 tore every noun to which it refers, custom admits the use of one posses- 
 sive adjective in the plural before pere et mere. 
 
 II a vendu son cheval et sa voiture. 
 He has sold his hone and carriage 
 
 J'ai perdu mes per et mere. (So also : 
 tes (ses, nos, vos, leurs) pere etmere. 
 
 (•;" 
 
 ■; *;■ 
 
46 
 
 I 1:1 
 
 I 1 
 
 113. The Possessive Adjective must be repeated before each of the 
 adjectives preceding a noun, when they express opposite qualities. 
 
 II jugera de notre bonne et de notre mauvaise conduite. 
 - - He willjtidge of our good or bad conduct. 
 
 Limitations ix the Use of the Possessive Adjectives. 
 
 114. With parts of the body, etc., the Article is used instead of the 
 Possessive Adjective, when the sense shows clearly who is the posses- 
 sor. When the thing possessed is the object of an action, the dative 
 (indirect) personal pronoun usually indicates the possessor. 
 
 J'ai inal ^ la tete. My head aches. 
 II a froid aux pieds. His feet are 
 cold. 
 
 Je lui ai lav^ la figure. / washed 
 
 his face. 
 Je me suis fait mal ail bras. / 
 
 have hurt my arm. 
 To give explicit reference to the part of the body the Possessive Adjective is used. 
 
 Ma pauvre tete, que tu me fais mal ! 
 
 J'ai lave sa figure plus soigneusement que ses mains. 
 
 115, In speaking of tilings the Possessive Adjectives are not rsed 
 
 when the possessor and the thing possessed are in different propositions. 
 
 The possession is then denoted by en+le (la, les). 
 
 Le Saint- Laurent est un beau fleuve ; le cours en est souvent imp^tueux. 
 7'/i€ St. Lavrrence is a beautiful river ; its course is often impetuous. 
 
 Nous avons vu Paris ; nous en admirons les th^dtres. 
 
 We have seen Paris ; we admire its theatres. < 
 
 The Adjective would be used, however, if the thing possessed were the object oJ a 
 
 preposition, or if the possessor were personified. 
 
 Nous avons vu Paris ; nous admirons la beaut6 de ses theatres. 
 
 Rien u'epuise la terre ; plus on dechire ses entrailles, plus elle est libcrale. 
 
 XL Demonstrative Adjectives and Pronouns (Adjectifs d^mgn- 
 
 STRATIFS et PRONOMS D^MONSTRATIFS). 
 
 116. The Demonstrative Adjec 
 tives are : 
 
 SiNO. 
 
 Masc, Z*'®' *^''' 
 
 PliURAIi. 
 
 -ces, these, those. 
 
 \(cet)» that, 
 
 FEM. {cette. SJS; 
 
 *Cet is used before a noun or adjective 
 in the masc. sing., beginning with a vowel 
 or h mute: cet enfant, cet homme, cet 
 ancien colonel. 
 
 The Demonstrative Pronouns are * 
 
 (1) In place of a given noun : 
 Sing. Plural. 
 
 Mas>~ celui, this, that, ceux, these.those. 
 Fbm. celle, thiSfthat. celles, these,those. 
 
 (2) Absolutely, taking the place of no 
 noun expressed or underatood. 
 
 ceci, this ; cela, that. 
 
 (3) As the subject (in certain circum- 
 stances) of the verb 4tre. 
 
 ce (invariable), this, that, these, those, 
 he, she, it, they. 
 
 117. The Demonstrative Adjectives and Pronouns (1) agree in Gender 
 and Number,— the adjectives with the nduus that follow them,— the 
 pronouns with the nouns understood after them : 
 
 Adjective-Noun expressed : 
 Ce crayon. This (that) pencil, 
 Cet homme. This (that) man. 
 Ces crayons. These (those) pencils. 
 Ces plumes. These ithose)pens. 
 Ces crayons. 
 Ces hommes. 
 Ces pluniea 
 
 Pronoun-Noun understood : 
 Mon crayon et celui de notre f rere. 
 Ml/ pencil and that (crayon understood) 
 
 (»/ my brother. 
 Ma plume et celle de votre frire. 
 Mes crayons et ceux de votre fr^re. 
 Meu plumes et celles de votre fr^re. 
 
47 
 
 ou)i8 are ; 
 
 118. If we wish to make a distinction as regards nearness or distance 
 between the objects spoken of, we must add -ci (here) to represent 
 nearness, and -Idi (there) to represent distance. 
 
 J'ai deux livres ; celul-ci est meilleur 
 
 que celui-l&. 
 I have two books ; this is better than that. 
 
 Yoyez-vous mes plumes ; celles-ci sont 
 bonnes, celles-lll sont mauvaises. 
 
 .Do you see my pens ; these aregoodt those 
 are bad. 
 
 J'ai ici du drap et de la soie ; celle-ci 
 est bonne, celui-I& est mauvais. 
 
 I have some cloth and some silk ; the lat- 
 ter is Dfood, the former is bad. 
 
 119. Geci, thisy cela, (hat^ (2) are used absolutely taking the place 
 of no noun expressed or imderstood. They are really general names of 
 things. . ; 
 
 Ge livre-ci est meilleur que ce livre-l&. 
 This book is better than that book. 
 
 Ces livres-ci Bont meilleurs que ces 
 
 livres-la. 
 These books are better than those books. 
 
 Ces plumes-cl sont meilleures que ces 
 
 plumes-l&. 
 These pens are better than those pens. 
 
 Donnez-moi cecl, gardez cela. 
 Give me this, keep that. 
 Ceci est plus facile que cela. 
 This is easier than tha^ 
 
 ui VOU8 a dit cela? 
 
 ho told you that f 
 Cela fait, je m'en allai. 
 That done^ I went away^ 
 
 Note 1.— Cela in colloquial langua^^e is often abbreviated into 9a. ° * ~, 
 
 NoTB 2.— Cela (9a) is used of persons to express good-natured familiarity or 
 contempt. 
 Voyez oes petits innocents, comme 9a se <pa ne salt ni A ni B. 
 
 regale! . . ^i He doesn't know A from B. 
 
 See those little innocents, how they are 
 Jeasting I 
 
 120. Ge (3), this, (that, these, thane, Jie, site, it, they) is used as the 
 Demonstrative Subject of the verb Stre. 
 
 1. When followed by a Pronoun, a Determinate Noun (40), or between 
 two Infinitives used afiirmatively. 
 
 C'est moi. C'est vous. C'est elle. 
 It is I, It is you. It is she. 
 
 C'est le pire. C'est un Danois. CTest 
 
 Heun. 
 It is the father. TJiat is a Dane. A is 
 
 Henry. 
 Est-ce 14 votre plume? Sont-ce 14 vos 
 
 livres? 
 Is that your pen ? A re those your books f 
 Vivre ainsi, c'est mourir. 
 To live thus is to die. 
 
 (^'est i\ Louise cjjue je parle. 
 C'est pour Louise. 
 
 Ce sont eux. Ce sont elles. Est-ce eux 
 
 (elles)? 
 It is they. Those are they. It is they ? 
 C'est cela. Ce n est rien. Ce n'est per- 
 
 sonne. 
 Just so. It is nothing. It is no one. 
 
 NoTB 1.— The noun or pronoun, as above, may be preceded by a preposition. 
 
 C'est k vous que Je parle. 
 
 Pour qui est ce livre ? C'est pour vous. 
 
 Note 2.— The verb 6tre, as above, may be preceded by devoir or pouvoir : 
 
 Ce doit fetre lui. Ce doit 6tre Henri I Ce peut ^tre mon ami. 
 
 It must be he. This must be Henry. \ This may be my friend. 
 
 NoTK 3. — Ce is used with an adjective in reference to a claui«e that precedes as il is 
 used in reference to a clause that follows. 
 Vous avez tort, c'est Evident. 11 est Evident que vous avez tort. 
 
 While ce as a pronoun is invariable, it must be remembered that the verb of which 
 ct is the subject is variable For the rules of variation, see Verb, 203, b. 
 
 1 , 
 
2. Ce is used as the antecedent of qui, que, etc., to express the 
 relative "what. 
 
 a. Ce qui est beau est utile. I Ce que vous dites est vrai. 
 "WhaX is beauti/ul i8 useful.] What you say is true. 
 
 b. 
 
 e. 
 
 Ce queje crains (c*) est d'etre decouvert. 
 What l/ear is to be discovered. 
 
 Ca que j'airae 1e plus ce sont mes amis. 
 What / iftve most is my friends. 
 
 J'ai ce dont j'ai besoin. 
 / have what / iieed. 
 
 Ce que j'odmire (c') est son courage. 
 What / admire is his courage. 
 
 Ce qui m'attache k la vie r'est voiis. 
 What binds me to life is you. 
 
 The pleonastic ce after ce que, as in & and e, summing up the preceding sentence, 
 must be used if the predicate i» a Plural Noun or a Personal Pronoun (c), but must not 
 be used when the predicate is an Adjective (a). lu other cases (b) its presence adds 
 force to the sentence. 
 
 3. By means of ce and the verb 3tre any member of the sentence 
 may be made emphatic. 
 
 C'edt k vous que Je demande cela. 
 C'est moi qui vous demande cela. 
 G'est cela que je vous demande. 
 C'est une belle ville que Paris. 
 C'est mourir que* de vivre ainsi. 
 
 I ask that of yoti. 
 I ask that of you. 
 That is what I ask of you. 
 A flne town is Paris i 
 To live thus is to die t 
 
 *Que precedes the real subject of the sentence in such mversions. 
 
 ' . , , : THftML. 28. 
 
 Translate. Account for the form of the adjectives or pronouns. 
 
 1. Ce sont la des jjhotographies, n est-ce pas, C^harles ? 2. Si, monsieur, 
 ce sont deux photographies de mes p6re et mdre. Laquelle pr6f6rez-vou8, 
 celle-ci ou celie-la ? 3. Je ne saurais vous dire laquelle est la meilleure 
 des deux. EUes sont toutes deux tr^s belles. 4. Je trouve I'expression 
 meilleure dans celle-ci, mais dans celle-ld la rcssemblance est plus frap- 
 pante. 5. Est-ce que c'est ce matin que vous les avez re9ues 1 6. C'est 
 .hier soir que je les ai revues par la malle. Ce fut un grand plaisir de lies 
 recevoir. 7. Ce doit vous raj>peler tons vos souvenirs de famille. Vous 
 avez, je m'en doute, un pen le mal du pays. 8. Qu'est-ce que c'est que 
 le mal du pays, monsieur ? 9. C'est le regret qu'on a d'etre ^loign4 de 
 ison pays. 10. Et forc6 de passer les nuits et les jours A I'^tude ? 11. 
 Ne dites pas cela. La patience est am^re, mais le fruit en est doux. II 
 n'y a pas de plaisir plus beau que de se dire aprSs avoir travaillS fort : 
 J'ai fait mon devoir. 12. C'est un m^chant metier que celui du pares- 
 seux, j'en conviens. 12. VoiU parler, cela. Maintenant souvenez- 
 vous de ceci : Les jeunes gens disent ce qu'ils font , les vieillards, ce 
 qu'ils ont fait ; les sots, ce qu'ils se proposent de faire. l4. Le bavard 
 dit tout ce ^u'il pense, et I'honnete homme pense tout ce qu'il dit. 15. 
 Si je ne fais pas mon devoir, faites le votre. 16 Sont-ce vos amis qui 
 frappcnt k la porte. 17. C'est mon ami qui vient chercher ses livres et 
 ceux de sa soeur. 18. Qu'est-ce qu'il va faire avec ses livres ? 19. II a 
 
 Serdu son pdre. C'est avant-hier que celui-ci passa des bras du sommeii 
 ans ceux de la mort. Moa ami vase mettre dans les affaires. 20. U 
 va 86 aacrifier pour les siens. C'est un brave gargon que oelui-14. 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 
 1. Lend me your grammar, please, Mary, I have mislaid mine. 2. I 
 have not brought mine this morning ; but I will get my sister's. 
 
 her desk. 3. Thank you. Have you found this lesson difficult ? 
 
 It is in 
 4. Not so 
 
49 
 
 (lifTicult as yesterday's. 5. What we have once well clone renders 
 easier all that we have to do. There were, however, more idioms in 
 the latter than in the former. 6. I do not quite understand what you 
 say. Tell us, please, what "idiom" means. 7. It is a construction 
 peculiar to a language. If I say : Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? that is a 
 French idiom, because it is a way of speaking that the English language 
 does not use. 8. We have none in our language, however. 9. Certainly 
 we have. Every language has its own. It is one of the greatest diffi- 
 culties of foreigners to learn the idioms of our language. 10. One must 
 then pay attention to the two languages in order to learn their idioms. 
 
 11. Just so. It is in comparing the idioms of the two languages that 
 we shall make progress. Now, let us begin our lesson. Give me your 
 exercise, Charles, we shall see its idioms and perhaps its mistakes. 
 
 12. I have not been-able-to (pu) do mine to-day, sir. I have not a 
 book of my own, and my brother has lost his. 13. Lend me yours, 
 Henry. 14. I have not luine, either (non plm). An accident has 
 befallen me. 15. I see that you have your arm in-a-sling (en 4charpe). 
 What is the matter ? 16. I was skating yesterday evening, and I fell 
 on my hand, and have dislocated (tUmis) toy wrist. 17. That is a 
 great pity. Pleasures are sweet but their consequences often are fatal. 
 18. It is not my arm, however. 19. You speak like the honest 
 Dutchman, who, when he has broken his leg in falling, said to the spec- 
 tators that he was glad that it was (fiit) not his neck. 20. Content is 
 the health of the soul; discontent is its poison. 21. Seeing ^vu^ that 
 you have not prepared your exercises, I shall read you a little piece of 
 mine, which you will have the kindness to write in vour note-books, 
 and to translate for our next lesson. 
 
 - Composition 30. 
 
 1. The Wolf and the Lamb. — A lamb was peaceably drinking in a 
 brook. A wolf came to the same spot, and drank higher up. Wishing 
 to begin a quarrel with the lamb, he asked in^ a severe tone why the 
 latter was disturbing^ the water.' The innocent lamb, surprised at this 
 so ill-founded accusation, replied, with humble submission, that he did 
 not see how that could be. "Sir," said he to him, "you see that I 
 drink lower dovm, and that the water runs' from you to me, and that 
 consequently* it is not I who disturb the water." "Rogue," said the 
 wolf, "it is thou who hast spoken ill of me six months ago* in my 
 absence." " I was not born.'" "Then' it was (is) your brother." " I 
 have no brother, on my honor." At these words the wolf, seeing 
 that it was useless to^ reason longer against the truth : " Rascal," said 
 he, "if it was (is) neither thou nor thy brother it was your father, 
 and it is all one. Thereupon he seized the poor lamb and tore him 
 to pieces.* 
 
 2. What Will^ Is, — Harrison was a carpenter's apprentice*" when the 
 Parliament proposud the prize of £10,000 for the one who would invent 
 a chronometer for the problem of longitudes. Harrison said to himself, 
 "/ will gain that prize." He then threw-down the saw and plane, 
 came to London, turned watchmaker's apprentice, worked forty yearsj 
 and gained the prize. What do you say of that ? Can that be called 
 will? People have wished to invent easy methods, but they are pure 
 
 ;i| 
 
60 
 
 illusions There are no easy methods for learning difficult 
 
 things. The only way is to shut one's door, to* send word" that one | 
 is not at home, and to* work. J. de Maistre. 
 
 We. Hroubler. ^couler, *par consequent. HI y a six moin. *n6, fdone (after the 
 verb), ^en pUces. ^vouloir. ^'>gargon eharpentier. ^\faire dire 
 
 XII. Interrogative Adjective (Adjectif interrooatif). 
 
 121. Quel. The only Interrogative Adjective is quel, which, what, 
 
 It is used immediately with the noun. 
 
 Quel livre avez-vous ? I Quels livres avez-vous ? 
 
 Quelle plume avez-vous ? | Quelles plumes avez-vous ? 
 
 122. With the verb Stre it may be used in qualitative relation to a 
 noun that follows : 
 
 Quelle est votre plume ? 
 Which is your pen. 
 
 Quel est cet homme ? 
 
 ■ WJtat is that man ? 
 
 Quel 9U0 followed by ttre in the subjunctive is used adjectively. 
 
 Ces hommes quels qu'ils soient. I Quelles que soient vos vues. 
 
 Those inen whoever they be, \ Whatever your views may be, 
 
 I. 
 
 IV. THE PRONOUN (DU PRONOM). 
 The Interrogative Pronouns (Pronoms interrogatifs). 
 
 123. The Interrogative Pronouns are : I. qui P qu' est-ce qui P 
 que P quoi P II. lequel P 
 
 I. - ' ' ' ' -^ ■"^--■■-■■■■•^' 
 
 124. a. Be/erring to Persona : 
 
 Qtii? = Whof Whomf 
 Qui parte ? Who speaks f 
 
 A (avec, de, contre) qui parlez-vous ? 
 Tp (with, of, againstjwhom do you speak? 
 
 Aqtii? dequi? = Whose? 
 
 A qui est cette plume ? 
 
 Whose is that pen ? * , ^ 
 
 De qui Stes-vous flls ? 
 Whose son are you ? 
 
 Use & q\ii=whose, when the sense "be- 
 longing to " is present. 
 
 6. Referring to Things : 
 
 (1) Qu'est-ce qui? = What? Nomi- 
 
 native. 
 Ou'est-ce qui me fait mal. 
 nhat pains me ? 
 
 (2) Quoi ? *= What ? Used after prepo- 
 
 sitions, or disjunctively. 
 A qnoi pensez-vous. Dequoi parlez-vous? 
 Quoi de plus beau 1 What (could be) finer ? 
 
 (3) Que?* qu'est-ce que? == What; 
 
 Direct Object of the verb. 
 Que dit-il ? Qu't ^-ce qu'il dit ? 
 Que faire 1 Que dire ? 
 What to do? What to say? 
 
 *Que and quoi are used in exclamations. ' ,^' 
 
 Que (=combien) de belles vues ! How many fine sights ! 
 Quoi, d^jii ici ! }^ hat here already I 
 
 125. Lequel. In reference to persons or things lequel is used with 
 the force of which (one) ? what (one) ? 
 
 Lesquels de vos fr^res sont ici ? 
 
 Lequel* de vos f r^res est ici ? 
 Laquelle* de vos sceurs est ici ? 
 Desquels de vos frfires parlez-vous ? 
 Which of your brothers do you speak of? 
 
 Lesquelles de vos soeurs sont ici ? 
 Auxquelles de vos soeurs pensez-vous? 
 Which of your sisters do you think of? 
 
 *It will be noticed that lequel agrees with the noun understood after it. 
 
51 
 
 '^i 
 
 one (after the 
 
 hat ? Jlonii- 
 
 I used with 
 
 II. The Indefinite Pronouns (Pronoms iNoipiNis). 
 
 jl26. Tho Indefinite Adjectives auoun, nul, certain, plusieurs, 
 tel, tout are used also as Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 Aucun n'est prophite chez soi. No one is a prophet at home. 
 
 Nul n'est prophcte chez soi. No one is a prophet at home. 
 
 Certains disentcela. Some (certain) «a<y tAa^ 
 
 Plusieurs m'ont dit cela. Several told me that. 
 
 Tel qui rit vendredi, dimanohe pleurera. Who laxiyha on Friday, on Sunday will 
 
 iveep. 
 Tout cMe au oharme de sa voix. Everythingf yields to the charm oj hi$ 
 
 voice. 
 
 Tout as a noun preserves the t in the plural : Plusieurs touta distincts. 
 Everybody is in French tout le monde, tous (tout). 
 
 127. The following are used only as Pronouns : — chaoun, on, per- 
 
 sonne, rien, quiconque, quelqu'un, autrui, Tun 
 1' autre, qui que ce soit, etc. 
 
 128. Chacun : Chacun pense ^ soi. I Each one thinks of himself. 
 
 Ces plumes content 
 chacune. 
 
 un franc 
 
 Those pens cost one franc each. 
 
 Remark that chacun, referring to a preceding plural, generally requires son, sa, res 
 in sentences (a), where the phrase it introduces is not essential to the sentence. But in 
 sentences (&), where the phrase is indispensable to the sentence, it requires leur, leurs: 
 
 (a) lis apportirent des offrandes au t'imple 
 chacun selon ses moyens. 
 Le medecin a regu sea nialades chacun 
 a son tour. 
 
 (b) lis ont apportd chacun leur offrande. 
 lis ont regu chacun leur part. 
 
 There is nothing absolute, however, in this. Both constructions are admissible. 
 
 Somebody told me that. 
 
 Is there any one nt your house ? 
 
 There are books. Do you uoish a 
 
 few? 
 Some one of you, lad' s. 
 
 There are pens. Give me some. 
 
 129. Quelqu'un : Quelgu'un m'a dit cela. 
 
 Y a-t-il quelqu'un chez vous ? 
 Voil4 des livres. En voulez- 
 
 vous quelques-uns. 
 Quelqu'une de vous, mes- 
 ./ '/^ dames. 
 
 Voila des plumes. Donnez- 
 
 m'en quelques-unes. 
 
 Taken absolutely, as in the first two examples, quelqu'un is always sing, masc., 
 and is used for both genders. 
 Quelqu'un is not used in negrative sentences. 
 
 130. Autrul : Parler mal d'autrui. To speak ill of others. 
 Autrui is never used in the Nominative. 
 
 131. Ij'un I'autre 
 
 lis se louent I'un I'autre. 
 Aimez-vous les uns les 
 
 autres. 
 L'un et I'autre est (sont) 
 
 bon(s). 
 II se m^fle des autres. 
 Gardez les autres. 
 
 They praise each other. 
 Love one another. 
 
 "Qofh are good. "-'' 
 
 He mistrusts others. 
 Keep the others. 
 
 NoTR 1— The same construction holds good with nt I'un ni I'autre, neither. 
 
 lis ne sont venus ni I'un ni I'autre. 
 
 Ni l'un nl I'autre ne viendra (viendront). 
 
 They have neither of them com«. 
 Neither vrill come. 
 
 Note 2— Where the verb requires to be followed by a preposition, the preposition is 
 placed between the parts of the Reciprocal Pronoun. 
 
 lis parlent mat I'un de I'autre. 
 Elles se nuisent les unes aux autres. 
 
 They speak ill of each other. 
 They injure (to) one another. 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 ■ \ ... , 
 
132. Qui que oe soit : 
 
 62 
 
 SI V0U8 y trouves qui que 
 
 ce soit. 
 Je ii'y ai trouvi qui que ce 
 
 Boit. 
 Je n'y ai trouv6 quol que 
 
 ce soit. 
 
 133. Quol qui (que): Quol <=quelque ohose) qui 
 
 VOU8 afflige. . 
 Quol que voua disiez. 
 
 IJ you And there any end 
 
 at all. 
 I /mind nobody at 
 
 there. 
 I found nothing at al| 
 
 there. 
 
 Whatever afflicts you. 
 Whatever you say. 
 
 134. On: On dit qu'il est malade 
 
 One says that he is sick. 
 They say he is sick. 
 People say he is sick, 
 said heissiek. 
 
 (One 
 J The; 
 • iPeo] 
 litis 
 
 NoTB 1 —On may be written Ton after the vowel sound of et, oil, que, si, etc., when| 
 on itself la not followed by L 
 
 NoTB 2— When on has a clearly Feminine or Plural significance, the adjectives qualij 
 
 fylng it must be Feminine or Plural. 
 
 Ouand on est belle, on ne I'ignore pas. 
 
 Whenoneisbeautiful, one is not ignorant qf the fact. ~ : 
 
 En Amirlque on est dgaux. In America we are equal. 
 
 136. Personne : Personne n'est id. Nobody is here. 
 
 Qui est lii y Personne. Who is there f No one. 
 
 Personne, as a pronoun, is always masculine and singular. 
 
 NoTB— In questions ar,l statements of doubt personne maybe used (without ne)-. 
 
 anybody. 
 
 Y-a-t-il personne k la maiaon ? I Je doute que personne y aoit. 
 
 Is there anybody at home. \ I doubt there is anybody in. 
 
 186. Rien: Blen ne peut Taffliger. toothing can afflict him. 
 
 Cela ne fatt rlen. That matters nothing. 
 
 Qu'a-t-il ? Blen. What has he t Nothlngf. 
 
 Est-il rlen de plus absurde ? Is there ansrthlngr more absurdl 1 
 
 Blen has a Noun use : II dit des rlens (trifles). 
 
 137. Qulconque : Qulconque le fera, sera j 
 
 puni. 
 
 Note— When quiconque has a olearly Feminine significance, the adjective qualifying | 
 
 it is made Feminine^ 
 
 Ladies, whoever of you toiU be bold 
 enough. , _ 
 
 Cest «n rlen. 
 
 Whoever does it will be pun- 
 ished. 
 
 Mesdames, quiconque de vous sera ossez 
 hardie. 
 
 - TniMB 31. 
 
 1. Qu'a-t-on fait hier soir d la reunion de la society ^ litt^i'Aii^? 2* On 
 a beaUcoup parlS sans rien dire. 3. Quel dommage ! A qiioi bon toutcs 
 ces reunions si Ton ne s'amuse ni ne s'instruit ? 4. II y a dans notre 
 soci^t^ trop de diseurs de riens, qui aiment d, s'entendre parler, mais 
 
 ?ui ennuient tout le monde. 5. Nul n'est Discontent de son esprit. 6. 
 Ihacun Scoute les discours d'autrui d'une autre oreille que les siens. 7. 
 Mais pourquoi ne parlez-vous pas, vous ? 8. Pour me venger, vous voulez 
 dire ? 9. Cela me rappelle la rSponse qu'un homme a faite d quelques- 
 uns de ses amis, qui s Stonnaieut qu'il eut donn^ sa ifille en manage A son 
 ennemi : Cest pour me venger, dit-il. 10. Je pr6f6re passer le temps 
 dans la biblioth^que. Des romans, des tableaux, des pontes ; que de 
 ressources contre I'ennui ! 11. C/haeun & son gout. Quelqu'une de 
 vous, mesdemoiselles, aurajla bontS de lire les phrases du th^me. Les 
 autres les traduiront. 12. Ne soyez pas si fi^re de Votre beauts ; on a 
 
r, I 
 
 1 (without He)=\ 
 
 pcu do temps jWftre belle ot longteinps A ne I'otro plus. 13. J*ai peur 
 (If faire cela, qu'eii dira-t-ou? 14. .lo me iiuxiuo deu qu'eu dira-t-on. 
 1.'). Cette maison d'euole a sea dofauts ; mais, a tout prendre, elle est 
 commode. 16. A I'impossible nul ii'est teuu. 17. Par lequel de ce9 
 chemins irons-nous? Allons par ici. 18. Nul ne peut servir deux 
 muitres ; car ou il ha'ira I'un, et aimera I'autre ; ou il a'attachera 4 1'un et 
 muprisera I'autre. 19. Tout ou rien, c'est ce qu'il m'a dit. 20. Que 
 I fais-tu k r^cole, Marie, & quoi t'occupes-tu, ma petite ? J'attends qu'on 
 sorte. 21. Ne croyez personne sur des on dit. 22. Pardonne tout 4 
 I tons et rien k toi. 23. On rit de I'homme dans La Bruy^re ; on le m^< 
 prise dans Pascal ; dans la Rochefoucauld on le fuit ; dans Moli6re on le 
 juge. 24. Sur la porte d'un cimeti^re on a mis cette inscription : "Ici 
 on est ^gaux." 25. Le portier d'un sot peut toujours dire qu'iln'ya 
 personne au logis. 
 
 ExEPf"°w 32. 
 
 1. Let us resume our lesson. At what page did M'e stop, Louis? 
 2. At the beginning of chapter four, paige forty-five. 3. Which of tho 
 exercises ? 4. The thirty-second, 6. Begin, Miss A. Everyone will 
 translate in (dj his turn. 6. The egotist is loved by nobody, for he 
 loves nobody. 7. What does he think of ? What does he speak of ? 
 Whom does he trust (to) ? Whom does he praise ? 8. Everyone for 
 himself, says he ; and, sheltered under that maxim, he pities nobody, 
 troubles everybody ; gives nothing, wishes everything. 9. Whoever 
 has helped him, has found him ungrateful. Now he mistrusts others 
 because others mistrust him. 10. Without friends or companions, 
 he dies, hated by all, regretted by none. 11. I know another very 
 differenfc character. 12. He is loved by everybody, for in th^ 
 happiness of others he finds his own. 13. Each of his actions 
 is a lesson ; each word a prayer. 14. He has found that the 
 half is sometimes greater than the whole ; for he increases his 
 happiness in sharing; it with others. 15. What pains him^ what 
 afflicts him, is. nut his own sorrows, but those of his friends. 16. It 
 is only to half (d demi) live, to live only for one's self, says he ; and 
 strengthened by this maxim, he asks himself every day : for whoih can 
 I do this ? to whom can I give that ? does not friend A. need something ? 
 is there nothing [oi] consoling to say to friend B. ? 17. He is content 
 with what is necessary, envying [to] no one either (ni) his fortune 
 or (ni) his place. 18. What could be [of] happier than such a life ? 19. 
 Now, you have seen both characters. 20. Neither is entirely unknown 
 to you. 21, Which do you prefer, the former or the latter ? 22, 
 Everyone prefers the latter. Remember then these few lines : 
 
 La vie est un vovage, 
 ' - TSichons de rembellir ; ■ ' / 
 
 Jetons sur son passage ', 
 
 ' V Les roses du plaisir. 
 
 Composition 33. 
 
 My Castles, 
 
 I have often wondered* how I should reach^ ray castles. In what 
 part of Spain ikey are, what roiite one must take to reach them — to 
 tell the truth', I am not quite certain. I have inquired^ very particu- 
 
 I 
 
 *ii\ 
 
 1: 
 
 IH .'.- 
 
 •■■I; 
 
64 
 
 larly, but nohojly seems to know precisely. One morning I met yoniiji 
 Aspen [who WJisJ trembling with excituiiunt. •* What in tlio niattei- ".' 
 asked I with interest, fori knew that lie hehl a-great-deal of Spanish 
 stock. 
 
 *' Oh 1" said he, ** I'm going out to take possession. I have found 
 the way to my castles in Spain." 
 
 " Wnat !" I answered, and, heedless of Prue, I pulled at my glovo 
 until it ripped* — "what is it V" 
 
 •' The direct route is through California," answered he. 
 
 " But then you [will] have the sea to cross," said I remembering the 
 map. 
 
 "Not at all," answered Aspen, "the road runs' along the shore of 
 Sacramento Ifiver." 
 
 He darted away^, and I did not meet him again. I was very curious 
 to know if he arrived safely in Spain, and was expecting every day to 
 hear (receive) news from him of my property there, when, one evening, 
 I bought a newspaper, full of California news, and the first thing upon 
 which my eye fell was this : " Died, iu 8an Francisco, Edward Aspen, 
 Esq., aged 35." 
 
 G. W. Curtis. 
 
 I Str« etirieux de aavoir. •Use jwuvoir arriver a. 'pour vrai dire. *8'enquirir, 199, 3. 
 ^se dichirer. Use the imp. subj. ^^sser. ^s'tloigiier a la hdte. 
 
 III. Thk Relative Pronouns (Pronoms conjonctifs ou r^latifs). 
 
 138. The Relative Pronouns iu French are qui, que ; ce qui, ce 
 que ; lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles ; dont ; quoi. 
 
 139, Qui, que. — Qui and qtie are invariable as to person, gender, 
 number, but assume the person, gender, number of the noun to which 
 they refer : 
 
 Mol qui parle. 
 Toi qui paries. 
 
 Sf} qui parle. 
 
 / who speak, etc. 
 
 Nona qui parlous. 
 Vous qui parlez. 
 
 We who speak, etc. 
 
 La femmo que j*al vue. 
 Lea feminea que j'ai vues. 
 
 Les livres que j'ai ^rus, etc 
 
 The woman whom I have seen, etc. 
 
 140. The Relative as Subject or Object of Verbs. 
 
 a. Qui is used as Subject. 
 
 I/homme "^ 
 
 La feninie j-qui est ioi. 
 
 Le livre J 
 
 lies hommes \ 
 
 Les feinmes >qui SOnt ici. 
 
 Les livres J 
 
 b. Que is used as Direct Object. 
 
 L'homine ^ 
 
 La feiiime 
 
 Le livre L«,,^ *„ «.«:- 
 
 Les hommes ( <l^® J« ^^^ 
 
 Les fcinmes I 
 
 Les livres J ,-; 
 
 141. The Relative after Prepositions, 
 
 a. Qui is used after prepositions in 
 reference to Persons, Personi- 
 fications. Lequel, laqtielle, 
 lesquels, lesquelles may in such 
 cases also be used. 
 
 6. Lequel, laquelle ; les- 
 quels, lesquelles alone 
 may be used after preposi- 
 tions in reference to ani- 
 mals and things.* 
 
M 
 
 r/liommo de qui (duquel) vons parlcz. 
 1,:^ fi'iniiio de qui (de laquelle) vouh 
 
 jiarlcz. 
 !,('» homnies de qui (desquels) vouh 
 
 parluz. 
 Um fummea & qui (auxquelles) vouu 
 
 parlez. 
 i;iiomme aprds (avant, avec, etc.) 
 
 qui (lequel) voua parlez. 
 
 Lf! nlilrti duquol vniis pnrloz. 
 La])tiitiii) de laquelle vouh pnrit)/.. '' 
 
 Lea livi-es desqtiels voua parlez. 
 
 Le livro dans lequel se trouve le pas- 
 
 \ji plume aveo laquelle voua t'orivcz. 
 
 "NOTB.— When the antecedent ia an indeflnito word, such oa ce, ricn, or a whole 
 pliraae, the relative after a prepoaition ia quol (doiU for de qtioi). See 144, 
 
 Cf II quol Je penae. 
 
 That 0/ which I am thinking. 
 
 Voua avez blAnie mon frore, en quoi voua 
 
 voua 6te8 tronipe. 
 Vou blamed my brother, in which you were 
 
 mistaken. 
 
 142. Lequel. — Lcqurl, InqurUe, etc., arc sometimes used i\s subject 
 or object of a verb instead of qui, que, in order to avoid ambiguity. 
 
 J'ai rencontre la femme do votre otu-le, laquelle ni'a rendu un grand aervice. 
 / met your uncle's ivi/e, who rendered me a yreut geroice. 
 
 Qui in place of 'laquelle' would refer to 'onole,' but laquelle by its feminine form 
 dearly refers to * feuinie.' - 
 
 143, Dont. — Dont is more frequently used than de. qui, duquel, de 
 laquelle, desquefs, etc., in reference to persons or things, and means 
 wh-OSe, of "whom, of "which. It is never interrogative. , ^ . 
 
 L'homme dont(de qui, duquel^ je parle. 
 
 L'homme dont la table est ici. 
 The man whose table ia here. 
 
 Les livres dont (desquela) Je parle. 
 
 L'homme dont voua avez ^pouae la 
 
 soBur. 
 The man whose dister you married. 
 
 NoTB— Aa dont cannot have before it a preposition, aentencea such aa the followin^r 
 inui'tbe rendered by duquel, etc. 
 
 The man whose sister you speak of. | L'homme de la aoDur duquel voua parlez. 
 
 144. Ce qui, ce que, etc.— C<' qui, ceqne, ce dmt, c(i(i(en, mr, 
 etc.) quoi are used absolutely and are equivalent to the English relatives 
 what (that which). 
 
 J'ai tout ce dont j'ai beaoin. 
 / have whatever J need, 
 
 Ce a quoi je pense. 
 What I am thinking of. 
 
 Ce qui (nam.) est utile est bon. 
 What is useful is good. 
 
 Ce que (obj.) je dis eat vrai. 
 What I say is true. 
 
 Note 1— Remark the use of que, with ffre, decenir, etc. in such expresaiona aa : 
 Savez-voua ce que voua etes V | Do you know what you are i 
 
 NoTB 2— Where the antecedent is a whole sentence ce qui, ce que, etc. muat be used 
 (Ct. 141, note.) 
 
 Voua avez gagn6 votre proces, ce qui m'a 
 beaucoup plu. 
 
 Tou gained your law-suit, which pleased 
 me much. 
 
 NoTK 3 — Ce maybe preceded by tout without affectin;; the construction. 
 Toutce qui est bon est utile | Tout ce que je dia eat vrai. 
 
 All that is good is useful. 
 
 
 li=: 
 
 All that I say is true. 
 
M 
 
 145. Celui qui, (que), «'tc. The eorrt'lative pruuouiiH referring to 
 |ierHO|iH or tliiiigu an: * 
 
 I'uvn. ceux qui (que), they vh, 
 ( whom), thoHC that, 
 cellea qui (que), they vM 
 (whom), those that. 
 
 Ma plutno ? C'vut celle c|ue vnua nvcz. 
 
 My pen t That ia it which you have. 
 
 Maho. 8inm. celul qui (que), he who 
 (whom), the one that, 
 
 Fkm. celle qui (que), nhe who, 
 
 the one that, 
 
 Celui r|ul a fait celn est nion ami. 
 
 ite who has done that is my friend. 
 
 146, (Jul, que, quol.— C^ui, que and quo! are sometimea ufnidl 
 absolutely ; qui and que with verbs, quoi aa the object of a prepo 
 sition. 
 
 S^ui s'excuse, s'accnse. 
 le - 
 
 ! who exenseH himael, aceusea himself, 
 Je lie sais que faire. 
 1 know not what to do, 
 Je lie saia qui chercher. 
 I hiow not whom to look for. 
 
 J* al de quoi vivre, de quoi ^ortre. 
 
 I have enouf/h to live on, to write ivith, 
 Voilii de quoi J'ai beaoiu. 
 
 That ia what I need. 
 
 II n'y a pa^ de quoi. 
 There ia no occaaian. 
 
 147. Ou.— OjHsused relatively, wherever possible, instead of fc(/«W| 
 
 etc. , with reference to locality or time. 
 
 La maison oi\ Je demeure. 
 
 The house in which I dtvell. ' • 
 
 1/ instant o\\ nous naissona est un pas vera la inort. • 
 
 The 7noment in which we are born ia a step towards death. 
 
 Rkpetitton of tub Relative Pronoun, 
 
 TV>e Relative Pronoun, so frequently omitted in English, must always | 
 be expressed in French. >« 
 
 Here is the man a I saw. | Yoici rhonune que J'ai vu. 
 
 Theme 34. Vv , 
 
 Translate. Comment on the Relative pronouns. 
 
 1. Voici dea phrases que voua traduirez et des questions auxquelles 
 vous r^pondrez. 2. Que la terre est petite & celui qui la voit des cieux ! 
 3. Donne 4 celui qui te demande. 4. Aimez vos ennemis ; b^nissez 
 ceux qui vous maudissent ; faites du bieu k ceux qui vous haissent. 
 5. Qui sert bien son pays n'a pas besoin d'aieux. 6. Kendez 4 C^sar ce 
 qui appartient k Cesar. 7. lie jour oil Turenne remporta son premier 
 prix au college, 11 se sentit plus joyeux que le jour oh il gagna sa 
 premiere bataille. 8. II n'y a pas de quoi rire ; il y a de quoi pleurer. 
 9. J'aime ceux qui rougissent plus que ceux qui pSlissent. 10. Que 
 faire d'une joum^e de pluie ? 11. S'il laut a^^ir, je ne saia que faire; 
 s'il faut parler, je ne sais que dire. 12. II est heureux qui croit I'^tre. 
 13. Oelui-U est heureux qui a un coeur pur. 14. Qui aime le danger y 
 p^rira. 15. Quelqu'un demandait A un philosophe }.'dge da monde ; il 
 tra^a sur le sable uu serpent qui se mordait la queue. 16. G'est une 
 condition A laquelle je ne puis renoncer, sans laquelle je ne consentirai k 
 rien. 17. Dana le fond de la boite de Pandore, d'oii sortirent toua les 
 mai^x, il ne resta plus que I'esp^rance. 18. Qui ne dit mot, consent. 
 19. C^'^tait A qui parierait. 20. L'homme dont je vous ai parl^ est celui 
 que vous voyez 1^. 21. O rochera escarpds, k qui je me plains. 22. Ilg 
 ^taient disperses qui 9a, qui la. 23. II y a une edition de ce livre la. 
 quelle ae vend fort boa march^. 24. II n'y a paa de quoi me remercier. 
 
a? 
 
 '2r>. lift viu (le ctiilaiiiH lioiiiineH ust line comi^diu dont on n'applatulit quo 
 la scune aui la tcriniuo. 20. Le llugent par onlre duciuel Voltaire <^tait ala 
 jiastille tut si content (I'uu dos dramcs du co dernier qu'il lui rendit la 
 liberty. 27. Voltaire remercia lo prince, qui lui dit: "Soyoz Hage et 
 i'aurai soin de vous." 28. *'Je suis infininient oblige, ri^poudit 
 I'auteur, "niais jo supplio Votre Altesso de uo plus so charger ui de 
 mon logemeut ni do ma uourriture." 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 1. Have you ever thought of what a school is ? 2. It is comfortable 
 (/aire bien) here, in the sehool-house in which we are (Hnd ourselves). 
 .'{. There are seats upon which wo can sit down. 4. There are desks ui)on 
 which we can write. 5. On the walls there are black-boards, which aid 
 us in our work. 6. In the corner, maps which teach you gcosraphy. 
 7. Then there is the library in which are contained the books that 
 interest you and instruct you. 8. Outside, there is a play-ground in 
 which you have your games. 9. Near the school is the gymnasium 
 where you take exorcise. 10. You have teachers who scold you, per- 
 haps, but who love you, and who encourage you in all that is good. 
 II. And why all that for you who have done nothing? 12. It is not 
 you who have built this school. 13. It is not you who have furnished 
 all that we desire. 14. Who has done all that, built the school, per> 
 mitted you to come here, provided you the masters who teach you, given 
 you all you need ? 15. It is your town, your ^ ounty, your country that 
 has done all this for you. 16. It is your country that protects and aids 
 you, that wishes to make of you good boys and good girls. 17. For 
 what she has done for you, do you not owe her gratitude and love ? 
 18. It is by labor that you will show best the gratitude that you must 
 feel for (of ) all that she nas done. 19. Those who strive to instruct them- 
 selves are the ores that will do honor to the country that has done so 
 much for them. _- 
 
 Composition 36. 
 
 A sailor had gone-ashore* on the southern coast of America with (in) 
 the intention of carrying to a town at some distance from the coast a 
 bundle of red woollen caps which he wished to sell. He had to^ pass 
 through a forest in which were seen a-great-many monkeys [that were] 
 climbing on the trees. Worn out by' the heat of the mid-day sun he 
 rested under a tree whose great branches completely sheltered him from 
 its burning rays, opened the bundle he was carrying, took from it a 
 woollen cap, which he put on his head, and fell-asleep*. When he 
 awoke he found that all the caps his bundle had contained had disap- 
 peared. " Bless me !"^ he cried, astonished at what' had happened. 
 But raising his eyes he saw that the trees around were alive with^ 
 troops of monkeys, each of whom was wearing a red woollen cap ! 
 What was to be done ? He shouted, he tried to' frighten the monkeys, 
 who laughed at' all his efforts. At last finding his efforts vain to get- 
 back® his caps, the sailor took off the one he had put on his head and 
 threw it on the ground® with disgust, exclaiming, "There, you'" little 
 thieves, if you wish to keep them all, take this one too." Scarcely had 
 he said that, when** the monkeys, who were watching him, did exactly 
 what he had done. Each one of them snatched the cap off his head and 
 
 I 
 
58 
 
 l! 
 
 threw it to the ground. You can imagine the joy of the sailor at 
 regaining all the caps, which he carried-ofiF in triumph. 
 
 ^dibarquer. *il luifcUlut. *abattu par. *s'endormir. ^inon Dieu. •antm^ de. fde. 
 ^pour ravoir. 'd terre. '0151, Note 3. »>' When ' sitter a peine, un jour, etc. is que. 
 
 VI, The Personal Pronouns (Pronoms personnels), 
 
 148, The Personal Pronouns have two forms, the Conjunctive and 
 the Disjunctive. 
 
 TJie Conjunctive Forms are : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1st Pbrson. 
 NoM. je, /. 
 
 DAT. me, 
 AccuB. me, 
 
 tome, 
 me. 
 
 2nd Person. 
 
 tu, thou. 
 te, to thee. 
 te, thee. 
 
 3rd person. 
 
 11, he, it ; elle, she, it. 
 
 lul=to him,to her; y, to it (inanimate object), 
 le, him, it ; la, her. 
 
 Reflective se, himself, herself, itself, one's 
 self. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 NoM. nous, we. 
 DAT. nous, to us. 
 AccuB. nous, us. 
 
 vous, you, 
 vous, you. 
 vous, to you. 
 
 lis (m.), elles (f.)> they. 
 
 leur, to them ; y, to them (of thinf^). 
 
 les, them. 
 
 Reflective: se, themselves. 
 
 E!n, ofU, of them, some, any, is best used witli reference only to tliinprs and animals. 
 
 These conjunctive forms are emplojred when the pronoun is closely 
 connected (conjoined) with the verb either as subject or as object (with- 
 out preposition). • . 
 
 149. The Disjunctive Forms are : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 2nd Person. 3rd Person. 
 
 toi, thou, thee. 
 
 lui, he, him, it ; elle, she, her, it. 
 Reflective: soi 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 VOUS, !/ou> euz (m.), elles (f.) they, them. 
 
 IST Person. 
 
 rmoi, i, im. 
 
 For ALiiJ 
 Cases. 1 
 
 ^nous, io0i us. 
 
 The Disjunctive forms are employed when the noun is not closely 
 joined with (is disjoined from) the verb, or is governed by a preposition. 
 
 V^, Cmjunctive : 151. Di^unctive: 
 
 Subject or Object of a verb ex- 
 pressed. 
 
 Je I'ai fait. 
 t have done it. 
 
 Tu m'as frappd. 
 Thou has strtick me. 
 
 II I'a fait. 
 
 He has done it. 
 
 Tu I'as f rappee. 
 Thou hast strttck her. 
 
 Je vous parte. 
 / speak to you. 
 
 1 speak to her. 
 
 (a) Verb understood. 
 
 Qui a fait cela ? 
 Who did that f 
 
 Qui avez-vous frapp6 ? 
 Whom did you strike f 
 
 Moi. 
 /. 
 
 Toi. 
 Thee. 
 
 tiUI. 
 
 Ae. 
 
 Elle. 
 Uer. 
 
 (&) As a Predicate. 
 
 Cost moi ; c'est elle ; c'est nous, etc 
 It is I ; it is she ; it is toe, etc. 
 
 (c) After a Preposition. 
 
 Je parle a vous et a elle. 
 i speak to you and to hir. 
 
m 
 
 and animals. 
 
 Ije vaiSL Elle va. lis vont. 
 
 1/ go. She goes. They go. 
 
 Ivoici le livre ; j'en parte. 
 IJSere is the book ; J speak of it. 
 |j'ai un livre, vous en avez deux ; nous en 
 parlerons. 
 
 \ I have a book, you have two; we shall 
 speak qf them. 
 
 I Y *faite8-vouB attention ? 
 
 I Are you paying attention to it? 
 
 lYpensez-vous? 
 
 \Are you thinking of (to) it f 
 
 lAllez-vous.i Paris? J'y vais. 
 
 \ Are you going to Paris? I am going there. 
 
 Je vais avec lui, sans elle, sans eux. 
 I go with him, without her^ without them. 
 Je parle de lui, d'elle. 
 / speak of him, of her. 
 
 Je parle d'eux. 
 
 1 speak of them (pt ■peraona). 
 
 id) In a Compound Subject. 
 
 Elle et nioi (nous) irons. 
 She and I snail go. 
 
 (e) To express Emphasis, f 
 
 Lui a chante, eux ont jou4. 
 He sang, they played. 
 
 Moi, je vous dis qu'il a tort. 
 / tell you he is wrong. 
 
 *NoTB 1 — Y may refer to persons with se fler, trust : Voyez-vous cet homme, je 
 |ne m'y fie pas. 
 
 tNoTB 2.— The emphasis may be strengthened by the addition of mime, which takes 
 Isin the plural. 
 
 JLui-m^memaditcela. I lis m'ont dit cela eux-mSmes. 
 
 \He himself told me that. | They told me that themselves. 
 
 NoTB 3.— The Personal pronoun in French is not used as in English tc' emphasize a 
 I nominative of address. 
 
 |Uve-toi, paresseux 1 
 
 152. TJie Refleclive Pronoun i 
 (a) Conjunctive, — 
 
 Rise, you Lazy-bones I 
 
 nous nous louons, 
 vous vous louez, 
 il (elles) se louent. 
 
 I Je me loue, / praise myself, etc. 
 
 Ituteloues, 
 
 |il(elle)seloue, 
 
 On seloue ; chacun se loue ; toutle monde se loue, ete. 
 
 |Lechiensemord. The dog bites himself. \ Le temps s'ecoule. Time poMes away. 
 
 (b) Disjunctive,— 
 
 Ije parle de moi (-meme), 
 I tu paries de toi (-meme), 
 il parle de lui (-meme^ 
 elle parle d'elle <-memeX 
 
 nous parlous de nous (-m^mes), 
 vous parlez de vous (-memes), 
 ils parlent d'eux (-memes), 
 elles parlent d'ellco (-memes) 
 
 n 
 
 153. Sol.— It will be noticed that sol is not used disjunctively in the 3rd person in 
 I the sentences above. Sol is not used with reference to persons except : 
 
 1. When the subject of the sentence is an indefinite or general term, such as au- 
 Icun, chacun, nul. on, personne, quelqu'un, quiconque, tout le 
 monde, tout homme, celui qui, etc. 
 
 Chacun travaille pour soi. 
 Each works for himself. 
 
 II faut prendre garde k soi 
 One mtist take care ofmie's se{f. 
 
 2. When lui would be ambiguous. 
 
 Un fils qui travaille pour son p^re travaille pour soi. 
 A son who works for his father works for himself. 
 
 3. When lui, elle, etc. would be feeble. 
 
 L'^goiste ne pense qu'a soi. 
 
 The egotist thinks otUy (if himself. 
 
60 
 
 Sol is employed disjunctively with reference to Thini^s in the sinfirular. 
 
 La vertu est aimable de soi. 
 Virtue is amiable in itself. 
 
 Cela est bon en soi, 
 That is good in itself. 
 
 , , USK OF TU, VOUS, NOUS. • 
 
 ' 154. Til is applied to a child, to a very intimate friend, to a member 
 of our family, to God. It may have also a contemptuous force. 
 
 In place of tu, VOUS is employed in addressing one person for respect, 
 politeness. 
 
 Nous is likeMrise sometimes used for je, moi. (Cf. the editor's we. ) 
 When nous and vous are used with the force of a singular, the adjec- 
 tives that qualify them must be singular. 
 
 LE, LA, LES, EN IN SUBSTITUTIONS. 
 
 155. Ij©» la» les, en. — By means of the pronouns le, la, les, 
 en, y, which may sometimes be substituted for preceding words, many 
 abbreviations can be effected in French., a. As a representative predi- 
 cate with reference to a determinate noun, le, la, les (variable) must 
 be employed, b. In place of an adjective, a clause, or an indeterminate 
 noun, le (invariable) must be used. c. In place of a partitive noun, en 
 is employed. 
 
 a. fetes-vous la maitresse loi ? Jelasuis. ■ ' . 
 Etea-vou9le8ma.\ade8 {the patients) f Nous les sommes. ^,, ./ '"-fi 
 
 b. £tes-vous maitresse ioi ? Je le suis. 
 Etes-vous malades ? Nous le sommes. 
 
 Priv^comme vousl'^tesdessecours.. Depriveda8y(mare[deptived]oftheaid.. 
 
 e. Avez-vous des livres? Nous en avons de tr^s beaux. 
 Compare : 
 
 Est-ce Ik votre plume ? 
 Is that your jten ? 
 Sont-ce \k vos plumes? 
 Are those your pens ? 
 
 Oui, ce Test. (Or better : C'est ma plvime.) 
 
 Yes, it is. 
 
 Oui, ce les sont. (Or better : ce sont mes plumes.) 
 
 Yes, they are. 
 
 Referrin;; to Persons with a verb in the 3rd pers., lui, elle, eux, elles are to bu 
 
 preferred to le, la, les. 
 
 Est-ce 1^ votre frere ? C'est lul. Est-ce \k votre mere ? C'est elle. 
 Is that your brother ? It is. Is that your mof},^.i ? It is 
 
 This is the case likewise when a complement foil jws. 
 
 Est-ce li votre plume ? 
 Is that your peni 
 
 Oui, c'est elle que vous avez h. la main. 
 Yes, that is it which you have in your hand. 
 
 Such abbreviations as : Have you done that ? I have are not permissible in French. 
 Aves- vous fait cela ? Otii. (Or the full sentence : Oui, J e I'ai fait). 
 
 Order of Words as to Personal Pronouns. 
 
 156, General Knle. — Personal Pronouns, used as Direct or In- 
 direct Objects of the verb, are placed before the verb governing them in 
 the order: (1) First or Second Person; (2) Third Person (Direct pre- 
 ceding the Indirect) ; (.3) y ; (4) en. 
 
61 
 
 es are to bu 
 
 The application of this rule will be better seen in the following table,— where the 
 relative place of the ne'gative is likewise shown : 
 
 Nko. 
 
 0B.I. IST 
 0R2Nt p. 
 
 Obj, of 3rd. p. 
 
 Y, En. 
 
 AUX. VKRB. 
 
 Nfo. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 
 Direct. 
 
 Indir. 
 
 Verb. 
 
 
 ne 
 
 me 
 te 
 
 nous 
 vous 
 Also: se 
 
 le 
 la 
 les 
 
 lui 
 leur 
 
 Y, en 
 
 ■•;'■ 
 
 pas 
 point 
 Jamais 
 lien 
 
 *■ - V 
 
 AnsERTivR : Affirmative,— 
 
 Mon p^re m'en a parl^. 
 
 My father has spoken to me of it. 
 
 Nous leur y en avons envoye. 
 We have sent so^ne to them there. 
 
 Interrogative : Affirmative,— 
 
 Mon pere ni'en a-t-il parl6 ? 
 
 Leur y en avons-nous envoys ? 
 Have we sent any of them-there ? 
 
 Imperative: Negative, — 
 Ne in'en parlez pas. 
 Do not speak to me of it. 
 
 Ne leur y en envoyons jamais. 
 
 Let us never send any to them there. 
 
 Negative, - 
 
 Mon p^re ne m'en a pas parl6. 
 
 My father has not spoken to me of it. 
 
 Nous ne leur y en avons pas envoye. 
 We have sent none to them there. 
 
 Negative, — 
 Mon pere ne ni'en *-t-il pas parlc ? 
 
 Ne leur y en avons-nous Jamais envoye ? - 
 Have we never sent any of them there ? 
 
 Affirmative, 3rd person,— 
 
 2u'il nous en parle, 
 ethi 
 
 in speak to tis of it. . 
 
 u'ils les lui donnent. 
 
 et them give them to her (him). 
 
 167. Exceptions: - : 
 
 1. When the Personal Pronouns are the objects of an Imperative Afflnnative verb', in 
 the 2nd person or 1st person plural, they follow the verb in the order (1) Direct, 
 (•2) Indirect, (3) y, en ; and me and te become moi, toi, except before en and y. 
 
 Donnez-moi le livre. 
 (rive me the book. 
 
 Donnez-les-moi. 
 Give me them. 
 
 Donnez-m'en. 
 Oive me some. 
 
 Donnons-les-leur. 
 
 Let us give them to them. 
 
 Donnez-le-moi. 
 Give it to me. 
 
 Parlons-leur-en. 
 
 Let us speuk to them of it. 
 
 Note— This rule, however, is too absolute and must Me modified. 
 
 «. The following construction is admissible : Polissez-le sans ceise et le repolissez. 
 
 b. M'y is not used after the verb. Ty is used only in a few expressions. (Jette-t'y, 
 mette-t'y, etc.). Instead of saying, for example : Attends-t'y, say : Attenda-toi A cela. 
 
 c. Nous and vou^ are, according to usage, placed before le. 
 
 Si le diner est pret, servez-nous-le, 
 If dinner is ready, serve it to us. 
 
 Tenez-vous-le pour dit que . 
 Be assured that 
 
 2. When there are two direct or two indirect objects, both follow the verb : 
 
 11 voit vous et votre fr^re. Mon p^re parle k vous et A elle. 
 
 He sees you and your brother. My father speaks to you and to her. 
 
 3. When se or a pronoun of the Ist or 2nd person is the direct object, the indirect 
 object referring to a person follows the verb : 
 
 11 s'adresse k eux. II me presente k vous. II vous recommande h nous. 
 
 He applies to them. He introduce;! me to you. He recommends you to it«. 
 
 4. When modified by ne QUe, only, but, the pronouns follow : 
 
 II lie parle qu' h moi. II n'a que moi non plus. 
 
 He speaJcs only to me. He has none but me, either. 
 
 r>. When the pronoun is emphatic : 
 
 .le le donne a vous, k vous, mon cher ami. 
 J give it to yim, to you, dear friend. 
 
 
0. After certain verba and verbal phrases, the pronouns referring to persons follow 
 
 rsii't 
 
 But in a Figurative Sense : 
 
 Get habit ne lui va pas. 
 That coat does not Jit him. 
 
 Cela lui a attire bien des reproches. 
 That has brought on him many reproachen. 
 
 Je me le rappelle. 
 
 I remember it. 
 
 La raison lui viendra avec I'Asre. 
 
 L'opinion commence a lui revenir. 
 
 a. Verba: 
 
 Aller, go.—Je vain a lui. 
 
 Accourir, hasten.— Nous sommes acconrus 
 a eux. 
 
 Attirer, attract. — L'aimant {loadstone) at- 
 tire le fer a soi. 
 
 Covirir, run. —Nou^ courons u vous. 
 
 Boire, drink. — 11 boit a nous. 
 
 fetre, belong. — Cette plume est d moi. 
 
 Penser (songer), think. — 11 pense toujours 
 a vous. 
 
 Appeler (rappeler), call, recall. — Dieu Va 
 appeU a lui. 
 
 Venir, come.— 11 vint a tnoi. 
 
 Revenir, return. — 11 revint a nous. 
 
 b. Verbal Phrases : 
 
 Faire attention, pay attention.— Faites attention a nous. 
 Prendre interet, take an interest.— 11 prend interet a moi. 
 
 " garde, take heed.— On, preml garde ii soi. 
 Avoir rapport, ^gard, recours, etc. 
 
 158. With aller, venir, vouloir, falloir, pouooir, envoyer, followed by an infinitive 
 governing a peraonal pronoun, there is often an optional position for the pronoun before 
 the principal verb. 
 
 Nous irons les voir ; nou3 les irons voir. II vient me voir ; il me vient voir. 
 
 169. With /aire, laisser and a following infinitive, the object must be treated as the 
 object of the finite verb, 
 
 Je le hii fais faire. / make (to) him do it. Faites-le-nioi savoir. Send me imrd. 
 Je les ai laissti punir, / have allowed them to be punished. 
 
 (But, with the reflective verb : EUe semble les laisser se mouvoir, etc.) 
 Repetition OF THE Personal Pronouns. 
 
 160. Pronouns as Subjects.— Successive verbs without con- 
 junctions, referring to the same subject, may have the subject repeated 
 or not before each verb. The repetition adds energy ; the omission 
 gives vivacity. This the case likewise with verbs connected by et, on, 
 maisy ni. Other conjunctions require the repetition of the subject. 
 
 J'estime, (je) respecte, (j')honore ces 
 hommes. 
 
 Je les estime parce que je les connais. 
 Je ne romps pas oar je suis fer. 
 
 Je pile mais ( je) ne romps pas. 
 
 NoTK.— In passing from a negrative to an affirmative the pronoun must be 
 repeated : Je ne romps pas mais je plie. ' ■ 
 
 161. Pronouns as Objects.— The Personal Pronoun object must 
 be repeated with every verb that governs it. The repetition is not 
 made when only the perfect participle is employed. 
 
 Nous les avons lou^s, (nous) les avons I Nous les avons lou^s, respect^s, ainies. 
 respectes, etc. | 
 
 NoTB.— Remark the pleonastic use of le in inversions such as : 
 
 Ce que vous m'avez dit, je ne le crois pas. 
 What you told me, I do not believe. 
 
 r, Th^mk 37. 
 
 1. £!tes-vouij Canadiennes, mesdemoiselles ? 2. Nous le sommes, 
 monsieur. 3. Mais vous n'aimez pas le Canada ? 4. Si fait, et nous en 
 
«ft 
 
 ris follow : 
 
 hes. 
 rep^roacheft. 
 
 ir. 
 
 [1 infinitive 
 louii before 
 
 r. 
 
 ated as the 
 
 »ie word. 
 
 lOut con- 
 repeated 
 omission 
 
 >y et, on, 
 
 ject. 
 
 3onnais. 
 
 Ill must be 
 
 ect must 
 )n is not 
 
 1, ainies. 
 
 sommes, 
 t nous en 
 
 sommes bien fibres. Ses grands fleuves, ses beaux lacs, ses magnifiqnes 
 paysages, nons les admirons et nous les aimous. 5. Et ses jeunes hom- 
 ines ? Vous ne pensez pas ^ eux. 6. Cela s' entend. 7. Vous 6tes de 
 vraies patriotes, j'en suis sur, et j'aime k vous entendre parler ainsi. 8. 
 Faut-ilaimer la patrie plus que soi ? 9. ^coutez ce que disait F^n^lon : 
 J'aime ma f amille plus que moi-meme, mon pays plus que ma f amille, et 
 I'humanit^ plus que mon pays. 10. Celui-laest bienmalheureuxquine 
 pense qu'& soi. 11. Vous avez pr^ar^ les phrases que je vousaidit 
 d'apprendre ; r^citez-les-moi. 12. Gelui qui ne vit que pour soi est d^j& 
 mort. 13. Les avares sont bien malheureux ; ils ne voient dans le 
 monde ^u'eux et que leurs tr^sors. 14. L'^go'iste Test aussi ; parlez-lui 
 des antipodes et il vous r^pondra en parlant de soi. 15. La vanity estune 
 idols d, laquelle nous sacriiions tout et nous-mSme&. 16. Ghacun se dit 
 ami ; mais fou qui s'y repose. 17. II est plus sAs6 d'etre sage pour les 
 autres que de I'Stre pour soi-m^me. 18. II f aut prendre yarded soi. 
 19. Cette femme est belle et le sera longtemps. 20. Messieurs, Stes> 
 vous les invites? 21. Nous les sommes. 22. La po^sie porte son 
 excuse avec soi. 23. Gueillez cet o^illet et attachez-vous-le & votre 
 boutonni&re. 24. Quand vous aurez des nouvelles, faites*les-moi 
 savoir. 25. 
 
 H3.tez-vous lentement, et, sans perdro courage, 
 
 Vingt fois sur le metier remettez votre ouvrage j 
 
 Polissez-le sans cesse et le repolissez ; 
 
 Ajoutez quelquefois et souvent efifacez. 
 
 ExEsoiSE 38. 
 
 1. Two intimate friends were speaking one day of a misfortune that 
 
 had happened them because (d cause) of their negligence. 2. How 
 
 foolish we were, to-be-sure (dmic, placed before the pred. adj.) ! said 
 
 one. 3. Speak in (d) the singular, said the other. 4. Well, how foolish 
 
 you were, to be sure ! 5. A celebrated lawyer was pleading. The 
 
 judge, to give himself more importance, interrupts him two or three 
 
 times to criticise his arguments. 6. At last the orator out-of-patience 
 
 (impatienU) becomes-sUent (se taire, irreg.), rolls-up his papers, and 
 
 prepares to go-out. 7. It seems to me, Mr.* Lebrun, said the judee, 
 
 that you wish to show your contempt of the court. 8. To show it ! 
 
 exclaimed the lawyer. No, no, quite on the contrary ! I strive to (c^) 
 
 conceal it. 9. One day a letter arrives by (d) the Paris post with this 
 
 address : To the greatest poet of France. 10. The postman carried it 
 
 to M. Victor Hugo. 11. The latter would not accept it ; take it, said 
 
 he, to M. de Lamartine. 12. Lamartine refused it also and addressed 
 
 it to M. Alfred de Musset. 13. The latter had it returned (159) to 
 
 Victor Hugo, who at last accepted it. 14. King George I., travelling 
 
 once to Hanover, stopped at a little village of Holland to change horses. 
 
 15. Being hungry he asked-for two or three eggs, which he ate in his 
 
 carriage. 16. When he was going away, a servaij^ told [to] his majesty 
 
 that we inn-keeper had charged him two hundred florins. 17. The 
 
 The king had him come. 18. How is (aefaire) it, sir, that you charge 
 
 me two hundred florins for three eggs ? Are they so scarce here ? 18. No, 
 
 replied the host, eggs are abundant enough, but kings are excHvfsivdly 
 
 rare. 19. I admire Mr. B.; I Icve, honor, and respect him, said a friend 
 
 of mine the other day. 20. I think of him and have recourse to him in 
 
64 
 
 • 
 
 all my clifficulties ; hut he has one fault. 21. Although he speaks 
 much, one would listen-to him with pleasure, except for (si ce niUiit) 
 the habit he has contracted of unbuttoning your waistcoat in chatting, 
 which is not without inconvenience during the winter. 
 *M' (maitre), title given in France to barristers and notaries. 
 
 Composition 39. 
 Absence of Mind, 
 
 1« Anecdote of Newton, — Newton, being one day deeply engaged in 
 the solution of some difficult problem, would not leave it to go and dine 
 with his family. His housekeeper, however, sent one of the servants 
 into his room, with a saucft-pan to boil^ him an egg. Newton, wishing 
 to be alone, sent her away, saying that he would boil it himself. The 
 servant put the egg on the table beside' his watch, told him to let it 
 boil three minutes, and went away. A few minutes after she returned, 
 and found Newton with the egg in his hand [and] cooking his watch in 
 the saucepan, without the least notion of the mistake he had com- 
 mitted. 
 
 2. Anecdote of Amph'e. — One day Ampere, a celebrated French 
 mathematician, v/as on his way' to his lectures*. He finds on the road 
 a pebble, which he picks up and whose party-colored* veins he begins to 
 examine curiously. Suddenly the lectures he is-to^-give recurs' to his 
 mind ; he pulls out his watch. Remarking^ that the hour is drawing- 
 near*, he hastens his steps^^ carefully puts-back the pebble into his 
 pocket, and throws his watch over the parapet c i the Pont des Arts. 
 
 At the Polytechnic School, when he had completed a demonstration 
 
 on the board, he hardly ever (almost never) failed to wipe-away the 
 
 figures with his silk-handkerchief^^ and to put-back into his pocket the 
 
 traditional duster^'. 
 
 ^faire bouillir. «a cAU de. 'se rendre. ^cours m. s. ^bigarri. ^devoir, ^revenir. 
 ^s'apercevoir. ^approeher. ^^presser le pas. ^^/oulard. i^Use here torchon. 
 
 V. THE VERB (DU VERBE). 
 
 I. The Conjugations (Des coNJUGAisoNs). 
 
 162. Verbs in French are usually divided into four main classes or 
 conjugations, in accordance with the termination of the Infinitive : 
 
 I. In er, as parler ; II. in ir, as/nir j III. m oir, as recevoir ; IV. 
 in TOf aa rompre. 
 
 163. The First Conjugation contains by far the larpfest number of verbs— nine- 
 tenthg of all the verbs— and to it are added whatever new verbs are created ; e. g. 
 UUgraphi&r. 
 
 New verbs from adjectives have been made according to the Second Conjugation 
 (of. bleuir, rougir), sufflcient to regard the Second Conjugation and the First as the 
 living eonjugationt. 
 
 164. With reference to the formation of the Past Definite and Past Participle, a 
 distinction may be made between verbs as being Weak or Strong ; the former having 
 the tonic accent (the chief stress of the voice) on a termination, the latter on the root. 
 
 166.1 
 
 minal 
 
 the reld 
 
 pai 
 
 lee. 
 
 two kit 
 parlon| 
 called 
 and of 
 
 Weak : Aimev, P. de^f. aimal. 
 P. Part, aim^. 
 
 Strong : tenir, P. def. tins ; venir, P. d^. vine, 
 joindre, P. Part, joint; prendre, P, 
 Part. pris. 
 
I ho speaks 
 i ce niUiit) 
 u chatting, 
 
 engaged in 
 go and dine 
 16 servants 
 >n, wishing 
 nself. The 
 01 to let it 
 le returned, 
 s watch in 
 3 had com- 
 
 ked Frencli 
 )n the road 
 iie begins to 
 urs^ to his 
 8 drawing- 
 tie into his 
 es Arts. 
 
 aonstration 
 j-away the 
 pocket the 
 
 r. trevenir. 
 ion. 
 
 classes or 
 we : 
 yoir; IV. 
 
 irerbs— nine- 
 'eated ; e. g. 
 
 Z!onjupration 
 First as the 
 
 'articiple, a 
 mer having 
 fi the root. 
 
 d^. vlns. 
 trendre, P, 
 
 II. Root and Terminations (Radical et tkrminaisgns). 
 
 165. Root and Terminations.— The verb is composed of a Boot and a Ter- 
 mination, the root giving the fundamental significance of the verb, the termination 
 the relations of person, number, time, etc. to that kiotion. 
 
 pari er, (to) speak) ; pari ais, wag «peaking ; pari ai, »poke ; pari ons, let us 
 speak, etc. 
 
 166. Terminations, Stronsr and V^eak.— The terminations of the verb are of 
 two kinds : (1) Terminations that are sounded, which are called Strong ; as, nous 
 parlons, Je partis, J'ai vaincu ; (2) Terminations that are not sounded, which are 
 called WecUc, consisting of ' a) Consonantal terminations ; as, je bats, tu pars, il vient ; 
 and of (b) Mute e terminations ; as je parle, ils parlent, lis parlerent. 
 
 167. The Root.— The root of the verb is found in its purest form in Ave places in 
 the verb : (1) the Present Participle, (2) the Pres. Indie. Plural, (3) the Im- 
 perfect Indie, (4) the Present Subj., (5) the Imperative Plural. 
 
 (1) pari ant, (2) nous pari ons, etc., (3) je pari ais, etc., (4) que je pari e, (5) 
 pari ons, etc. 
 
 IH. The Formation of Tenses (Formation des temps). 
 
 168. Rule 1. — As the root does not vary in the above mentioned tenses (167), we 
 
 may deduce the rule, that if we have, let us say, the Present Participle, any of 
 
 the corresponding parts, mentioned above, may be obtained by adding to the root 
 
 the regular terminations of the various parts. 
 
 (1) Pres. Part. 6crivant, (2) Pres. Ind. PL nous 6criVons. (3) Imp. Ind. 
 j'ecrivais, (4) Pres. Subj. que j'ecrive, (5) Imperat. PI. eciivons. 
 
 Rule 2. — From the Infinitive two tenses are formed: (1) the Future by adding 
 to the Infinitive the old Present Indie, of avoir, at, as, a, ons, ez, ont ; (2) the 
 Futtire Imperfect (Conditional), by adding to the Infinitive the termina- 
 tions of the Imperfect Indie, of avoir, -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient. 
 
 (1) Future : 
 je pafler ai, 
 tu finir as, 
 il recevr* a, 
 nous rompr* oas, etc. 
 
 (2) Imp. Fut. (Conditional): 
 je pajrler ais, 
 tu nnir ais, 
 il recevr* ait, 
 nous rompr^ ions, etc. 
 
 Infinitive : 
 
 Siarler, 
 nir, 
 recevoir, 
 rompre. ^ 
 
 *0i and e are suppressed. 
 
 Rule 3. -From the Past Definite the Imperf. Subjunctive may always be 
 obtained by adding -sse, -sses, ^t, -ssions, -ssiez, -ssent to the first vowel of the termin- 
 ation of the verb in the Past Definite. 
 
 je parla i,— que je parla sse. tu re^u s,— que tu re^u sses. 
 Rule 4.— The compound tenses are formed from the Past Participle by the aid 
 of the auxiliary verb avoir or (sometimes) itre. 
 
 j'ai parl^ ; tu eue regu ; il aura rompu ; je suis venu ; je tus venu. 
 Rvile 6. The forms of the Present Indie. 2nd Singr. difier from the 2nd 
 Sing. Imperative by the presence in the former of the pronoun, and, in the first 
 conjugation, of a terminal s. .The so-called 3rd Pers. Imperative is nothing but the 
 3rd Pers. of the Pres. Subjunctive. 
 
 tu paries, parle ; tu finis, finis ; tu rebels, re9ois ; tu romps, romps. 
 
 General Bule. — Given the five forms : (1) the Present Par- 
 ticiple ; (2) the Infinitive ; (3) the Past Definite; (4) the Per^- 
 feet Participle ; (5) the Indie. Pres. 2nd Sing., all other parts 
 of the regular, and of most irregular, verbs may be obtained. 
 
 These five parts have been, though wrongly, termed Primitive Tenses, and the 
 other parts Derivative Tenses. 
 
 I 
 
 i i'.' 
 1',": 
 
66 
 
 IV. The Regular Conjugations. 
 169. CoNJUOAisoN Du Vrrbb AuxiiiiAiRR Avoir (to) havb. 
 
 INDIOATIP. 
 
 PRfSKNT. 
 
 / have, etc. 
 
 Lai, nous avona, 
 as, vous avez, 
 il a, ils ont. 
 
 PABsi ind£fini. 
 
 / have had, etc. 
 
 j' ai eu, nous avons eu, 
 tu as eu, vous avez eu, 
 il a eu, ils ont eu. 
 
 IMPARFAIT. 
 
 1 had, was having, etc. 
 
 j' avals, nous avions, 
 tu avais, vous aviez, 
 11 avalt, ils avaient. 
 
 FLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 
 
 I had had, etc. 
 
 j' avais eu, n. avions eu, 
 tu avais eu, v. aviez eu, 
 il avaiteu, ils avaient eu. 
 
 pabb£ d£fini. 
 / had, etc. 
 1' eus, nouseAraes, 
 
 tu eas, 
 il eut, 
 
 vous eQtes, 
 ils eurent. 
 
 PABst ant£ribur. 
 
 / had had, etc. 
 
 j' eus eu, n. edmes eu, 
 tu eus eu, v. eAtes eu, 
 il euteu, ils eurent eu. 
 
 SUBJONOTIP. 
 
 pr£srnt ou futur. 
 
 that I (may) have, etc. 
 
 que ]' ale, que n. ayons, 
 que tu aies, que v. avez, 
 qu'il ait, qu'ils aient. 
 
 PAS8£. 
 
 that J (may) have had, etc. 
 
 quel' aie eu, que n. ayons eu, 
 que tu aies eu, que v. avez eu, 
 qd'il ait eu, qu'ils aient eu. 
 
 IMPARFAIT. 
 
 that I might have, etc. 
 
 que j' eusse, que n. eussions, 
 que tu eusses, que v. eussiez, 
 qu'il edt, qu'ils eussent. 
 
 PLUS-QUB-PARFAIT. 
 
 that J might have had, etc. 
 
 q. j' eusse eu, q. n. eussions eu, 
 q. tu eusses eu, q. v. eussiez eu, 
 qu'il edt eu, qu'ils eussent eu. 
 
 IMP^ATIF. 
 pr£8Bmt ou futur. 
 
 aie, have {thou), 
 qu'il ait, let him have, 
 ayons, let us have, 
 avez, have (ye, you), 
 qa'ih aient, let them have. 
 
 INPINITIP. 
 
 pr£sent. 
 avoir, (to) have. 
 
 PABSi. 
 
 avoir eu, (to) have had. 
 
 PABTICIPE. 
 
 present. 
 ayant, having. 
 
 pabb£. 
 ayant eu, having had, 
 eu, had. 
 
 futur. 
 
 I shall have, etc. 
 
 j' aural, nous aurons, 
 tu auras, vous aurez, 
 il aura, ils auront. 
 
 futur akt£ribur. 
 I shall have had, etc. 
 
 FUTUR IMPARFAIT. 
 (PRtSBNT DU GONDITIONNBL.) 
 
 / should have, etc. 
 
 J' aurais, nousaurions, 
 
 tu aurais, vous auriez, 
 
 il aurait, ils auraieut 
 
 FUTUR PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 
 (PASS#. DU CONDITIONNEL.) 
 
 / sfiould have had, etc. 
 
 
 (1st Form.) 
 
 (2nd Form.) 
 
 J' aural eu. 
 
 j* aurais eu, 
 
 , ' eusse eu, 
 ;u eusses eu. 
 
 tu auras eu, 
 
 tu aura;B eu. 
 
 il aura eu, 
 
 il auraii eu, 
 
 il eflt eu. 
 
 nous aurons eu, 
 
 n. aurions eu. 
 
 n. eussions eu, 
 
 vous aurez eu. 
 
 V. auriez eu. 
 
 V. eussiez eu. 
 
 ils auront eu. 
 
 ils auraient eu. 
 
 ils eussent eu. 
 
67 
 
 170. CoNJuoAiBON Du Verbb auxiliairr fitro (to) bk. 
 
 IS. 
 
 RATIP. 
 
 OU FUTUR. 
 
 lave {thou), 
 et him have, 
 'M us have, 
 iaoe {ye, you), 
 et them have. 
 
 NITIP. 
 
 have had. 
 
 ICIPE. 
 
 SENT. 
 
 iss£. 
 Ing had, 
 
 INDIOATIP. 
 
 PR^BBNT. 
 
 / am, etc. 
 
 je Buia, nous aonimes. 
 tu es, vous etes, 
 il est, ils sont. 
 
 PAB8£ ind£kini. 
 
 I have been, I was, etc. 
 j' ai 6t6, n. avons^ti, 
 tu OS it^, 
 il a ^t^, 
 
 V. avez et6, 
 ils ont ^t6. 
 
 IHPARFAIT. 
 
 / wa$, used to be, etc. 
 j' ^tais, nous^tions, 
 
 tu ^taia, 
 il 6tait, 
 
 vous dtiez, 
 ila ^talent. 
 
 PLU8-QUE-PARKAIT. 
 
 I had been, etc. 
 
 j' avals ^t^, nous aviona ^te, 
 tu avals 4t^, vousaviez 6t^, 
 il avalt 6t6, ils avaient 6t^. 
 
 jc fua, 
 tu fus, 
 il h't. 
 
 PABS6 D^FINI. 
 
 Iwa%, eta 
 
 nous f<!lme8, 
 vous ffttes, 
 11a furent. 
 
 PASS£ AirntsRiBUR. 
 
 / had been, etc. 
 j' eus et^, n. eAmes dt6, 
 
 tu eus ^t^, 
 il eut^t^, 
 
 v. eAtes ^t^, 
 11a eurent ete. 
 
 FUTUB. 
 
 / ahdll be, etc. 
 je serai, noua aerons. 
 
 tu aeraa, 
 il sera, 
 
 voua aerez, 
 lis seront. 
 
 FUTVR ANTlfeRIEUR. 
 
 / shall have been, etc. 
 
 8UBJONOTIP. 
 
 PR^BNT OU FUTUR. 
 
 that I {may) be, etc. 
 
 que Je aois, que noua aoyona, 
 que tu aois, que voua aovez, 
 qu'il aoit, qu'ils soient. 
 
 that 1 (may) have been, etc. 
 
 q. j* ale Hi, q. n. ayons et^, 
 q. tu aies^te, q. v. ajjez ete, 
 qu'll alt H^, qu'Uaalent ^t^. 
 
 IHPARFAIT. 
 
 that I might be, etc. 
 
 q. je fusse, q. n. fussiona, 
 q. tu fusses, q. v. fussiez, 
 qu'll ftlt, qu'ils fusaent. 
 
 PLUB-QUB-PARFAIT. 
 
 that I might have been, etc. 
 
 q. j' eusae ^t^, q. n. cuaaions iti, 
 q. tu euaaea et^, q. v. euaalez 6t^, 
 qu'll edt ^te, qu'ila euaaent ^te. 
 
 IMPlilRATIP. 
 
 PR^BNT OU FUTUR. 
 
 aoia, be {thou), 
 qu'll aolt, let him be, 
 aoyons, let u» be, 
 aoyez, {be ye, you), 
 qu'ils aofent, let them be. 
 
 INPINITIP. 
 
 PR^BNT. 
 
 etre, (to) be. 
 
 PASSi. 
 
 avoir ^te, (to) have been. 
 
 PARTICIPE. 
 
 PR^NNT. 
 
 ^tant, being. 
 
 VABBt. 
 
 ayant iti, haviny been, 
 et^, been. 
 
 FUTUR IMPARFAIT. 
 (PR^RNT DU CONDITIONNEL.) 
 
 / should be, etc. 
 
 je serais, nousaerions, 
 
 tu serais, vous seriez. 
 
 It serait. lis seraient. 
 
 FUTUR PLUS-QUB PARFAIT. 
 (PASSii DU CONDITIONNEL.) 
 
 / should have been, etc. 
 
 
 (lat Fonn). 
 
 (2nd Form). 
 
 j' aural 6te, 
 
 j' aurals ^t^. 
 
 , ' euase ^te 
 
 tu auras ^t^. 
 
 tu aurals et^, 
 
 tu euases ete. 
 
 il aura iU, 
 
 11 auralt 4te, 
 
 1 etlt ^te, 
 
 noua aurona ^t^. 
 
 -- nouaaurions ^t^. 
 
 nouaeusslona ^t^. 
 
 vouaaurez ete. 
 
 voua aurlez dt6. 
 
 voua euaalez iti. 
 
 ils auront ^t4. 
 
 lis aunueut ^t^. 
 
 lis eusaeut ete. 
 
 '''!•■ 
 
 '4- 
 
 ■I 
 
 '1 ' 
 
■ 
 
 68 
 
 171. Prbmi£re Conjuoainon*, bn -er: Virbb MooiLB, Parlor, (to) bpkak. 
 
 INDIOATIP. 
 
 PR^BNT. 
 
 I speak, etc. 
 
 Je parle, nous purloiia, 
 tu paries, voua parlez, 
 il parte, ils parteiit. 
 
 PABB^ IND^PINI. 
 
 / have spoken, I sp(}ke, etc. 
 
 j' ai parte, n. avons part^, 
 tu 08 partd, V. avez parte, 
 il a parte, ilsont parte. 
 
 IHPAHFAIT. 
 
 7 was sp€aking,U8ed tospeak. 
 
 Je pariais, nous partions, 
 tu partais, vous pariiez, 
 il partait, ils partaient. 
 
 PLUS-QUB-PARFAIT. 
 
 1 had spoken, etc. 
 
 j' avais part^, n. avions part6, 
 tu avals part6, v. aviez parte, 
 il avaitpart^, ils avoient parte. 
 
 PASBis D^riNi. 
 
 SUBJONCTIF. 
 
 rRi»ENT OU KUTUR. 
 
 that I (may) speak, etc. 
 
 que je parte, que n. pai-lions, 
 que tu paries, que v. pariiez, 
 qu'il parie, (|u'il8 parient. 
 
 PABB^. 
 
 that I may have spoken, etc. 
 
 q. j' aie parie, q. n. ayons parte, 
 (|.tu aies parid, q. v. ayez pari^, 
 qu'il ait parle, q. v. aient pari^. 
 
 Je pariai, 
 tu parias, 
 il paria. 
 
 spoke, etc. 
 
 nous pariJinies, 
 vous partates, 
 ils parterent. 
 
 PASSi ANTiiRIBUR. 
 
 / had spoken, etc. 
 
 J' eus parid, n. eilmes partd, 
 tu eus parid, v. elites purid, 
 il eut parie, ils eurent parie. 
 
 PUTUR. 
 
 I shall speak, etc. 
 je parleroi, n. parierons. 
 
 IMl'ARFAIT. 
 
 that I spoke, might speak, etc. 
 
 q. je pariasse, q. n. parlassions, 
 q. tu pariasses, q. v. partassiez, 
 qu'il part&t, qu'ilspartassent. 
 
 IMP^RATIF. 
 
 PRKBBNT OU PUTUU. 
 
 parte, speak 
 
 ( thou), 
 
 qu'il parte, let him 
 
 speak, 
 
 partons, let v« 
 
 speak, 
 
 pariez, speak 
 
 (ye,ymO, 
 
 qu'ilspartenc,Ie( them 
 
 speak. 
 
 INPINITIP. 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 parter, (to) speak. 
 
 PABB^. 
 
 avoir parld, to have 
 spoken, 
 
 PABTICIPB. 
 
 PRtSENT. 
 
 parlant, speaking. 
 
 PASSt. 
 
 ayant partd, having 
 
 ft '>4ten. 
 porld, spoktn. 
 
 PLUS-QUB-PARPAIT. 
 
 that 1 had {might have) spoken, etc. 
 
 q. j' eusse parle, q. n. euesions parld, 
 
 q. tu eusses parld, q. n. eussiez parte, 
 
 qu'il etit parid, qu'ilseussent parle. 
 
 tu parleras, 
 il parlera. 
 
 V. parierez, 
 ils parleront. 
 
 PUTUR ANT^RIEUR. 
 
 / shall have spoken, etc. 
 
 J' aurai parid, 
 tu auras parid, 
 il aura parid, 
 nous aurons parie, 
 vous aurez parid, 
 ils auront parid, 
 
 FUTUR IMPARFAIT. 
 (PRKBEKT DU CONDITIONNEL.) 
 
 / should speak, etc. 
 
 Je parlerais, nous parlerions, 
 tu parlerais, vous parleriez, 
 il parlerait, ils parteraient. 
 
 FUTUR PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 
 (PABBi: DU C0in)ITI0NNEIj.) 
 
 / should have spoken, etc. 
 
 (Ist Foim.) 
 J' aurais parid, 
 tu aurais parid, 
 il aurait parid, 
 nous aurions parid, 
 vOus auriez parid, 
 ils auraient parid. 
 
 (2nd Form.) 
 j' eusse parte, 
 tu eusses parte, 
 il eUt parid, 
 nous eussions parle, 
 VOUS eussiez parte, 
 ils eussent parte. 
 
 *8«e 176 for some peculiarities in the conjugation of certain verbs in -er. 
 
ro) BPKAK. 
 
 P^RATIF. 
 
 KNT Ott KUTDU. 
 
 parle, speak 
 
 ithou), 
 parle, let him 
 
 gpeak, 
 parlons, let m 
 
 speak, 
 parlez, speak 
 iye,ymi), 
 parlent,(e( them 
 
 speak. 
 
 [piNiriF. 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 , {to) speak. 
 
 PASB^. 
 
 parle, to have 
 spoken, 
 
 ^BTICIPB. 
 
 PRtSEKT. 
 
 it, speaking. 
 
 TASBt. 
 
 parl6, haviiiff 
 s't'^ken. 
 
 60 
 
 ITS- D«(ixiiiMR CoN.iiroAiHON, RN ir : Vrrrb MoD£!iiK, Fizilr, (to) rmran. 
 
 INDIGATIF. 
 
 ntteRKT. 
 
 • I finish, etc. 
 
 je Anis, nous flnissonB, 
 tit flnia, voua flnisaez, 
 11 flnit, ils flnissent. 
 
 PASSii INDl^PINI. 
 
 / have finished, I finished. 
 
 j' ai flni, 
 tit as flni, 
 11 a flni, 
 
 nous avons flni, 
 vous avez flni, 
 ils ont flni. 
 
 SUBJONOTIF. 
 
 PRESENT 0« KUTUR. 
 
 that I {may) finish, etc. 
 
 que je flnisse, quenousflnissions, 
 que tuflnisseH, que vous flnisaioz, 
 qu'il flnisse, qu'ils flnissent. 
 
 PABSt. 
 
 that I {may) have finished, etc. 
 
 que J' aie flni, que n. ayons flni, 
 que tu aies flni, que v. ayez flni, 
 qu'il ait flni, qu'ils aient flni. 
 
 IMPARFAIT. 
 
 1 was finishing, etc. 
 
 jc finiBsois, nous flnissions, 
 ru flnissais, vous flnissiez, 
 11 flnissait, ils flnissaient. 
 
 FLUS-OUS-PARTAIT. 
 
 I had finished, etc. 
 
 j' avais flni, n. avions flni, 
 tu avais flni, v. aviez flni, 
 11 avaitflni, ils avaient flni. 
 
 pabbA o^fini. 
 
 I finished, ^tc. 
 
 Je finis, nous flnimes, 
 tu flnis, vous flnites, 
 11 flnit, ils finirent. 
 
 PASB^ ANT^RIBDR. 
 
 / had finished, etc. 
 
 j' eusflni, nous eftmes flni, 
 tu eus flni, vous eiltes flni, 
 il eutflni, ils eurentfini. 
 
 PUTUR. 
 
 I shall finish, etc. 
 
 je finirui, nous finirons, 
 
 tu finiras, vous flnirez, 
 il flnira, ils finiront. 
 
 FVTUR ANTilRIBUR. 
 
 / sJuUl have finished, etc. 
 
 j' aurai flni, 
 tu auras flni, 
 il aura flni, 
 nous aurons flni, 
 vous aurez flni, 
 ils auront flni. 
 
 IMPARFAIT. 
 
 that I finished {might finish). 
 
 queje flnisse, que nous finissions, 
 quetu flnisses, que vous flnissiez, 
 qu'il flnit, qu'ils flnissent. 
 
 PLCB-QUB-PARFAIT. 
 
 that I had {might have)finislied. 
 
 o.j' eusse flni, q. n. eussionsflni, 
 <1. tueussesflni, q. v. eussiez flni, 
 niu'ileilt flni, qu'ils eussent flni. 
 
 IMPfiBATIF. 
 
 PRESENT Otl FUTUR. 
 
 flnis, finish 
 
 {thou), 
 qu'il flnisse, let him 
 finiith, 
 flni88on8,{«t us 
 finish, 
 flnisscz, finish 
 {ye, you), 
 qu'ils flnis8ent,2e( th*m 
 finish. 
 
 INFINITIF. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 flnir, {to) finish. 
 
 PASS^. 
 
 avoir flni, to have 
 
 finished. 
 
 PARTICIPB 
 
 PRiiSENT. 
 
 flnissant, finishing. 
 
 ayant flni, having 
 
 finished, 
 flni, finished. 
 
 PUTUR IMPARFAIT. 
 (present DU CONDITIONHKL.) 
 
 T should finish, etc. 
 je flnirais, nous flnirions, 
 
 tu flnirais, vous flniriez, 
 
 il flnirait, ils flniraient. 
 
 FUTUR PLUB-QUF-PARFAIT. 
 (PASri^ DU CONDITIONNEIj.) 
 
 / should have finished. 
 
 (Ist Fonn.) 
 j' aurais flni, 
 tu aurais flni, 
 il aurait flni, 
 nous aurions flni, 
 vous auriez flni, 
 ils auraient flni. 
 
 (2nd Fomi.) 
 j' euyse flni, 
 tu eusses flni, 
 il eat flni, 
 
 nous eussions flni, 
 vous eussiez flni, 
 ils eussent flni. 
 
 
 ;"1 
 
 * 
 
 t 
 
 ■U 
 
 >l 
 
 'i-i' 
 
70 
 
 178- Troi8i£mr CoN-iiroAiHON, RN -olr : Vhrri MODfiiiR, Reoevoir, (to) hrorivk. 
 
 INDIOATIF. 
 
 PHteRNT. 
 
 / receive, etc. 
 
 Je re<;ol«*, noun recevons, 
 tu regoia, vous re evez, 
 il regoit, Uh regoivent. 
 
 VXhBt INntPINI. 
 
 / have received, etc. 
 
 t' ai regu, nous avons regu, 
 u 08 regu, vous avez regu, 
 il a regu, its out regu. 
 
 IMPARPAIT. 
 
 / wa« reeeivinj, etc, 
 
 te reoevais, nous reoevions, 
 u reoevais, vous receviez, 
 il recevait, ils reoevaient. 
 
 PLUg-QUR-PARPAIT. 
 
 I had received, etc. 
 
 {' avals regu, n. avions regu, 
 u avals regu, v. avlez regu, 
 il avait regu, ilsavaientregu. 
 
 pashA D^riNt. 
 
 / received, etc. 
 
 Je regus, nous regftmes, 
 tu regus, veus regfttes, 
 11 regut, ils regurent. 
 
 . PASS^ ANT^RIRUR. 
 
 / had received, etc. 
 
 y eus regu, n. eiimes regu, 
 tu eus regu, v. eiUes regu, 
 11 eut regu, ils eurent regu. 
 
 SUBJONOTIF. 
 
 PR^SRNT OU FUTUB. 
 
 that I {may) receive, etc. 
 
 que Je regoive, que n. recevions, 
 que tu regolves, que v. receviez, 
 qu'il regoive, qu'lls regoivent. 
 
 V\HBt. 
 
 that I (may) have received, etc. 
 
 que J' aie regu, q. n. ayons regu, 
 que tu ales regu, q. v. ayez regu, 
 qu'il ait regit, qu'ilsaient regu. 
 
 IMPARFAIT. 
 
 that I received (might receive). 
 
 que Je regusse, q. n. regussions, 
 que tu regusses, q. v. regussiez, 
 qu'il regi\t, qu'lls regussent. 
 
 PLU8-QUR-PARPA1T. 
 
 that Imiijht have received, etc. 
 
 q.J' eusse regu, q. n. eussions regu, 
 q.tueussesregu, q. v. eussiez regu, 
 qu'il eAt regu, qu'lls eussent regu- 
 
 impAratif. 
 
 PRiluSRrfT OU PUTUR. 
 
 regois, receive, 
 qu'il regoive, let him 
 receivf, 
 recevons, let vx 
 receive, 
 recevez receive, 
 qu'lls regoivent, let 
 them receive, 
 
 INFINITIF. 
 
 PR|S»RNT. 
 
 recevoir, (to) receive. 
 
 PA88<l!. 
 
 avoir regu, (to) have 
 received. 
 
 PARTIOIPB. 
 
 PRtSKNT. 
 
 reoevant, receiving. 
 
 PABSi;. 
 
 ayant regu, having 
 
 received, 
 regu, received. 
 
 tu aHi 
 11 a 
 
 FUTUR IMPARPAIT. 
 FirrUR. (PRi»ENT DU CONDITIONNRL.) 
 
 / shall receive, etc. / should receive, etc. 
 
 Je recevrai, n. reoevrons, Je recevrais, nous recevrions, 
 
 tu reoevras, v. reoevrez, tu recevrais, vous recevriez, 
 
 il recevra, ils recevront. il recevrait. 
 
 ils rccevraient. 
 
 FUTITR PLUS-QITE-PARFAIT. 
 (PASS^ DU CONDITIOMMBL.) 
 
 / should have received, etc. 
 
 FUTUR ANT^RIBUR. 
 
 I shall have received, etc. 
 
 J' aural regu, 
 tu auras regu, 
 11 aura regu, 
 nous aurons regu, 
 vous aurez regu, 
 ils auront regu. 
 
 * For the rule Kfoveming: the use of the cedilla ((), consult 175, 1. 
 
 (1st Form.) 
 
 (2nd Form.) 
 
 J' auraia regu. 
 
 J' eusse regu, 
 
 tu aurais regu. 
 
 tu eusses regu, 
 
 il aurait regu. 
 
 il eftt regu. 
 
 nous aurions regu. 
 
 nous eussions regu. 
 
 vous auriez regu, 
 
 vous eussiez regu. 
 
 ils auraient regu. 
 
 ils eussent regu. 
 
[to) rrokivk. 
 
 'ARATIF. 
 
 m OU f UTUR. 
 
 iqoin, receive, 
 !(,'olve, let him 
 
 receive, 
 soevons, let ux 
 
 receive, 
 !cevez receive, 
 jyolvent, let 
 them receive. 
 
 INITIP. 
 , (to) receive. 
 
 PAHflHi. 
 
 ;u, (to) have 
 received. 
 
 ITIOIPB. 
 \ta«ST. 
 , receiving. 
 
 SU, having 
 received, 
 received. 
 
 71 
 
 174. QrATRliMI CON-firOAMON, RN -rO : VRRRR MObtliM Rompre. (TO) RRIAK. 
 
 INDIOATIF. 
 
 PRtoBNT. 
 
 / Irreak (am breaking), etc. 
 
 Jo romps, nous ronipons, 
 til romi>8, vous roiii|>ez, 
 il roinpt*, lis roinpent. 
 
 / have broken, I Irroke, etc. 
 
 J' ai rompu, n. avons rompu, 
 tu aH rompu, v. av^?; rompu, 
 il a rompu, ilsoTi* rompu. 
 
 IMPARFAIT. 
 
 lima breaking (tiMed to break). 
 
 je rompaifl, n. rompions, 
 tu rompais, v. rompiez, 
 il rompait, ils rotnpaient. 
 
 PLU8-QUE-PARFAIT. 
 
 I had broken, etc. 
 
 j' avals rompu, n. avions rompu, 
 tu avals rompu, v. aviez rompu, 
 il avait rompu, ils avaient rompu. 
 
 SUBJONOTIF. 
 
 PRltHRNT OU PUTIIR. 
 
 that I (may) break, etc. 
 
 que Je rompe, que n. rompions, 
 que tu romi>es, quo v. rompiez, 
 qu'll roinpe, qu'ils rom|)cnt. 
 
 PABSli!. 
 
 that I (may) have broken, etc. 
 
 q.J' ale rompu, q.n. ayons rompu, 
 q.tuaies rompu, q.v. avez rompu, 
 qu'ilalt rompu, qu 1. aient rompu. 
 
 PASSt D^PINI. 
 
 I broke, etc. 
 je rompis, nous romptmes, 
 
 tu rompis, 
 il romplt, 
 
 vous rombites, 
 ils rompirent. 
 
 PABB^ ANTilRIBUR. 
 
 I had broken, etc. 
 j'eus rompu, etc. 
 
 PUTUR. ' 
 
 I shall break, etc. 
 (romprai, n. romprons, 
 
 IMPARFAIT. 
 
 that I broke (might break), etc. 
 
 q.Je rompisse, q. n. rompissions, 
 (j.tu rompisses, q. v. rompissiez, 
 qu'il rompit, qu'ils rompissent. 
 
 PLUB-QUE-PARFAIT. 
 
 that I might have broken, etc. 
 que J'eusse rompu, etc. 
 
 impAratif. 
 
 PRi^BINT OU FUTUR. 
 
 romps, break 
 (thou), 
 qu'il rompe, let him 
 break, 
 rompons, let u» 
 break, 
 rompez, break 
 (ye, uou\ 
 qu ils rompent, let 
 
 them break. 
 
 INFINITIF. 
 
 PR^BRNT. 
 
 rompre, (to) break. 
 
 TAant. 
 
 avoir rompu, to have 
 broken. 
 
 PARTIOIPB. 
 
 PRilBKNT. 
 
 rompant, breaking. 
 
 PABB^. 
 
 ayant rompu, having 
 broken, 
 rompu, broken. 
 
 tu rompras, 
 il rompra, 
 
 v. romprez, 
 ils rompront. 
 
 FUTUR ANT^RIEUR. 
 
 I shall have broken, etc. 
 j'aurai rompu, etc. 
 
 FUTUR IMPARFAIT. 
 (PR^BBMT DU CONDITIONNRL.) 
 
 I should break, etc. 
 
 je romprais, nous romprions, 
 tu romprais, vous rompriez, 
 il romprait, ils rompraient. 
 
 FUTUR PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. 
 (PABB^ DU CONDITIOMNEL.) 
 
 I shouid have broken, etc. 
 
 (1st Form.) (2nd Form.) 
 
 J'aurais rompu, j'eusse rompu, 
 etc. etc. 
 
 *The final t, as in i7 (elle, on) rompt, is dropped after a d : as, vendre, to aeU—il vend. 
 
 PECULIARITIES OF BOMB VERBS OF THR FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 176. Some verbs of the First Conjuffation undergo in their conjugation certain 
 phonetic and othographical changes. Similar changes may be noticed in the nouns 
 and adjectives. See 12 ; 13 ; 58,1 ; 69, 2, etc. 
 
 ■¥. 
 
72 
 
 1. Verbs In -cer, -gfer.— The letters c, g in French are soft before e, i, (cent, 
 
 cinq; gens, ffilct) hut hard before (», o, u, (carte, comte,curi; garde, gorge, contre). 
 
 Verbs ending in -cer, -ger, having consequently the sott sound of c and q, must, in order 
 
 to preserve the soft sound, be written f and ge whenever they occur before a, o. Verlis 
 
 of the Third Conjugation having e soft in the root preserve the soft sound of c befoie 
 
 a, 0, «, by the use of the cedilla. 
 
 avanoer : j'avanee, nous avan9on8, j'avaupais, j'avan(jai, avan^ons. 
 juger : je juge, nous jugeons, je jugeais, je jugeai, jugeons. 
 
 recevoir : je re9ois, je reyus, j'ai repu, que je re9oive, que je rcjusse. 
 
 2. Verbs with e mute in the last syllable of the ro-^t.— The laws of 
 EVenoh pronunciation do not admit of the close sequence of two mute syllables. Con- 
 seqOently tho^e verbs which have e mute in the last syllable of the root, when an e 
 mute follows, change the sound of e mute in the root in e grave, which change is 
 indicated (a) by the doubling of the doubling of the intennediate consonant, or (b) 
 by the use of the grave accent over e. 
 
 a. Verbs in -eler, -eter, double the consonant before e mute terminations. 
 
 appoler : j'appelle, tu appelles, ils appellent, j'appellerai. (But : nous appelons, etc.) 
 jetar : je jette, il jette, elles jettent, elle jettera. (But : je jetais, etc.) 
 
 ExcBPTiONS.— The following verbs in -cler, -eter follow b in taking the grave accent : 
 
 bourreler, torment. 
 celer, conceal. 
 congeler, congeal. 
 d^celer, disclose. 
 
 d^geler, thaio. 
 geler, freeze. 
 harceler, harass. 
 modeler, model. 
 
 peler, peel. 
 
 acheter, buy. 
 racheter, redeem. 
 becqueter, peck. 
 
 decolleter, bare the neck. 
 epousseter.rfttst. 
 ^tiqueter, label. 
 
 b. Verbs other than those in -eler, -eter, with e mute in the fine syllable of the root, 
 take the grave accent before e mute terminations. 
 
 mener : je mdme, ils m^nent, je m^nerai, je menerais, que je m^ne. 
 
 3. Verbs Laving^ e in the last syllable of the root.— Verbs with e in the 
 
 last syllable of the root change ^ into ^ before mute terminations, except, however, in 
 
 the Future and Future Imperf. (Conditional). 
 
 protdger : je protege, ils prot6gent, qu'il protdge. But : je prot^gerai, je pro- 
 t^gerais. 
 
 i. Verbs ending in y in the root.— Verbs ending in y in the root (except 
 those in -ey, which always remain unchanged, and those in -ay, which generally remain 
 unchanged), change y into i before mute syllables. 
 
 employr.r: j'emploie, tu emploies, ils emploient, j'emploierai, j'emploierais. 
 B:« payer : je paye, tu payes, il paye (paie), je payerai (paierai, pairai). 
 
 EXERCICE 40.* 
 
 The following verbs are in the Infinitive ; the pronound are given in full. The pupil 
 vili correct. 
 
 1. Indic. pres. Nous causer et vous joiier, pendaut qne Henri 
 danser et les cnfants chanter. 2. P. inddf, Je enseigner ; mes fi-^res 
 4tudier ; vomb fltmer ; eWe travailler. 3. Imparf. Vous c^M/er pendant 
 que je jouer ; mon fr^re chanter aussi, pendant que vous joner. 4. Plus- 
 que-p. Nous chercher : les hommes trouver ; tu refuser le livre que nous 
 accepter. 6. Pass^ def, Mon p6re admirer la maison ; ma m6re la 
 condc/mner ; nous louer la maisou ; vous la refuser. 6. PassS ant. Vous 
 Scontimiser ; elle trai^ailler a la ville ses enfants gr* spiller leur argent ; 
 
 * f he verbs in the six exercises 40-4 > will be the same, and in the same order, in 
 the French as in the English exercises. 
 
 
 ga^i 
 
 moi 
 
EC, i, (cent, 
 rge, contri'). 
 ust, in order 
 n, 0. Verbs 
 I of c before 
 
 The laws of 
 ablea. Con- 
 , when an c 
 h change is 
 >nant, or (b) 
 
 ipelons, etc.) 
 
 re accent : 
 
 are the neck. 
 
 lust. 
 
 ibeU 
 
 of the root. 5 
 
 ith e in the 
 however, in 
 
 •ai, je pro- 
 
 Oct (except 
 ally remain 
 
 rais. 
 
 The pupil 
 
 e 
 
 IBS 
 
 Henri 
 fv^res 
 pendant 
 4. Plus- 
 ][ue nous 
 m6re la 
 %t. Vous 
 argent ; 
 
 order, in 
 
 je gagner I'argent. 7. Fiit. Nous copier les lettres ; vous les plier ; 
 lea enfants donner k Henri, qui les porter k la poste. 8. Fat. ant. 
 Mon oncle demander la lelstre ; les enfants le oublier ; Henri la leur 
 donner et nous le remercier. 9. Fat. imp. Je dis que tu pardonner an 
 gargon, que nous le bldnier, que sa sceur le louer, et que sa mire le aimer. 
 10. Fut. plus-que-pt II me pardonner; vous me louer; mon p^re me bldmer 
 etma sceur me aimer, si j'avais fait cela. 11. Imp^ratif. Louer Dien, 
 mon enfant ; aimer Dieu, mes enfants : que tout le monde louer Dieu ; 
 que mes fr6res aimer Dieu. 12. Subjonctip. PrSa. Je veux que tu 
 danaer, qu'elle travailler, que nous causer, qu'on commencer sur-le-champ. 
 1 3. PasaS, Avant que vous confesser, que nous avouer, qu*elle supplier, 
 que nous menacer. 14. Imparf. J'ordonnai que Louise renter k la 
 maison, qu'elle chercher la balle ; que tu ne lui parler pas ; qu3 Jeanne 
 et Marthe copier quelques phrases du thdme. 15. Infinitip. PasitS. 
 Apres pleurer et apr6s arroser la terre de leurs larmes, ils g'f^]oign6rent. 
 16. Particife. Pris. En marcher, en chanter, en Studier, on se fptigue. 
 
 Exi<;RCiSE 41. 
 
 1. While the girls chat and the boys play, we are dancing and you 
 
 are singing. 2. The master has taught ; you have studied ; we have 
 
 lounged ; our brothers have worked. 3. Our friends were singing ; we 
 
 were playing ; you used-to-sing and your mother used-to-play. 4. I had 
 
 sought, but you had found ; they had refused, but we had accepted. 5. 
 
 We admired the singer, but they condemned her ; our friends praised her 
 
 but she refused their praises. 6. She had economised, but her brothers 
 
 had worked ; her children had squandered the money that you had 
 
 gained. 7. I shall copy the letter ; thou wilt fold it ; Mary will give 
 
 it to the children, who will take it to the post. 8. He will have asked 
 
 for the money ; they will have forgotten it ; we shall have ijiven it to 
 
 him, and he will have thanked us. 9. I said that he would wrgive me, 
 
 that you would blame me, that my father would praise me, and that all 
 
 ray friends would love me. 10. You would have pardoned us but your 
 
 father would have praised us ; we should have blamed them, people would 
 
 have loved them, if they had done that. 11. Praise the school, my child ; 
 
 love your masters ; let them praise your progress ; let us love our work. 
 
 12. I wish you to (that you, etc.) think, I wish you to work ; I do not 
 
 wish you to talk, I wish you to begin your work ut once. 13. Before the 
 
 boys have confessed the fault, before the girls have acknowledged it, 
 
 before we have entreated, and you have threatened. 14. I ordered him 
 
 to stay (that he should stay, etc. ), you to look-for the books, John and 
 
 Henry to speak to me of your progress, everybody to copy the exercises. 
 
 15. After having (246) wept for the loss of our friend and watered the 
 
 earth with our tears, we went oflf. 
 
 Indicate the nature of the peculiarities in the conjugation of the following verbs, 
 and tell the tenses and persons that have these peculiarities ( See 175. ) : cdder, 
 promener, annoncer, appuyer, fettilleter, rdpt'ter, atteler, peler, essayer, 
 
 EXEROICK 42. 
 
 The verbs are in the Infinitive ; the pronouns are given in full. The pupil will 
 correct. 
 
 1. Indic. PrSs. Nous ohSir k nos parents ; vous disoMir auy vdtres ; 
 les parents les punir. 2. Paaai indSf. Les eldves finir leurs thdmes j nouff 
 
les choiair ; vous accomplir votre promesse. 3. Imparf. Vous envahir 
 la pays ; je franchir la riviere ; les femmes g4mir. 4. Plus-que-p. Le 
 Boldat trahir son pays ; on le saiair ; nous le punir. 5. Paaai dSf, Je 
 rottgir; voub pdlir ; les autres fremir. 6. PassS ant. Nous bdtir une 
 maison ; t'OUS la embellir ; le propri^taire la dimolir. 7. ^w<. Tu polir les 
 couteaux ; Marie />^mr la pate ; nous cAomr les fleurs. 7. jFV«<. a»^ lis 
 r^tWMr ; nos amis Stahlir ; tu accomplir. 9. ^m<. imparf, Je croyais que 
 vous nourrir les pauvres, que nous guirir les malades, que Dieu banniv le 
 vice. 10. jPm^ plus-que-p. Les m^decins guSrir le malade, Us le chirir, 
 quand m@me persoune ne les en applaudir. 11. Imperatif. BSnir Dieu, 
 mon enfant ; que tout le monde le h4nir ; chirir la vertu, mes chers fr^res. 
 
 12. SuBJ. PrSs. Croyez-vous ^ue les arbres reverdir, groasir, grandir, 
 
 13. Passe, Quoique nous oboiiir cette loi, que nous adoucir la punition. 
 
 14. Imparf. Avant que vous rebdtir votre maison et que votre pdre la 
 gamir. 15. Plus-que-p. II fallutque je^nir mon th^me avant que vous 
 Jinir le vdtre. 16. Participe. En bdtir des ch&teaux en Espagne on 
 jouit de spectacles divertir. 
 
 Exercise 43. 
 
 1. I obey my father ; when John disobeys his, we punish him. 2. I 
 have finished the exercise which you chose; I have fultilled my promise. 
 3. We were invading the country, while they were crossing the frontier ; 
 everybody was lamenting. 4. The traitors had betrayed our troops ; 
 we had seized them ; you had punished them. 5. The girl blushed 
 when you turned pale, but we shuddered. 6. You had built a house ; 
 the upholsterer had embellished it ; we had torn it <Iown. 7. They will 
 polish the mirrois {glace f.) ; we shall knead the dough ; Mary will choobo 
 the guests. 8. We shall have succeeded in our enterprise ; for you will 
 have established communications between the towns, and thus you will 
 have accomplished your design. 9. I believed that we should feed the 
 poor, that you would cure the sick, that God would banish vice. 10. He 
 would have cured him ; we should have cherished him, even though no 
 one would have applauded us for (of) it. 11. Let us bless God ; let people 
 bless Him ; cherish, my child, thy mother. 12. Do you believe that 
 the tree is growing green again, that it is growing big and tall ? 13. 
 Though they have abolished those severe laws, though we have softened 
 all punishments. 14. Before they rebuilt their country-house, and 
 before we furnished ours. 15. It was necessary for us to have finished 
 our Hvercise before they had finished theirs. 16. In building castles in 
 the >ir, diverting pastime, the hours steal away. 
 
 Exercice 44. 
 
 The verbs are in the Infinitive; the pronouns are given in full. The pupil will 
 correct. 
 
 1. Indic. of PrSs, lis apercevoir ; vous aitendre ; le bateau descendre. 
 2. Passe indif. Le prof esse ur recevoir la bourse que les ^tudiants perdre; 
 11 la leur rendre. 3. Imparf. lis devoir r^poudre k la lottre ; vous 
 attendre une r^ponse ; le roi eu dSfendre I'usage. 4. Plus-que-p. Nous 
 concevoirj vous d&fendre le pays ; tu vendre. 5. Passe def. lla percevoir 
 I'int^rSt ; vous de/endre nos droits ; leurs ennemis ne entendre pas leur 
 justification. 6. Passi ant, Jean vous dicevoir ; nous ne rSpondre pas 
 
75 
 
 nvahir 
 p. Le 
 ISf. Je 
 ir une 
 olir les 
 mt. lis 
 ais que 
 mnir le 
 chirir, 
 r Dieu, 
 I fr^res. 
 randir, 
 mition. 
 pdre la 
 ue V0U8 
 tgne on 
 
 1. 2. I 
 
 tromise. 
 rontier ; 
 troops ; 
 blushed 
 , house ; 
 hey will 
 1 cnoobo 
 yoM will 
 yrou will 
 Eeed the 
 10. He 
 ough no 
 people 
 5ve that 
 ? 13. 
 oftened 
 se, and 
 inished 
 «tles in 
 
 >upil will 
 
 .scendre. 
 perdre; 
 i ; VOUS 
 ). Nous 
 tercevoir 
 )as leur 
 dre pas 
 
 aux lettres ; ils perdre nos plumes. 7. Fut. Je apercevoir ; nous deacen' 
 dre ; Charles perdre son argent. 8. Fut. ant. Elle recevoir un tele- 
 gramme ; elle descemlre la riviere ; nous ne perdre pas notre temps. 9. 
 Fut. imparf. .Te devoir* le faire ; vous devoir y aller ; nous devoir revenir. 
 10. FiU, plusque-p. Mon fr^re devoir 6crire ; je devoir r^pondre ; vous 
 devoir revenir. 11. iMPfiRATiF. Recevoir 1' argent, si vous voulez ; 
 attendre un peu, mes amis j qu'ils rompre la convention. ' 12. Subj. 
 Pris. II faut que vous conreuoir le projet ; qu'ello ne vous interrompre 
 pas, nos amis le attendre. 13. Pass4. Quoique nous percevoir les 
 impOts, qu'ils ripondre k mon appel, que mon frt^re vendre les terres. 
 14. Imparf. Ne croyez-vous pas qu'elles apercevoir le iilou, que nous 
 descendre la montagne, que nous le pendre 15. Pour que vous recevoir^ 
 qu'il renrfre I'argent, que ma soeur le ;?er<ire. 16. Plaa-qm-p. Pour que 
 tu recevoir de I'argeot, que tu n'en rendre, que j'en perdre. 
 
 Exercise 45. 
 
 1. We perceive the steamer which we are waiting-for ; it is coming- 
 down the river. 2. We have received the money John lost ; we have 
 given it back to him. 3. We were-to answer the letters ; they were 
 waiting-for our answers ; but our father forbade it. 4. I have conceived 
 how he defended the country. They have sold their lives dear. 5. 
 We collected the interest of their money ; we defended their rights ; 
 they did not hear our justification. 6. We had deceived you, for they 
 had not answered your letter ; I had lost their pen. 7. We shall per- 
 ceive the steeple of the village where we [shall] alight. There we shall 
 lose your company. 8. We shall have received their telegrams ; we 
 shall have gone-down the river ; our friends will have lost no time. 
 P You ought-to go ; we ought to do it ; our friends ought to return. 
 10. They ought* to have gone ; you ought to have done it ; they ought 
 to have returned. 11. Let him still-owe the money ; let them wait till 
 to-morrow ; but let us break our agreement. 12. They must (it is ueces- 
 savy that they) conceive a great project, you must not interrupt them, 
 but wait-for them. 13. Though he has collected the money, answered the 
 letters, and sold the estates. 14. Do you not believe that we perceived 
 the rogue, that he came down the mountain, and that the peasants 
 hanged him? 15. In order that we might receive the letter, that you 
 might give it back to John, and that he might lose it. 16. In order 
 that John might have received the letter, that we might have given it 
 back to Mary, and that she might have lost it. 
 
 V. Interrooative Verbs (Vbrbes interrooatifs). 
 
 176 Rule. A statement may be made interrogative, (a) if the subject 
 is one of the personal pronouns ^e, tu, il, etc., or on, orce, by placing the 
 subject after the verb, or, in compound tenses, after the auxiliary ; (6) 
 
 * The verb deVOlr in the perfect tense, followed by the simple infinitive, corresponds 
 to must, might in the simple tense, followed by a pedect infinitive. 
 
 J'aiddle faire. 
 
 I rmist have-done it. 
 
 J'aurais dd le flaire. 
 
 I ought to have-done it. 
 
 11 
 
 ill 
 
 ml 
 
 W ; 
 
76 
 
 if the subject is a noun or a pronoun, other than those just mentioned, 
 by placing a corresponding pronoun after the verb (or auxiliary). 
 
 a. Parle*- je k I'homme ? 
 A-t**-il parl6 h I'homme ? 
 Avaitt-oft parle a I'homme ? 
 
 b. L'homine parle-t-il ? 
 Quelqu' un a-t-il parle ? 
 Celaest-il correct? 
 
 * When the verb in the first person ends in e mute, the e. becomes 4 before je. 
 Duss^-je mourir. Eussd-Je chants? 
 
 ** When the verb in the third person ends in a vowel, t mu«t be in«erte<I before the 
 vowel of il, elle, on : I artira-t-il ? 
 
 f The iXM«^ an<^ncttr is not employed in questions. ' ' 
 
 177. liimitations. {a) When the verb in the 1st person indie, has 
 but one syllable, je must never be placed *ter the verb (except in ai-je, 
 8uis-je, puis-je, sais-je, vais-je, dois-je, vois-je). With such verbs the 
 statement is made interrogative by prefixing the phrase est-ce que. 
 
 b. When the interrogative statement is introduced by od, comhien, 
 quel, que, quand, etc., the subject may stand after verb (or past parti- 
 ciple), provided the verb is not followed by an object or an adverb, and 
 is not in a compound tense. 
 
 a, Eet-oe que* je vends le drap ? 
 Do 1 seU the cloth ? 
 Est-ce gue Je le rends ? 
 Do I gtoe it back ? 
 
 b. Oil est votre f rere i' 
 yfh^tre is your l-rother ? 
 Qnand viendront les troupes ? 
 When will the troops come ? 
 
 '^ The interrogation with est-ce que is to be preferred, except in formal language, 
 in interrogations with the Ist person, but may be used with all per.-^ns. It often 
 expresses doubt or surprise. 
 
 VI. Negative Verbs (Vkrbes nIsoatifs). 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 je ne parle pckS. 
 je ne parlais pas. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 je n'ai pas regu. 
 je n'avais pas reQU. 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 ne finis- je pas ? I n'ai-je pas fini ? 
 ne finirai-je pas ? | n'aurai-je pas fini '. 
 
 178- "^he negative ne is always placed before the verb, preceding any 
 pronoun objects that the vtrb may have. 
 
 Je ne vols pas. 
 
 Ne le lui ai-je pas donn^ ? 
 
 Je ne le hii ai pas donn^. 
 Est-ce que je ne lui parle pas? 
 
 179. The negatives pas, point, jamais, gu6re, rien, plus, 
 follow the verb, or in a compound tense, the auxiliary. 
 
 Je ne I'ai Jamais vu. Ce mot n'est ffu^re muM que dans oette phrase. 
 
 / have never seen him. That word ismt little used except in that sentence. 
 
 180i When the verb is in the Inlinitive, the negatives pas, point, 
 jamais, rien are usually, though not necessarily, placed immediately 
 after ne. 
 
77 
 
 J'ai rintention de ne pas en par]er. 
 
 / intend not to speak of it. 
 
 Ii dit ne lien avoir entendn. 
 
 He says he has heard nothing. 
 
 Veuillez n'en rien dire k ^rsonne. 
 
 Be 80 Ifind as to say nothing of it to anybody. 
 
 Je Bouhaite ne jamais te voir. 
 
 / winh never to see thee. 
 Je serais ooupable de ne pas in'y preter. 
 / shouldibe blaineworthy not to comply 
 with it. 
 
 Vll. Passive Verbs (Vkrbes passifs). 
 
 181. The conjugation of the Passive Verb offers no difficulty, as it is 
 simply the tenses of the verb etre (170), followed by the perfect parjti<aple 
 of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 The past pai'ticiple after the verb Hre must agree in all passive verbs 
 vdth the subject. 
 
 feTRE U)vt or lou6k, lou^s, hovses, (to) be prained. 
 Pr^s,: je sais loue or louee, 
 
 tu 68 loue or louee, 
 
 Jilestloue, 
 
 \ elle est louee, etc. 
 
 Passi. indef.: nous avons ete loues or 
 louees, 
 vous avez ete loues, or 
 loupes, 
 ( lis ont dt6 louds, 
 ( elles ont 6t6 lou^, etc. 
 
 182. The prepositions used after the passive voice before the agent are de and par. 
 !^' 3 is to be preferred when th« past participle haa a va^e, general, or habitual sense. 
 Cei; homme est respeote de tous. Accoinpagoe (precede, suivi) de see gardes, le 
 roi partit. 
 
 Par is to be preferred when the action is definite, special, relative to a detennined 
 object. Hamlet, pcu* ^akespeare. fSUe fut aimee par un jeune homnie Hche, qui 
 flnit par I'tpouser. (Larousse.) 
 
 183. Limitations to the uas of the Passive "Voice. The 
 French make use of the passive voice to a much less extent than the 
 English. Generally spe "king, the passive voice in French is used only 
 when the agent is expressed ; in other cases the active voice with on or 
 the reflective verb (136) is more in harmony with the spirit of the 
 language, \nd will be found more frequently employed. 
 Compare : 
 
 1 have been told that. 
 
 That is easily done. 
 
 J have been forbidden to go out. 
 
 that book is easily sold. 
 
 On m'a dit cela. 
 Cela se fait facilement. 
 On ra'o, defendu de sortir. 
 Ce livre se vend facilement. 
 
 184. Generally speaking, a verb that governs an indirect object in the Active Voice 
 cannot, in French, have such indirect object made the subject in the Passive. 
 
 The letttr has been answered. 
 They were eriven paper and pens. 
 
 On a r^pondu 4 la lettre. 
 
 On leur donna du papier et des plumeB. 
 
 185. The Active infinitive is used, where in English we find the 
 Passive, in the following cases : — 
 
 a. Infinitive used adjectively :— C'est un liomme A craindre : Ife is a man to be 
 
 feared. 
 With verl)s governing the indirect object this form iMust not be used ; C'est un 
 
 homme k qui on peut se fler : lie is a man to be trusted. 
 
 mk ' 
 
 m 
 
78 
 
 b. Infinitive after laigser, /aire, etc. 
 
 , -■■:■ Je I'ai laiss^* punir. 
 
 J'ai fait* Mtir la niaison. 
 
 or, 
 
 / allowed him to be punished. 
 
 I ham caused the house to be built. 
 
 I have had the house built. 
 
 *The Infinitive construction with these verbs is as if we understood quelqu'v.n 
 (somebody) : I have allowed (had) somebody to pu7iish Mm. 
 
 VIII. Reflectivr Verbs (Verbes pronominaux ou r£fl£cuis). 
 
 186. The Reflective Verb oflfers little difficulty other than the use of 
 the auxiliary Stre in all tho compound tenses in French ; 
 while English usage requires the auxiliary have. The past participle 
 agrees with the pronoun object, unless such pronoun is clearly Uidirect. 
 
 SE REPKNTiR, repent : Simple Tense. Compound Tense. 
 
 Nous nous soniines repentis or re- 
 pen ties, 
 Vons vous Stes repentis or repenties, 
 / lis se sont repentis, 
 \ Elles se sont repenties, etc. 
 We have repented, etc. 
 
 187. The use of the Reflective conjugation has extended to all cases where the 
 object of the verb is a person, etc., identical with the subject. 
 
 Simple Tense. 
 Je me repens. 
 
 Til te repens, 
 j II se repent, 
 \ Elle se repent, etc. 
 
 / repent, etc. 
 
 Je me suis fait mal au doigt. 
 
 / have hurt my (to myself) the finger. 
 
 So also : 
 Je m'en suis a11e(e). 
 / have gone away. 
 
 Cette femme s'est casse le bras. 
 That woman has broken her (to herse^ 
 the) arm. 
 
 Je me suis ecrie(e). 
 / have exclaimed. 
 
 Je me suis enf ui(e), etc. 
 1 have fled away, etc. 
 
 IX. The Auxiliaries of Intransitive Verbs (Auxiliaires dbs 
 
 ' ' . VERBRS INTRANSITIFS). « ' 
 
 188. A great nuuiber of French intransitive verbs take avoir as their 
 auxiliary. 
 
 J'ai couru ; tu as marcho ; il a dornii ; nous avons regn6 ; vous avez vecu, etc. 
 
 189. Intransitive Verbs taking Stre as their auxiliary. 
 
 Some intransitive verbs, however, always take §tre, although their 
 
 English equivalents require have. The past participle of such verbs 
 
 must agree with the subject in gender and number. 
 
 aller, go. 
 
 arriver, arrive. 
 
 choir, /\t,H. 
 
 deceder, .He. 
 
 echoir, fall due. 
 
 tomber, fall. 
 
 Also : convenir, with the meaning acknoivlodje, agree ; Nous sommes convenus 
 du prix. It takes avoir when meaning please, suit: Ce projet ne lui a pas convenu. 
 
 In the compound tenses of these verbs we must consequently' say : Je suls all^ (e) ; 
 tu es arriv^ ; elle est morte ; nous sommes venu(e)8, etc. 
 
 190. Verbs taking avoir or etre, accorcling to the sense. A 
 
 colore, blow(ot flowers), 
 
 hatc-h(ot birds), 
 entrer, enter. 
 mourir, die. 
 naitre, be born. 
 venir, come. 
 
 devenir, become. 
 
 disconvenir, deny. 
 intervenir, intervene. 
 parvenir, attain. 
 pro venir proceed (from), 
 revenir, return. 
 
# 
 
 ■•n : :>► 
 
 certain number of intransitive verbs take avoir when they express 
 Action, and §tre when they express State. They are : 
 
 aocourir, 
 
 run to. 
 
 acoroitre, 
 
 increase. 
 
 apparaftre, 
 
 ajtpear. 
 
 ♦cesser. 
 
 cease. 
 
 ♦changer, 
 
 change. 
 
 croltre. 
 
 ftrotc. 
 
 d6oroitre. 
 
 decrease. 
 
 demeiirer, 
 ♦descendre, 
 disparaitre, 
 emDellir, 
 
 empirer, 
 grandir, 
 
 dtoell, stay, 
 descend, 
 disappear, 
 beeyme more 
 beautiful, 
 grow voorse 
 grow taller. 
 
 *n»onter, 
 
 partir, 
 
 ♦passer, 
 
 rester, 
 
 *8ortir, 
 
 vieillir, 
 
 ascend, 
 depart, leave, 
 pass, 
 stay, 
 go out. 
 grow old. 
 
 * Used also transitively, when like other transitive verbs they take avoir : II a 
 desoendu {brought down) mes gants. Nous I'avons passe en chemin, etc. 
 
 Action— Auxiliary avoir. 
 
 La fi^vre a cess^ k quatre heures. 
 The fever ceased at four 'o'clock. 
 
 Get enfant a bien grandi en peu de temps> 
 That childhas grown much m a short time. 
 
 Le fusil a parti tout d'un coup. 
 The gun went of suddenly. 
 
 Ma sceur a sorti plusieurs fois. 
 
 My sister has gone otit several times. 
 
 State— Auxiliary etre. 
 
 La fl^vre est oessee depuis longtemps 
 The fever has long ceased. 
 
 Vous 6te8 maintainent bien grandi. 
 You are now well grown. 
 Mon fr^re est parti pour Montreal. 
 My brother has set out for Montreal. 
 
 Ma sceur est sortie. 
 My sister is out. 
 
 X. Impbrsonal Verbs (Verbes impersonnels ou unipbrsonnkls). 
 
 191. (i!ertain verbs in French, as in English, are used only in the third 
 person singular. These verbs in French almost always have 11 as their 
 subject ; the Past Participle is invariable. They have otherwise no 
 special mode of conjugation. . ' 
 
 eolairer, lighten. 
 jfeler, freeze. 
 
 il eclaire, 
 il a neige, 
 
 degeler, freeze. 
 greler, hail. 
 
 il gelait, 
 il aurait plu, 
 
 neiger, snow. 
 pleuvoir, rain. 
 
 il degela, 
 il eut tonne, 
 
 tonner, thunder. 
 falloir*, be necessary, 
 must, have to. 
 
 il grelera, 
 
 il aura fallu, etc. 
 
 • NoTB— The constructions with falloir are of four kinds. 
 
 a. Absolute : II faut faire cela. That must be done. . 
 
 6. With a noun, or a pronoun, as indirect object, 
 
 II faut k cet homnie des sommes considerables d'argent. That man needs, etc. 
 II me faut un bon dictionnaire frangais. / want a good French dictionary. 
 
 c. With a dative personal pronoun and an Infinitive. 
 
 II ine faut y aiier. / must go there. 
 
 d. With a noun or pronoun as the subject of a dependent verb in the subjunctive 
 
 II a fallu que mon p6re quittat Paris, My father had to leave Paris. 
 II faut que je fasse ce que vous faites. / must do what you do. 
 
 ' S'en falloir, to lack : II s'en est peu fallu qu'il n'ait et6 tue. He was nearly (there 
 lacked little, etc.) being killed. 
 
 192. In special phrases or with special meanings, many verbs not 
 necessarily impersonal become for the tline impersonal. 
 
 arriver, happen. 
 advenir ha]3f>en. 
 convenir, suit. 
 s'agir, be the mit- 
 
 ter, the question, 
 
 at stake, 
 s'enamvre, follow. 
 paraitre, seem. 
 
 seoir, bejittinq. 
 
 tomber, falL 
 importer, matter, 
 y avoir, thsre be. 
 faire beau (temps), 
 be fine. 
 " mauvais(temp8), 
 be bad iveather. 
 
 faire froid, be cold. 
 '• frais, be cool. 
 " ]our,he daylight, 
 " obscur,6e dark. 
 " sombre, " 
 " nuit, 
 
 " du vent, be 
 xpindy. 
 
 faire de la boue, be 
 
 muddy. 
 " de la neige, be 
 
 snowy. 
 " de la pluie, be 
 
 rainy. 
 " de la poussi^re, 
 
 be dusty, etc. 
 
 mi 
 
m 
 
 II lui est arrive de irrands raolheurs. 
 II H'est Apri de votre hunneur. 
 11 s'ensuit <le Ik que vous avez tort. 
 II importe beauooup qu'il soit ici. 
 II a fait gros temps aur la Manohe. 
 
 Great mitifortuneH have happened to him. 
 
 Your honor han been at stake. 
 
 It follows from that that you are wrong. 
 
 His presence here is one of flreat importance. 
 
 There teas rough weather on the Channel. 
 
 Th4me 46. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the auxiliary verbs, the place of the negative, the voice 
 employed. 
 
 1. OiIl est-ce que nous en sommes demeur^s de notre le^on, Victor? 
 Nous en ^tions k la le^on des verbes pronominaux, n'est-ce pas ? 
 2. Yo\\k oCt nous en sommes demeur^s. Mais, monsieur, puis- 
 que nous n'avons pas cess^ de travailler depuis ce matin, nous nous 
 sommes d^cid^s d. vous demander la permission de nous divertir un 
 pen. 3. Que faut-il faire pour nous divertir ? 4. II faut que vous nous 
 lassiez des contes. 5. A quoi bon les contes ? Les 4l^ves qui ne se sont 
 pas habitues au travail sont bien k plaindre. 6. Qu'est-ce que vous nous 
 avez souvent dit : Heureux les ^l^ves qui se sont amuses en s'instruisant. 
 7. Je ne me suis pas attendu & cette reponse, mais je m'apercois de la 
 force de votre observation. Gependant je ne m'y rends pas k discretion. 
 Aussitdt que vous vuus serez acquis de votre devoir, nous aurons les 
 contes. 8. Cela se fera facilement. 9. D^p^chez-vous done de traduire 
 les phrases du theme. 10. Les vertus se perdent dans Tint^r^t, comme 
 les fieuves se perdent dans Toc^an. 11. Apprenez comment les lis des 
 champs croissent ; ils ne travaillent ni ne filent. 12. Si un fou savait 
 se taire il passerait bientdt pour sage. 13. Le bl^ de mars se s^me au 
 printemps. 14. Faut-il d^sesp^rer du but parce qu'on s'est tromp6 de 
 chemin. 15. Get homme est chang^ k ne plus le recounaitre. Sa femme 
 ^t morte il y a deux mois. Ses enfants sont all^s en Am^rique et y 
 sont rest^s. II y a huit jours qu'il n'est pas sorti de son lit. 16. M. A. 
 est-il a la maison ? 17. II n'y est pas. II est sorti depuis une heure. 
 M. £. a sorti, mais il vient de rentrer. II est mont^ dans sa chambre. 
 18. II est tomb^ de la pluie ; puis il a neig^ ; puis le thermom^tre a 
 descendu de vingt d^gres en vingt-quatre heures ; il a fait un froid 
 affreux. 19. Puis il a fait beaii temps et les neiges qui sont tomb^es ont 
 disparu subitement. 'M. En deux jours les rivieres ont cr(i deux 
 metres. 21. Nous sommes convenus de vous dire que nous avons chang^ 
 d'avis. 22. Au onzi^me siecle l/Angleterre fut conquise par les Nor- 
 mans. En 1492 I'Am^rique fut d^couverte par Christophe Colomb. 
 
 23. II se trouve de belles choses dans le livre que vous m'avez pret6. 
 
 24. Vous en rappelez-vous quelques-unes ? 25. L'homme c[ui est aim^ 
 des gens d'esprit ne sera ni b]ess6 ni ofFens^ par le m^pris das sots. 25. 
 II 6tait autrefois un honn^te homme, mais il mourut de chagrin de se 
 trouver seul au monde. 26. Les medecins se porteraient nial, si tout le 
 monde se portait bien. 27. Un homme se portait bien ; il voulut se 
 porter mieux ; il consulta son m^decin ; il mourut. 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 1. Where is George to-day ? Why has he not arrived ? It is not 
 often that we have to wait-for him. 2. Do you not know that a mis- 
 fortune has happened him? 3. I have been told nothing about it. 
 What is the matter ? 4. You remember that yesterday morning there 
 
 was a 
 lightene 
 go to th 
 of the ri 
 {tellemen 
 easy thii 
 great im 
 and he 
 had unf( 
 raining 
 making 
 when he 
 but he 
 in the w 
 were hej 
 but he h 
 allowed 
 than he 
 follow h 
 
 A Der 
 poor der 
 say any! 
 hoping 1 
 avenge Y 
 street, h 
 had r«*ll 
 thrtmgh 
 the insu 
 his pock 
 that ven 
 imprude 
 and cru< 
 
 Justio 
 camel-di 
 stantino 
 follow tl 
 camel-d] 
 had not 
 When t 
 covered 
 know hi 
 The cac 
 " What 
 entruste 
 the cadi 
 silk bal 
 can yoi 
 

 81 
 
 was a terrible storm. 5. It rained and snowed and thundered and 
 lightened. 6. It appears {parailre) that in the evening George had to 
 go to the house of one of his relatives, who lives on (de) the other side 
 of the river. 7. Usually the river can be easily crossed, but it had so 
 (tellement) swollen from the rains that had fallen, that it was not an 
 easy thing to (de) pass it even on the bridge. 8. However it was of 
 great importance to George to see (that George should see) his relative, 
 iOnd he resolved to {ae decider d) cross the bridge. 9. The current 
 had unfortunately carried away a part of it. 10. It w^as dark, it was 
 raining hard, and George, thinking that there was no danger, was 
 making haste. ] 1. He had scarcely arrived at the middle of the bridge 
 when he fell into the water. 12. He has not been drowned («c noyer) 
 but he came near (s'en fallmr) losing his life. 13. He stayed some time 
 in the water, clinging {se cramponner) to the bridge, but at last his cries 
 were heard, and some one came to his help. 14. George returned home, 
 but he has caught such a cold (s^enrhumer tellement) that he has not been 
 allowed to go out. 15. I went to see him this afternoon ; he is better 
 than he was this morning. 16. It is to be hoped that no bad results will 
 follow his accident. 17. Let us rejoice at {se rSjouir de) his escape. 
 
 m 
 
 Composition 48. 
 
 Eastern Stories. 
 
 A Dervish' 8 Vengeance. — A favorite of the Sultan threw a stone at a 
 poor dervish who had asked [to] him /or alms. The dervish did not dare 
 say anything^ ; but he pickecUup the stone and put it in his pocket, 
 hoping that sooner or later' that stone would be-of-use' to him to^ 
 avenge himself. A few days afterwards he heard a great tumult in the 
 street, he inquired'^ what was the matter and learned that the favorite 
 had xallen into' disgrace, and that the Sultan was having him led''^ 
 through the streets of the town, bound upon a camel and given-up^ to 
 the insults of the people. At once* the dervish drew the stone from 
 his pocket, but it was only to^" throW it away". I feel, exclaimed he, 
 that vengeance is never in place'* ; for if our enemy is powerful, it is 
 imprudent and senseless ; if (m the contrary he is unfortunate, it is base 
 and cruel. 
 
 Justice among^^ the Turks. — A merchant having confided to a Turkish 
 camel-driver some bales of silk to'" transport [them] from Alep to Con- 
 stantinople, set out'* with him ; but having fallen ill, he could not 
 follow the caravan, which consequently arrived long before him. The 
 camel-driver imagined at the end of a few weeks that, since'* his man 
 had not come, he had died, sold the silks and changed'^ his profession. 
 When the merchant had arrived, he sought for the camel-driver, dis- 
 covered him and demanded his goods. The knave feigned'^ not to" 
 know him, and denied ever having (to {de) have) been a camel-driver. 
 The cadi before whom the affair was carried, said to the merchant : 
 "What do you demand?" — "1 demand twenty bales of silk that I 
 entrusted'^ to that man." — " What answer do you give to that?" said 
 the cadi to the camel-driver.— " I do not know what he means" by his 
 silk bales. I have never seen or (nor) known him." " What proof 
 can you give of what you advance?" asked the cad^ of (to) the mer- 
 
 
 iiii 
 
82 
 
 chant — "No other than my word." — "You are two rascals; with- 
 draw*> from before my presence,'' said the cadi turning his back on (to) 
 them. When they had gone out, the cadi placing himself at tho 
 window, exclaimed : " Camel-driver, one word. The Turk turns \m 
 head without thinking that he had just abjured his old'^ profession. 
 The cadi has him seized, and condemns him to the bastinado'''. 
 
 ^Anything in nei;ative sentences is rien. Hdt ou tard. *aervir. *d. ^a'infommr 
 de. *en. »Cf. 186, 6. Hivr^.. *ii I'iiutant. ^^pour. ^*jeter loin de lui. ^*d propon. 
 ^*eKez. M»c me«re (199, 48) enrcmee. ^^puisque. ^^changerde, 'Veindrede (196, 40). "re- 
 mettre. >»oott/otr dire, ^ge retirer. M^'Old" in the sense of "fonner," ancien. 
 'tastonnade. 
 
 XI. The Irregular Verbs (Verbxs iRRiauLiEKs). 
 
 198. The treatment of the oonjugations of the verb advanced in 171, 172, 173, 174, 
 although the treatment almost universally followed, is without practical advantage, 
 and of little, if any, scientific value. 
 
 It is worth while, especially with a view to the Irregular Verbs, to consider briefly 
 another possible grouping of verbs. 
 
 There are in the French language two chief conjugations,* differing from one another 
 in the main only in the sing, of the pres. and past def. of the indicatives, in the past 
 participle, and in the infinitive. The terminations of these conjugations are ay follow :— 
 
 I. 
 
 s — e 
 t- -e 
 
 I; 
 
 -ai 
 —as 
 — a 
 
 ^ 
 -> 
 
 II. 
 
 —8 
 -B 
 -t 
 
 -on« 
 
 -ez 
 
 -ent 
 
 —ats 
 —ais 
 — ait 
 — iom 
 — iez 
 —aient 
 
 — t<tt)8 
 
 — i(tt)8 
 -i(M)t 
 
 "men 
 'tea 
 rent 
 
 — er, —ir. 
 
 
 .—er, —ir, 
 
 
 1 
 
 — e 
 
 II. 
 
 r,at 
 as 
 a 
 
 1, 
 
 ona 
 
 ez 
 
 ont 
 
 1 
 
 1, 
 
 r, uia 
 
 ^ 
 
 aut 
 
 <2! 
 
 ait 
 
 ions 
 
 iez 
 
 1 
 
 aient 
 
 s 
 
 ._■-'' ■■.■■■' ; 1, ; 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 •s 
 
 —8 
 
 ?i 
 
 — ons 
 
 t? 
 
 — ez 
 
 i 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 — e 
 
 —ea 
 
 —e 
 
 —ions 
 
 — iez 
 
 —ent 
 
 —a, — tt. 
 
 sae 
 
 asea 
 
 *t 
 
 asions 
 
 aaiez 
 
 saent 
 
 -er 
 
 -u(i) 
 
 -ir 
 — oir 
 —re 
 
 194. In Conjugation I., which may be termed the Conjugation in a, e, the root of 
 the verb sometimes undergoes certain phonetic and orthographical changes, which 
 
 * In the treatment of the Conjugation of the verb here outlined, the Present Participle 
 is regarded as containing the root of the verb in a purer form than the InfUiitive, and 
 is consequently taken as the point of departure. 
 
 The student of the Irregular Verbs is urged to proceed likewise from the present 
 participles, not from the infinitives ; for in so doing he will find not only that his lalior 
 will be greatly lessened, but that in the observation of the changes that the verbs 
 undei^^o, a most interesting phase of the French study will be the revealed. 
 
. 83 
 
 have been mentioned in 175. To it Itelon^r : 1. All verbn whose inflnitives end in 
 2. exieillir in present and future tenses ; offrir, ouvrir, tremillir, in the present tonse. 
 Its irregular verbs are alter, envoyer, renvoyer. 
 
 195. In ConJu}(ation II., whi(^h may bo termed the Cunjuyatum in i, u, the root of 
 Ihe verb often undergoes certain phonetic and orthographical changes, mainly of the 
 following nature. •*' 
 
 196. ConHonant Changes in the Present Tenses. When the root of the verb ends : 
 
 1. In SB, ss is dropped before consonantal terminations ; in tt, t disappears before «, 
 
 and tt before t. 
 
 paraissant (parattre, ai>pea»-) : Je parais, tu parais, il parait. 
 Datt)nt(battre, beat): Je batii, tu hate, il bat. 
 
 2. In m, 8, V, t, the consonant is dropped before consonantal tennimtuMM. 
 dormant (dormir, slr^p) : je dors, tu dors, il dort. 
 recevant (recevoir, receive) : Je reijois, tu regois. il revolt. 
 
 3. In qu, y« becomes c before «, before a consonant, or when final, 
 vainquant (vaincre, conquer) : Je vainos, Je vaincrai, vainou. 
 
 4. In gfn, gn becomes n before consonantal terminations, 
 craignant (craindre, /ear) : Je crams, tu crains, il craint ; nous craignons, etc. 
 
 5. In 1, 1 usually modifies into#t before consonantal tenninations : 8 of the ternnina- 
 tion then easily becoming iT. " 
 
 voulant (vouloir, will) : Je veux, tu veux, il veut ; nous voiilons, etc. 
 
 II. 6. In -end, there is no terminal t in the 3rd pers pres. indie. Je vends, tu vends 
 
 il vend. 
 
 7. When -iss occurs after the root it will be found (subject to 193, 1) in all tense 
 
 except the past def., the infinitive, post part., and the tenses derived from them. 
 
 finisdant (flnir) : Je finis, nous flnissons, je flnissais, etc. But ; je finis (past), Je 
 flnirai, J'ai fini. 
 
 197. Vowel Changes. When the root syllable of the verb contains : 
 
 1. e mute, e is strengthened into oi or ie befoi'e weak terminations. 
 
 recevant (recevoir, receive) : je reeols, que Je reQoive, qu'ils rcQoivent. 
 
 tenant (tenir, hold) : je tiens, que je tienne, qu'ils tiennent. ■ 
 
 2. 6, ^ becomes ie before weak terminations, 
 acqucrant (acciucrir, acquire) : J'acquiers, tu acquiers, qu'ils acquiercnt. 
 
 3. u, u becomes oi before weak terminations. . ' ; 
 buvant ( boire, drink) : je bois, tu bois, que je boive, qu'ils boivent. 
 
 4- y. ?/ usually becomes i before weak terminations, 
 croyant (croire, believe) : je crois, tu crois, que Je croie, qu'ils croient. 
 
 198. Subject to the phonetic laws mentioned above, Conjugation II. embraces : 
 
 a. Verbs in -ir, of which dormir, partir, mentir, se repentir, sentir, servir, sortir, 
 et(!., are perfectly regular. Verbs that add iss to the root (verbs of the so-called Second 
 Conjunction) are irregular according to 196,-1, 7. The Past Def. and Perf. Parts 
 are in 1. 
 
 h. Verbs in -oir. Verbs ending in e« in the root (verbs of the so-called Third Conju- 
 gation) vary from the conjugation according to 196, 2 ; 197, 1. These verbs have Past 
 Def. and Perf. Part, in u. r 
 
 c. Verbs in -re. Battre is regular except for 196, 1 ; suivre, except for 196, 2 ; 
 vainere, except for 196, 3. So also verbs in -aitre, except for 196, 1 ; 196, 7. Verbs in 
 ■oindre, -eindre, -aindre have a strong Past Part, in 4, but are regular, except as to 
 196, 4. The regular Past Def. is in i, and the Past Part, in u. 
 
 

 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 III 
 
 I.I 
 
 tli 125 
 
 Its 
 
 IB 
 
 U 
 
 2.2 
 
 IL25 i 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 <?> 
 
 *zl 
 
 V 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sdences 
 
 Corporalion 
 
 23 WIST MAIN STRIRT 
 
 WIUTIR,N.Y. UStO 
 
 (716)172-4503 
 
 \ 
 
 k^' 
 
 '^ 
 
 <S 
 
 ^^ ^Cv^'^ 
 
 
84 
 
 
 06 
 
 
 « SS »"'« S-a 
 
 
 § 
 
 ■■■a 
 
 .5 
 
 
 I 
 
 ! 
 
 60 
 
 9 
 
 e 
 
 8 
 
 'S s 
 
 S8 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 .•3 
 
 I 
 
 
 a 
 
 00 
 
 S N a 
 
 O 0) « 
 
 58 
 
 sa 
 S'3 
 
 K 
 
 B N 
 
 « 9 » 
 
 s a a 
 
 J8i5 
 
 
 s. -: 
 
 O » 
 
 > X « iH 
 
 ell 
 
 9 S P 
 
 
 ?ll III 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 H 
 
 > 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 SB O 
 CO cs > 
 
 m 
 
 <f* 
 
 gge 
 
 9 3-8 
 
 a s' 
 
 >. n a O Ctf S 
 
 •C-C £ SS5 
 
 9 V V V 
 
 So sou 
 
 9 9 9 « « 4> 
 
 888 igg 
 
 
 9 S 
 
 OB oTS 
 
 •tM JPJ <^ 
 
 « « « 
 
 I 
 
 CO ^ 
 
 fill 
 
 ■i.s-|lil 
 
 o 
 
 ! -40 A 
 
 
 
 -£ 
 
 a « 
 
 — "io 
 
 III 
 
 000 
 
 •O'O'O 
 
 09 
 
 a H. 
 O « 
 
 S9 
 
 8 N 
 
 O « 
 
 sii .a 2. 
 
 o op 
 
 'O'O'w 
 
 2l 
 
 o s s 
 
 ill 
 
 o S 
 
 III si 
 
 ill liE 
 
 -■S 
 
 l^§ £^ 
 
 «» 
 
M 
 
86 
 
 ■8 
 
 a 
 
 I 
 
 
 •lis 
 
 III 
 
 E > S 
 S S 3 
 
 O O 4> 
 
 ssa 
 
 O V 4) g: 09 
 S-a*a ^5 
 
 ■d-S-S 
 
 > ^ 
 
 as 
 
 5 N S 
 JO vX 
 
 > > > 
 
 Ch i-< 
 
 O « 
 
 P 9 9 
 
 S o o 
 
 asa 
 
 9 
 
 s ^ 
 
 ^ o 0< 
 
 g'3'3 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 III 
 
 ail hit £3^ ^? 
 
 ■a 
 
 5 s; c: 
 o v w 
 
 > > > 
 
 S S3 c3 
 
 o J « 
 
 fe 5 > 
 
 P S a 
 
 N a 
 
 e N e 
 o 0) w 
 
 u: ui ill 111 
 
 l§^ «9 
 
 3. 
 
 
 i 
 
 OD 
 
 1 
 
 ■Ifi 
 
 O'S'S 
 
 > >• > 
 
 « 3 3 
 
 > > > 
 
 $. 
 
 « CD'S 
 
 ill III ill u 
 
 p V s 
 
 pop 
 
 > > > 
 
 o li 5 
 
 
 «; 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 *G 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 IS 
 
 c* 
 
 Q 
 
 t 
 
 s 
 
 
 JS 
 
 § a 
 
 Si3 
 
 g' 
 
 2 sis? s\g 
 
 ^. >B 
 
 s ?^> 
 
 Ml iir I'la 
 
 s; 
 
 ^ 
 
 .-e 
 
 II 
 
 
m 
 
 67 
 
 ill 
 
 ass 
 
 4) 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 OS. si 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 ^ o 
 
 •S 5 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 
 S H 
 
 o o o 
 
 ? > > 
 
 •S.2.S 
 > > > 
 
 3 « 
 
 5 o S 
 
 ? t» 5- 
 
 V 0) 
 
 > > 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 % 
 
 n O V 
 
 o o o 
 
 > > > 
 
 wop 
 
 ► >• >• 
 
 «ls 
 
 00 a S 
 
 > > > 
 
 « 
 
 If 
 
 >> 
 
 © O 
 
 
 III 
 
 poo 
 
 ► ► 8» 
 
 > > ;► 
 
 OD ^ 
 S MS 
 
 IP 
 
 5 ? * 
 
 ► > ► 
 
 I 
 
 s. 
 
 -8s 
 
 00 
 
 £» 
 
 §^" 
 
 ^8 
 
 <>■»? 
 
 Isl^ tf^ 
 
 •§^l'22 
 
 ""^ja 
 
 -S <«*« 
 
 ^ 
 
 d 
 
 
 if 
 
 09 
 
 I 
 
 ■ti 
 
 s 
 
 ^^ 
 I 
 
 si 
 
 'Sbg 
 S o 
 
 mo 
 
 o v 
 ■J3S. 
 
 Ii: 
 
 ill 
 
 ■S 
 
 
 i5 
 
 ii 
 
 III 
 
 •SS 
 
 iiiiiii: 
 
 '■— .!l 
 
 !!i 
 
 l! " 
 
 ! 
 
89 
 
 s 
 
 .% 
 
 (6. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1:2 
 
 si 
 
 ^ 
 
 09 
 
 o a> 
 
 9 Pe 
 O 4> £; 
 
 a v C3 
 
 §sg tMa :s:s» -Si 
 
 r-S S ■So^ OOP -as 
 
 15-^ 
 
 o u u 
 
 ess 
 
 •crs-a 
 
 as 
 
 a B 
 
 a N' 
 
 O 4) 
 
 •58 -a 
 
 a tg- 
 
 O 0) 
 
 55^ 888 §§| PI 888 
 
 §§i 111 I 
 
 C N . 
 
 2 2 
 
 u u o u u u 
 
 s « .l.s s Sis 
 
 9 9 
 
 o-9-$ B a 
 
 S S S 
 
 ,99 
 
 a B a 
 
 CB OB CB 
 
 B B a 
 
 BBS 
 
 Pii 888 888 888 
 
 § S S 
 
 u u o 
 
 i4 
 
 S N 
 OD O W 
 
 B N 999 
 
 O « 
 
 " > > 
 ^00 
 
 % 
 
 u u u 
 
 s a B 
 
 888 
 
 '3-3 
 
 e N 
 
 B N 
 
 = s 
 
 O O 
 
 88 
 
 2"§'S 
 
 « 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 
 So O •OTS'O 
 
 _ a a e5 B a 
 
 8 B B 
 
 § 
 
 9 "9 
 
 B S 
 B B 
 
 P5 
 
 SS KBH HBH AMS 
 
 §1 888 888 888 
 
 S N ?. 
 
 O 4> V 
 
 § '^ s 
 
 w V w 
 
 
 BBS 
 
 %%% 8 8 
 
 .5. 
 
 s s s 
 
 888 
 
 OB ^ 43 
 
 5*35 :§'59 
 
 S^d 
 
 rt 5? (i^ 
 
 121 181 188 
 
 S hS 
 
 S N S 
 
 o « V 
 
 88 
 
 'SS'S 
 
 O -2 
 
 
 8 
 
 u 
 
 ^ 
 
 H u 00 
 
 3^ 
 
 
 «S 5155 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 00 
 
 &f> u 00 
 
 5« 
 
 woo 
 
 3 
 
 g ^li g&g) <c|» 
 a 3yS -fi-a-a •sS'S' 
 
 
 
 000 000 
 
 OD 
 
 •a 
 
 Oo o 
 
 5 N-S 
 o V S; 
 
 000 000 
 
 SJ?2 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 
iBBS 
 
 "ell* 2|| 
 
 2 a 
 
 •so tt 
 
 St 
 
 ■o o 
 
 el 
 "§1 
 
 OD 
 
 B 
 O 
 
 -S-« <8<&<M 'Svivs 
 
 
 B H 
 
 O 01 
 
 » w v o c o 
 
 ssa saa 
 
 o « . 
 
 > > > 
 
 -2 
 
 >^^ ^ s s 
 
 a « o 
 
 
 S ^SgfS 
 
 ■W ^ i^p 
 
 S S^. 5 s B 
 
 .SJSjS 
 
 § 
 
 £) S 
 
 •I 
 
 •9 
 
 ^!''ih!illi|:j 
 
 11 
 
 n 
 
 go gn 
 
 •§|^ ft 
 
 
 *1 5 
 
 § 
 
 JS'8'd 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 •3 ei 
 
 ^*2 
 
 i.€ 
 
 SI'S < 
 
 I 
 
 s 
 
90 
 
 :8 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 $ 
 
 ^o 
 
 Hi 
 
 i 
 
 S 
 
 M n 
 « o 
 
 Baa 
 
 1 
 
 §80 
 •cx-c 
 
 a a 
 9 ° 
 
 V 4) « 
 
 > > > 
 
 S N' 
 
 O 4> 
 
 sS 
 
 O V 
 
 S « e 
 
 ll'i ^s2 
 
 5 S » •*» j3*3 
 
 •^ s 
 
 o « 
 
 a) B N m V V 
 
 l§s ill 
 
 III -il-i 
 
 8 If^ 
 
 3" m 
 
 O V 
 
 'C-C 
 
 S S 
 
 ^ 
 
 .3 
 
 III fsllll 
 
 •C-C 
 
 I 
 
 8 
 
 s N a 
 
 .i.|.S ena -^ 
 
 a N a 
 
 S 0) « 
 
 « > > > 
 
 WW ^ 
 
 e N s< 
 
 III 
 
 S-< OB ?-< 
 
 
 
 aPio, P.AO. E hi: 
 
 — „_ at9B BuiS 
 
 • ^ JJJ §!• £.$S 
 
 III ^as i"§3 2 fig 
 
 'C'C'B SEao> geg -SjSjS 
 
 •s- 
 
 (4 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 *J 
 
 S1 
 
 :8 
 
 '/■S 
 
 00 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 -s 
 
 ^ 
 
 al 
 
 s 
 
 I 
 
 B 
 
 11 
 
 li 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 §8^ 
 
 Ill 
 
 §1 
 
 •? S ! 
 
 II 'IH -sl-s Pl ii-3 m I III «$ 
 
 O.0<Si.Ci CCC Sod SgDco-P-u^ I '§'§'3 ^" 
 
 « S « 
 
 B B B » - 
 
 'ill -p-s-j 
 
 Si5 
 
 i 
 
 •111 
 
 S N B 
 
 o a> « 
 
 Ill 
 
 > ;» > 
 
 « 
 
 §8 
 
 > > a 
 
 > > 
 
 8§ 
 
 n-§ B n 
 
 III 
 
 111 
 
 i 
 
I 
 
 tS 
 
 e 
 
 I 
 
 ii I 
 
 II 
 
 « o 
 
 U 
 
 I 
 
 1*3 § 
 " > > 
 
 » S V 
 
 o* o* o* 
 o a e 
 
 -a -a -a 
 
 > > ► 
 
 §8g 
 
 nit) 
 
 > > ^ 
 
 ii 
 
 t» > >• 
 
 CB f > 
 
 ij OB 
 
 III 
 
 
 B N C 
 O « 4> 
 P 9 
 
 »1 
 
 !II1 
 
 2-« 
 
 S 
 
 0) 
 
 •s 
 
 i 
 
 ■l^ 
 
 a 
 
 .2.2: 1 
 
 IT « 
 
 g V 0) 
 
 sal 
 
 9 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 t 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 4 
 
 §s| 
 
 u u o 
 
 O'S'S 
 
 •S 
 
 
 If si 
 
 •2 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 •3 
 
 -a) 
 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 f 
 
 3 
 
 
 ?*1 
 
 •s 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 III 
 
 I I 
 
 I 2'gi sis 
 
 i1 
 
 ,5 
 
 I l-s-l 
 
 .S 
 
 >. 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 .S3 
 
 n 
 
 II § 
 
 
 ll 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 II 
 
 e* 
 < 
 
 @ 
 
 
 B > 
 
 S S S C S -i 
 
 ^la*S 
 
 "•''11 III ill 
 
 I !l 
 
 ill 
 
 ii|: 
 II , 
 
d2 
 
 200. Index of Irregular Vkri , Simple and Compound. 
 
 (The number after the verb refers to a verb in Sec. 190, in oooordanoe with the ter. 
 minationa of which the verb so numbered is conjugated.] 
 
 \ 
 
 absoudre 
 
 abtolve 
 
 54 
 
 d^rire 
 
 describe 
 
 44 
 
 faillir 
 
 fail 
 
 13 
 
 abstenir 
 
 abstain 
 
 11 
 
 "td^croitre 
 
 decrease 
 
 42 
 
 faire 
 
 make, do 
 
 4r> 
 
 abstraire 
 
 abstract 
 
 68 
 
 d6dire 
 
 disown 
 
 43 
 
 falloir 
 
 must 
 
 31 
 
 *tacoourir 
 
 run up to 
 
 5 
 
 d6duire 
 
 deduce 
 
 87 
 
 feindre 
 
 feign 
 
 40 
 
 *taccrottre 
 
 increase 
 
 42 
 
 dufaillir 
 
 fail 
 
 13 
 
 f^rir 
 
 strike 
 
 10 
 
 accueiller 
 
 receive 
 
 e 
 
 ddfaire 
 
 umio 
 
 45 
 
 fleurir 
 
 flourish 
 
 20 
 
 aoqu^rir 
 
 acquire 
 
 8 
 
 d/tjoindre 
 
 disjoin 
 
 40 
 
 forfaire 
 
 forfeit 
 
 45 
 
 admettre 
 
 admit 
 
 48 
 
 dcmeistir 
 
 give the lie to 7 
 
 frire 
 
 fry 
 
 or) 
 
 *advenir 
 
 happen 
 
 11 
 
 demettre 
 
 2mt out 
 
 48 
 
 fuir 
 
 flee, shun 
 
 8 
 
 *aller 
 
 ffo 
 
 1 
 
 d^partir 
 
 distribute 
 
 7 
 
 K^sir 
 hair 
 
 lie 
 
 14 
 
 apparaitre 
 
 appear 
 beUmff 
 
 38 
 
 d^peindre 
 
 depict 
 
 40 
 
 Imte 
 
 21 
 
 appartenir 
 
 11 
 
 depla'-e 
 
 displease 
 
 52 
 
 induire 
 
 induce 
 
 37 
 
 apprendre 
 
 learn 
 
 53 
 
 dupourvoir 
 
 deprive 
 
 28 
 
 inscrire 
 
 inscribe 
 
 44 
 
 assaillir 
 asseoir 
 
 assail 
 seat 
 
 6 
 22 
 
 di'sappren- 
 dre 
 
 1 unlearn 
 
 53 
 
 instruire 
 interdire 
 
 instruct 
 interdict 
 
 37 
 43 
 
 astreindre 
 
 constrain 
 
 40 
 
 desservir 
 
 clear the table 7 
 
 *intervenir 
 
 intervene 
 
 11 
 
 atteindre 
 
 attain 
 
 40 
 
 deteindre 
 
 fade 
 
 40 
 
 introduiro 
 
 introduce. 
 
 37 
 
 attralre 
 
 attract 
 
 58 
 
 d^tenir 
 
 detain 
 
 11 
 
 issir 
 
 be descended 15 
 
 b^ir 
 
 bless 
 
 19 
 
 dt^truire 
 
 destroy 
 
 37 
 
 Joindrc 
 fire 
 
 join 
 
 40 
 
 boire 
 
 drink 
 
 85 
 
 Mevenir 
 
 become 
 
 11 
 
 read 
 
 40 
 
 bouillir 
 
 boil 
 
 4 
 
 d6vetir 
 
 divest 
 
 12 
 
 luire 
 
 shine 
 
 37 
 
 braire 
 
 bray 
 
 61 
 
 dire 
 
 say, tell 
 
 43 
 
 maintenir 
 
 maintain 
 
 11 
 
 bruire 
 
 rustle 
 
 62 
 
 disconvenir 
 
 deny 
 
 11 
 
 malfaire 
 
 do ill 
 
 45 
 
 oeindre 
 
 gird 
 
 40 
 
 disROurir 
 
 discourse 
 
 5 
 
 maudire 
 
 curse 
 
 47 
 
 *choir 
 
 fall 
 
 30 
 
 diejoitidre 
 
 disjoin 
 
 40 
 
 mdconnaitre f ot to recog- 
 
 oirconsorire oircumscribeii 
 
 *tai8paraitre disappear 
 
 38 
 
 
 nizp 
 
 38 
 
 ciroonvenir 
 
 circumvent 
 
 11 
 
 dissoudre 
 
 dissolve 
 
 55 
 
 m^dire 
 
 slander 
 
 43 
 
 olore 
 
 close 
 
 68 
 
 distraire 
 
 distract 
 
 58 
 
 nientir 
 
 lie 
 
 7 
 
 nommcttre 
 
 commit 
 
 48 
 
 dormir 
 
 sleep 
 
 7 
 
 m^prcndre 
 
 mistake 
 
 53 
 
 comparaitre appear 
 
 38 
 
 6bouillir 
 
 boil away 
 
 4 
 
 messeoir 
 
 be unbecom 
 
 - 
 
 oomplaire 
 
 hutnir 
 
 52 
 
 •kihoir 
 
 fall due 
 
 30 
 
 
 ing 
 
 33 
 
 comprendre 
 
 understand 53 
 
 eclore 
 
 blow, hatch 64 
 
 mettre 
 
 put 
 
 48 
 
 comprom- 1 
 mettre | 
 
 Jt^\^\t ■wvMyi'kkii ai 
 
 . .o 
 
 econduire 
 
 shoto out 
 
 87 
 
 luoudre 
 
 grind 
 
 49 
 
 compromisb »o 
 
 ecrire 
 
 write 
 
 44 
 
 *mourir 
 
 die 
 
 9 
 
 oondure 
 
 conclude 
 
 36 
 
 elire 
 
 elect 
 
 46 
 
 mouvoir 
 
 more 
 
 24 
 
 concourir 
 
 concur 
 
 5 
 
 emboire 
 
 coat(withoi 
 emit 
 
 )35 
 
 naitre 
 
 be born 
 
 50 
 
 oondaire 
 
 eond/uct 
 
 37 
 
 dmettre 
 
 48 
 
 nuire 
 
 harm 
 
 3? 
 
 conftre 
 
 preserve 
 
 56 
 
 ^moudre 
 
 whet 
 
 49 
 
 obtenir 
 
 obtain 
 
 11 
 
 conjc&ndre 
 
 conjoin 
 
 40 
 
 ^mouvoir 
 
 agitate 
 
 24 
 
 offrlr 
 
 offer 
 
 10 
 
 connattre 
 
 know 
 
 38 
 
 empreindre 
 
 imprint 
 
 40 
 
 oindre 
 
 anoint 
 
 40 
 
 conqu^rir 
 
 conquer 
 
 3 
 
 enceindre 
 
 gird 
 
 40 
 
 omettre 
 
 omit 
 
 48 
 
 consentir 
 
 consent 
 
 7 
 
 enolore 
 
 enclose 
 
 63 
 
 ouir 
 
 hear 
 
 17 
 
 constririre 
 
 construct 
 
 37 
 
 enoourir 
 
 incur 
 
 5 
 
 ouvrir 
 
 open 
 
 10 
 
 contenir 
 
 contain 
 
 11 
 
 endormir 
 
 put to sleep 
 
 > 7 
 
 paitre 
 
 graze 
 
 51 
 
 oontraindre 
 
 constrain 
 
 40 
 
 enduire 
 
 lay on a coat 
 
 paraitre 
 
 appear 
 
 38 
 
 oontrerHre 
 
 contradict 
 
 43 
 
 
 of 
 
 37 
 
 parcourir 
 
 traverse 
 
 5 
 
 contrtifaire 
 
 counterfeit 
 
 45 
 
 enfreindre 
 
 infringe 
 
 40 
 
 parfaire 
 *tpartir 
 
 complete 
 
 47 
 
 contrevenir 
 
 contravene 
 
 11 
 
 "enfuir (s') 
 
 run away 
 
 8 
 
 set out 
 
 6 
 
 oonvoinore 
 
 convince 
 
 59 
 
 enjoindre 
 
 enjoin 
 
 40 
 
 *parvenir 
 
 arrive 
 
 11 
 
 convenir 
 
 agree, suit 
 
 11 
 
 *enqu6rir(8') inquire 
 *en8oivre(8')/o«oM' 
 
 8 
 
 pieindre 
 
 paint 
 
 40 
 
 coudre 
 
 sew 
 
 39 
 
 57 
 
 permettre 
 
 permit 
 
 48 
 
 courii 
 
 run 
 
 5 
 
 entreprendre undertake 
 
 53 
 
 plaindre 
 
 pity 
 
 40 
 
 couvrir 
 
 cover 
 
 10 
 
 entretenir 
 
 entertain 
 
 11 
 
 plaire 
 
 please 
 
 52 
 
 craindre 
 
 fear 
 
 40 
 
 entrevoir 
 
 see partly 
 
 28 
 
 pleuvoir 
 
 rain 
 
 32 
 
 croire 
 
 believe 
 
 41 
 
 entr*ouvrir 
 
 ha{f open 
 
 10 
 
 poindre 
 
 sting, dawn 40 
 
 *tcroltre 
 
 grow 
 
 42 
 
 enVoyer 
 
 send 
 
 2 
 
 poursuivre 
 
 pursue 
 
 57 
 
 cueillir 
 
 gather 
 
 6 
 
 *6prendre(8') 6e smitten 
 
 53 
 
 pourvoir 
 
 provide 
 
 28 
 
 cuire 
 
 cook 
 
 37 
 
 equivaloir 
 
 be equal 
 
 27 
 
 pouvoir 
 
 can, be able ?5 
 
 *dechoir 
 
 decline 
 
 23 
 
 ^teindre 
 
 extinguish 
 
 40 
 
 pr^ire 
 
 predict 
 
 43 
 
 d^conflre 
 
 discomfit 
 
 56 
 
 ^treindre 
 
 draw tight 
 
 40 
 
 prendre 
 
 take 
 
 5L 
 
 d^ooudre 
 
 rip 
 
 39 
 
 exolure 
 
 exclude 
 
 36 
 
 prescrire 
 
 prescribe 
 
 44 
 
 d^couvrir 
 
 discover 
 
 10 
 
 extraire 
 
 extract 
 
 58 
 
 pressentir 
 
 forsee 
 
 7 
 
 pr^valoir 
 
 pn;veiiir 
 
 pr^voir 
 
 produire 
 
 promettre 
 
 promouvoi 
 
 proHcrire 
 
 provenir 
 
 querlr 
 
 rapprendrt 
 
 rasseoir 
 
 ratteindre 
 
 re boire 
 
 rebouillir 
 
 reoondulre 
 
 reconnaitn 
 
 reconquer! 
 
 reoonstruii 
 
 recoudre 
 
 reoourir 
 
 recouvrir 
 
 r^crire 
 
 recroitre 
 
 reoueillir 
 
 reouire 
 
 redevenir 
 
 redire 
 
 redormir 
 rMuire 
 r^^lire 
 refaire - 
 rejoindre 
 
 [ 
 
 1. Ih« 
 ftway ? 1 
 brother a 
 You rem 
 white hoi 
 some yea 
 7. We h 
 stream y 
 woods w 
 dress as 
 become s 
 paint BO 
 you. O] 
 died in I 
 tenir) b 
 15. Rem 
 become ( 
 became 1 
 
200. Index of Irrboulak Vkrbs {Continued). 
 
 pr^valoir 
 
 jrreoail 
 
 27 
 
 relire 
 
 read again 
 
 46 
 
 Heiitir 
 
 feel 
 
 7 
 
 prevenir 
 
 anticipate 
 
 11 
 
 reinettre 
 
 remit 
 
 48 
 
 seoir 
 
 be becoming 38 
 
 pr^voir 
 
 fvrenee 
 
 ;i8 
 
 rdluire 
 
 gleam 
 
 37 
 
 servlr 
 
 serve 
 
 7 
 
 produire 
 
 produce 
 
 6l 
 
 rciiioudvti 
 
 grind again 
 
 49 
 
 *tBortlr 
 
 go out 
 
 7 
 
 promettre 
 
 prromixe 
 
 48 
 
 rendortnir 
 
 put to sleep 
 
 
 douffrir 
 
 suffer 
 submit 
 
 10 
 
 protnouvoir 
 
 promote 
 
 24 
 
 
 again 
 
 7 
 
 80umettre 
 
 48 
 
 pro8orire 
 
 progeribf. 
 
 44 
 
 *renaitre 
 
 be bom 
 
 
 Hourire 
 
 smile 
 
 55 
 
 proveiiir 
 
 proceed 
 
 11 
 
 
 again 
 
 50 
 
 aousorire 
 
 subscribe 
 
 44 
 
 querir 
 
 seek 
 
 18 
 
 rentraire 
 
 fine-draw 
 
 58 
 
 Houstraira 
 
 subtract 
 
 58 
 
 rapprendre 
 
 releam 
 
 R3 
 
 renvoyer 
 
 send back 
 
 2 
 
 Houtenir 
 
 sustain 
 
 11 
 
 raueoir 
 
 seat a<min 
 
 22 
 
 repaitre 
 
 feed 
 
 38 
 
 *80uvenli<8e) rememher 
 
 11 
 
 ratteindre 
 
 overtake 
 
 
 repartir 
 
 set out again 7 
 
 Bubveiiir 
 
 assist 
 
 U 
 
 
 ai/ain 
 
 40 
 
 repentir (se) repent 
 
 7 
 
 autflre 
 
 suMee 
 fullow 
 
 (6 
 
 reboirn 
 
 drink again 
 
 36 
 
 reprendre 
 
 resume 
 
 53 
 
 suivre 
 
 6T 
 
 rebouillir 
 
 Iwil ofjain 
 
 4 
 
 requcrir 
 
 require 
 
 3 
 
 suroroltre 
 
 increase 
 
 4a 
 
 reoonduire 
 
 reconduct 
 
 37 
 
 r^Boudre 
 
 resolve 
 
 54 
 
 :4urfaire 
 
 overcharge 
 
 46 
 
 reconnaitre 
 
 recognize 
 
 38 
 
 resBeiitir 
 
 feel, resent 
 
 7 
 
 aurprendre 
 
 surprise 
 
 58 
 
 reconqu6rir 
 
 reconquer 
 
 3 
 
 "fressortlr 
 
 qo cut dgain 7 
 
 *aurvenir 
 
 come on 
 
 11 
 
 reoonstruire 
 
 reconntruct 37 
 
 "'ressouvenir r«caM 
 
 11 
 
 aurvivre 
 
 survive 
 
 60 
 
 reooudre 
 
 sew again 
 
 31) 
 
 restreindro 
 
 restrict 
 
 40 
 
 taire 
 
 not to tell 
 
 52 
 
 reoourir 
 
 recur 
 
 6 
 
 retenir 
 
 retain 
 
 11 
 
 teindre 
 
 4ye 
 
 40 
 
 recoil vrir 
 
 cover again 
 
 10 
 
 retraire 
 
 milk again 
 
 58 
 
 tenir 
 
 hold 
 
 11 
 
 rtcrire 
 
 rewrite 
 
 44 
 
 revaloir 
 
 return gooo 
 
 ■ 
 
 traduiro 
 
 translate 
 
 87 
 
 recroitre 
 
 grow again 
 
 42 
 
 
 eviii7 
 
 traire 
 
 milk 
 
 58 
 
 reoueillir 
 
 collect 
 
 6 
 
 *revenlr 
 
 return 
 
 11 
 
 transcrire 
 
 transcribe 
 
 44 
 
 reouire 
 
 cook again 
 
 37 
 
 revctir 
 
 reclothe 
 
 12 
 
 tranamettre 
 
 transmit 
 
 48 
 
 redevenir 
 
 become 
 
 
 revivro 
 
 live again 
 
 60 
 
 treaaaillir 
 
 b« startled 
 
 6 
 
 
 again 
 
 11 
 
 revolr 
 
 see again 
 
 28 
 
 vaincre 
 
 conquer 
 
 59 
 
 redire 
 
 repeat, cen 
 
 
 rire 
 
 lattgh 
 
 55 
 
 valoir 
 
 (m worth 
 
 21 
 
 
 sure 
 
 43 
 
 rouvrir 
 
 reopen 
 
 10 
 
 *venir 
 
 come 
 
 U 
 
 redormir 
 
 sleep again 
 
 7 
 
 saillir 
 
 jut out 
 
 6 
 
 v6tir 
 
 clothe 
 
 12 
 
 r^uire 
 
 reduce 
 
 37 
 
 satisfaire 
 
 satisfy 
 
 45 
 
 vivre 
 
 live 
 
 00 
 
 r661ire 
 
 re-elect 
 
 46 
 
 savoir 
 
 know 
 
 26 
 
 voir 
 
 see 
 
 28 
 
 refaire 
 
 do over 
 
 45 
 
 secourir 
 
 succor 
 
 6 
 
 vouloir 
 
 will 
 
 20 
 
 rejoindre 
 
 rejoin 
 
 40 
 
 seduire 
 
 sedtice 
 
 87 
 
 
 
 
 '■■■ ■ " \ 
 
 ' '. . '\ 
 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 1 
 
 ■ » i 
 
 
 
 [Verbes irrcguliera de la premiere et de la deuxl6me oonjugaiaon.] 
 
 1. I have heard say that you are goiug away to-day. Must you so 
 away? 2. ]f you consent to-it, I shall leave at five o'clock. 3. My 
 
 brother and I [we] set out this evening for the little village of , 4. 
 
 You remember that our father has acquired a house there, a pretty* 
 white house covered with vines. 5. It belonged to our uncle, but ne died 
 some years ago. 6. Since his death we have gone there every summer. 
 7. We have become very fond of country life. 8. There is a little 
 stream which runs in the meadows, where we bathe. 9. There are 
 woods where the children gather flowers and raspberries. 10. We 
 dress as ws please (wish) ; often we sleep in the open (en plein) air ; we 
 become strong and healthy during our three weeks' holiday. 11. You 
 paint so well the pleasures of your country life that I shall not detain 
 you. Open your books, however, and tinish the lesson. 12. James I. 
 died in 1625 ; Charles I., in 1649. 13. Little presents maintainYen^re- 
 tenir) friendship. 14. The wicked son will die before his father. 
 15. Remember, O man, that thou art only dust and that thou wilt 
 become dust again. 16. The mother would die happy, if her children 
 became happy. 17. Hate evil without hating evil-doers. 18. John Bet 
 
 .;:iii 
 
 I ! 
 
 II 
 
 l!:i!i!i!'!!li 
 
 I 
 
 llii 
 
out yesterday ; Charles and James set out this afternoon ; we shall 
 leave to*morrow. 19. He who lies is brave before God and a coward 
 before men. 20. M^ father returned from Eurojpe yesterday ; my 
 mother will return m the (au) sprintr. They wish my brother to 
 return (pres. subj. ) at Christmas. 21. The French assailed the town 
 while the English held firm against the Russians. 22. You run usually 
 faster than 1, but to-day I shall run as fast as you. Let us run. 2.3. 
 No, do n(»t run. I have run so much that mv heart fails me. I have 
 run over (parcourir) the whole town. 24. VVhen we opened the door, 
 we discovered the poor woman lying in a corner and badly clad. 2.'). 
 In her arms she was holding her child. She had evidentlv suffered 
 much. 26. We offered her food and wine, but nothing could sustain 
 her failing (cUfailllr) strength (forcea fem. pi. | At half-past ten she 
 died. 27. I have enquired everywhere about her, but without success. 
 28. Acquire houses, estates, fortuae, fame. I doubt that you become 
 (subj.) happier for (of) it. 29. Greece has conquered more countries by 
 (par) its books than Rome by its arms. .30. The door is half open, the 
 window is shut. Open both. 31. Help (serve to... some) Henry to 
 some strawberries, and Mary to cream. 32. We shall go by-and-by 
 (tantdt) for a {A la) walk. If you will come with us, we shall send away 
 the pa^e. 33. Let us boil some water and make [the] tea. 34. The 
 water is boiling already. I would have offered you some long ago if I 
 had known. 35. Here lies in consecrated earth an honest man whom 
 everybody hated and whom some cursed. 3G. Those who hate main- 
 tain a fire that bums them. 37. There are pupils who sleep all night 
 and rest all day. 38. A fool will never hold-out (tenir) against praises. 
 39. Never leave without saying farewell to your teacher. 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 [Verbes irr^guliera de la trQisi6ine conjugaison.] 
 
 1. Where shall we sit down ? Let us seat ourselves in {d) the shade 
 of this tree. 2. Let John and Francis sit down beside {d cOti de) me. 
 3. Beauty and genius rarely sit down lu the same seat. 4. Do you see 
 the lake yonder (Id-bas) and the river. You can even catch a glimpse 
 of (entrevoir) the other coast. 5. Who could weary (ae laaaer) of admir- 
 ing nature ? 6. Such a sight is well worth the price of our journey. 7. 
 I should like to live near here. Do you know who owns the house 
 yonder, that is for sale {d vendre) ? 8. I should know if I saw Mr. A. 
 He would be able to tell me what you wish to know. 9. This house 
 would not be worth so much as that one, but through its windows we 
 could see all the bay. 10. How much do you think that the latter 
 is worth ? 11. This one must be worth four thousand cloUars. 12. I 
 didn't think it was worth (subj. ) so much. 13. I shall & >e Mr. A. to- 
 morrow and ask him what these houses are worth. 14. Be so kind as to 
 send me the prices of them. 15. I know one thing, said Socrates, I 
 know that I know nothing. 16. There are people wno know nothing, 
 but who do not know that they know nothing. 17. One must call that 
 compound ignorance. Why should (is it necessary that) we know any- 
 thing ? Will not our parents provide for us ? 18. If you know nothing 
 you will amount to (be worth) nothing. 19. You wish to enjoy (jouir 
 
<ie) life, but you do not wiuh to work, in which you resemble the idler 
 who wishes to eat the kernel {ama:ide f.) but who is unwiliins to break 
 the stone (noj/uM)' '^^- To enjoy life one must know how to live. 21. 
 A fool neither rises nor sits down like a man of wit. 22. Ignorance has 
 never prevailed asainst science ; truth always prevails against error ; 
 enthusiasm and disinterestedness will always prevail against idleness 
 and selfishness. 23. Knowledge, too, is worth at least as much as 
 pleasure. 24. Remember what Alexander said : I am not less indebted 
 (redevabte) to Aristotle than to Philip {Philippe) my father ; if I owe life 
 to the latter, I owe instruction to the former. 25. I should ^^ke to stay 
 if I could, but I cannot. 26. Let us will, and we shall be able. 27. 
 The wise man, when he cannot do what he wishes, wisKv .. 'at he can 
 do. 28. Your teachers wish you to (that you) know and be able in order 
 that you may see what there is [of] good in the world. 29. Ah, said the 
 crow, this lesson is well worth a cheese without doubt. 30. Do you 
 think that one must (subj.) believe all the crowd says ? 31. The silence 
 of the envious crowd is equivalent to a praise. 32. But it is commencing 
 to (d) rain. Do you think it will rain (subj.) hard. 33. It has rained so 
 much that the grass is quite wet. 34. What must we do to (pour) shel- 
 ter ourselves from the stonn ? 35. We must ask shelter at yonder house. 
 You must hurry, children 36 May I ask you a favor, Henry. Be so 
 kind as to carry these books. 37. Thank you, we shall be able to arrive 
 there, — a little late perhaps, but better {il vaut miettx) late than never. 
 
 ' * ExBKCiSK 51. ':\\ 
 
 [Verbes irr^guliera de la quatri^me coiijugraison.] 
 
 I . Write, please, on a sheet of paper the following sentences. 2. The 
 beaten general is always wrong. 3. When a man conquers, people say : 
 I know Mr. So-and-So : when a man is conquered, they say : Who is 
 this Mr. So-and-So ? 4. Are you acquainted wiUi the proverb, He who 
 has drunk will drink ? What do you conclude from it ? 5. I conclude 
 from it that habit will always vanquish will. 6. That leads me to (d) 
 speak to you of Mr. H. You used to know him, didn't you. 7. I 
 knew him well, and I am still acquainted with him. 8. His doctor 
 
 Erohibited (interdire d) him wine and brandy. 9. During three months 
 e drank only milk and tea. 10. But the other day ne began to {se 
 mettre d) drink brandy and the doctor fears his death. 11. He who 
 fears death believes that death is an evil. 12. He who repents is 
 absolved from all that there is to fear. 13. Fear nothing, do every- 
 thing, and you will move the world. 14. Do to others what you 
 would like them to (that they) do {8uhj.) to you. 15. Do thy duty and 
 heaven vdll do its. 16. There are robbers who take your money (purse) 
 or your life. I have known doctors who have taken both. 17. I 
 believe in (d) doctors, but there are people who do not believe in 
 them. 18. I know no better doctor than death ; for it makes but 
 one visit and does not make you pay /or it. 19. The prophets of mis- 
 fortune say that such and such a thing is impossible. Do it, and they 
 are silent. 20. Bless those that curse you ; do good to those who 
 insult (outrager) you. 21. Bead good books, for in reading them you 
 will instruct yourself and please [to] your friends. 22. You know a 
 
man by (d) the books he reads. 23. People say of him wha joins 
 cunning to force, that he sews the fox's skin to the lion's. 24. He who 
 always says what he believes repents often of having said what he did 
 not believe. 25. People say of children who are growing a great deal : 
 111 weeds grow apace (ill weed {mauvaiae fterbe) Mways grows). 
 26. Man is bom. grows, dies. 27. Each honest donkey ^lieves 
 that he brays more melodiously than his comrade. 28. She did 
 not smile on (to) me, she laughed at (de) me. 29. Whatever you 
 say to me, I shall never believe that you were paying attention 
 to what you were saying. 30. When day dawns, when the fcun 
 shines, the flowers bloom and the waters of the lake gleam. 31. We 
 learn to (d) write well by (en) reading authors who have written 
 well. 32. You have done your theme» read it. Let the others 
 keep (/aire) silence. 33. That is well done. You have put taste and 
 sentiment into-it {y). 34. You will make much progress in your 
 studies, if your exercises are always as well done as that one. 35. 
 What authors did you read in your classes last year ? 36. We read 
 Souvestre ; this year we read Saordou ; next year we shall read Daudet. 
 .S7. The mill will never grind with the water that is past. 38. He was 
 (is) born a dreamer ; he gives himself up to {se repattre de) idle^fancies 
 {ehimires) ; he pleases (to) no one. 39. I am not what I follow,, said 
 the donkey-driver, who was following his donkey, for if I were what 1 
 follow, I would not be what I am. 40; How many men die withc%^ 
 having lived? 41. That is-sufficient. As soon as you [shall] have 
 written what I have read you, put your name at the bottom of the 
 sheet, and give it to me. 
 
 XII. AOBEBMENT OF THE VkRB WITH ITS SU9JBGT (ACGOitD. DI7 VBRBE 
 
 AVKC SON SUJBT), 
 
 201. General Bule. — The verb varies its form in accordance with 
 the person and number of its subject. 
 
 Cest moi qui ai parle. I Cest nous qui avons parl^. 
 
 Cent I'homiQb Ji a parl^. | Ce iont les hommes qui ont pari^. 
 
 202. With Oompound Subject— When the subject is made up 
 of two or more parts the verb is put in the plural. 
 
 Le fr^re et la soeur sont arrives. 
 
 The brother and sister have arrived. 
 
 Ni Tor ni la grandeur ne noua rendent 
 
 heureux. 
 Neither gold nor grandeur makes us happy. 
 Le temps ou la mort sont nos rem^de^. 
 Time or death is our remedy. 
 
 Toi et ta aoeur etes arrive. 
 Thou and thy sister have arrived. 
 Ni V0U8 ni moi ne sommea heureux. 
 Neither you nor I am happy. 
 Vous ou moi irons. 
 You or I shaU go. 
 
 Nuts.— Wb«n the compound subject containb a pronoun of the first or second person 
 the verb will a^ree with the first person rather than with the second, and with the 
 second rather than with the third. Generally nous or vou* will be used pleonostioally 
 before the verb. 
 
 Vous et moi (nous) irons. 
 Lui et moi (nous) irons. 
 Vous et lui (vous) irez. 
 
 Votre fr^re et moi (nous) irons. 
 Toi et ta oousine (vous) irez. 
 Vous et votre frere (vouB)ire9 
 
 203. B: 
 
 a. Wit 
 only with 
 
 i. The 
 of the sub 
 
 Ni run 
 Neither 
 
 Votre p< 
 Ijourja 
 
 Wlthpron 
 ou moi froi 
 
 ii. The 
 
 Uq soldi 
 A soldie 
 
 iii. L'ui 
 
 L'unou 
 Either h 
 
 Used prou' 
 L'un et r 
 Ni run E 
 
 b. The a 
 
 A 
 
 Etre wit 
 
 i. Whei 
 noun of th< 
 
 Ce sont 
 
 But : C'c 
 Je tra 
 
 NOTK 1.— II 
 remains in tli 
 
 Cest qv 
 
 NOTK 2.— U 
 than if plural 
 
 Pttt-ce 
 
 Note 8.— S 
 
 Je ne voi 
 
 ii. Whei 
 what f oUoi 
 
 Deux en 
 Two chi^ 
 
 The inierro 
 Est-ceqv 
 
 204. Wi 
 are used in 
 b. With a 
 that follow 
 quently sin 
 
 a 
 
97 
 
 203. Bxceptious. 
 
 a. With compound subjects of the third person, the verb agrees 
 only with the last of the nominatives when : 
 
 i. The predicate asserts something that can be attributed only to one 
 of the subject nominatives. 
 
 Ni Tun ni I'autre ne sera nomm^ ambaasadeur d'Angleterre. 
 
 Neither wUl be appointed English amhaeeadcr. (There is but one ambassador.) 
 
 Votre pire ou M. Blanc sera ^lu d^put^. 
 
 Yfur father or Mr. Blanc wiU be elected member of Parliament. 
 
 With pronouns of the Ist or 2nd pers. the verb is in such a case always plural : Lui 
 oumoi irons. 
 
 ii. The nominatives are synonymous or almost so : 
 
 Uq soldat et un Frangais n'abandonne pas I4chement son drapeau. 
 
 A soldier and a Frenchman does not basely desert his flag. •' •'.' '- 
 
 iii. 2/'(in oti Tau^re is used adjectively. (See 107.) 
 
 L'un ou I'autre oheval est bon. 
 
 Etther horse is good. • ' ', * .v<i. J^'^ 
 
 Used pronominally they take the verb in the singular or the plural. , , .,, - t 
 
 L'un et I'autre est (sont) bon (s). ^ 
 
 Ni l'un ni I'autre neviendra(vierdront>. ; . * % 
 
 b. The agreement of dtre with ce as subject : 
 
 A 
 
 Eire with ce as its subject become plural in the following instances : — 
 
 i. When immediately followed by a plural noun, or by a plural pro- 
 noun of the 3rd person. 
 
 Ce sont mes amis. Sont-oe vos amis ? Ce sont eux. Ce sont elles. 
 
 But : C'est son p^re et ses amis. C'est nous. C'est vous. C'est pour eux que 
 je travaille. 
 
 NoTK 1.— If the plural noun has a collective force, as in following sentences, the verb 
 remains in the singular : — , 
 
 C'est quatre heures qui sonnent d^j&. C'est trois francs qu'il doit. 
 
 NoTK 2.— Used interrogatively the verb may remain singular, when more euphonious 
 than if plural : 
 
 FQt-ce nos biens qu'il falldt sacrifler. Sera-ce nos amis? 
 
 NoTK 8.— Si ce n'est, except, is invariable : 
 
 Je ne vols personne, si ce n'est vos amis? 
 
 ii. When ce is used in place of a preceding plural noun, no matter 
 what follows. 
 
 Deux enftints parurent sur le seuil ; c'dtaient I'enfant et son conducteur. 
 Tim children appeared on the threshold ; they were the chUd and his conductor. 
 
 The interrogative phrase est-oe que is always singular : 
 Est-oe que mes amis sont venus ? Qu'est-oe que ces hommes ? 
 
 204. With a Collective Noun as Subjeot. Collective nouns 
 are used in two ways : a. With their strict and full meaning as nouns. 
 b. With a vague, partitive sense quite subordinate to the complement 
 that follows. The verb agrees with the dominant noun, and is conse- 
 quently singular after a, and plural after b, 
 
 O 
 
 iiirli; 
 
 I 
 
 
 m 
 
 '!! 1.! ! 
 
 III 
 
 liUl 
 liiilli 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 IP 
 Ii i 
 
 I Ml 
 i Vr 
 
98 
 
 a. Collective sense dominaiit. 
 
 Une troupe de soldats tormait I'avant- 
 garde : A troop of soldiers formed the 
 van-gtMvd. 
 
 Le nombre d'- ^oatre cents soldats tat 
 torm& dt^ debris du tigiment. The 
 number qf four hundred soldiers was 
 fomudfrom the remnants of the regi- 
 ment. 
 
 XjO peu, thelaokqf: 
 
 Le peu d'ainis qu'elle a la chagrine. Her 
 lack of friends grieved her. 
 
 b. Noun sense vague, partitive. 
 
 Une troupe de barbarea de3ol6rent le 
 pays. A horde of barbarians desolated 
 the country. 
 
 Nombre de convents flirent d^trdits. 
 Many convents vere destroyed. 
 
 La plupart des gens n^ligent leurs 
 Interets. Moti, people neglect their own 
 interests. 
 
 So with beauooup v. t, trop de, peu de, etc. 
 
 Le peu, the few : 
 
 Le peu de legons que J'ai pstaMont sntH. 
 The few lessons J took sufficed. 
 
 XIII. Place of tub Verb as SrsjEcr (Place du verbs et de son 
 
 SUJET). 
 
 205. General Kule. The relative place of the verb and its subject 
 in interrogative sentences has already been discussed. See 176, 177. 
 
 The subject in assertive sentences usually precedes the verb in 
 French as in English. 
 
 206. Exceptions. 
 
 1. In parenthetical clauses of the nature : Yes, he replied ; N^, said 
 the man, the subject in French follows the verb. 
 
 Out, rdpondit Hiomme, nous irons. 
 Oui, r^pondit-il, nous irons. 
 
 Cher Maxime, a reprls I'enfttat, k bientot. 
 Frappe, m'ont-il8 dit, frappe. 
 
 2. In sentences introduced by a predicate adje'itive, the noun subject 
 fi^owB the verb. 
 
 Grande f ut sa surprise. Humbles f urent d'abord leurs pouvoirs. Tel f ut le rdsultat. 
 
 3. In sentences introduced by some adverbial expressions, such as 
 ainsi, Id, ici, alora, etc., the noun subject is found after the verb, when 
 the verb is not active transitive. 
 
 Ainsi mouTut cet homme. Non loin s'^gare un flevve. Comme dit le proverbe. 
 
 4. When the sentence is introduced by certain adverbial expressions, 
 atissi, encore, au moina, du moina, d peine, vainement, peut-itre, d plus 
 forte raiaon, tovjoura, en vain, the subject personal pronouns and on 
 usually, though not necessarily, follow the verb. Should the subject be 
 a noun, a pronoun is often, though not necessarily, employed pleonasti- 
 cally» AS in the interrogative order, after the verb. 
 
 A. peine 6tait-ll sorti que.. 
 Scarcely had he gone out than... 
 
 Peut-^tre eftt-il dtoid^ Mailire Benoit d 
 attendre. Perhaps he would have pre- 
 vailed upon Master Benoit to wait. 
 
 )i. peine le soleil 6talt-il Iev6 que... 
 Scarcely had the sun risen than... 
 
 Peut-^tre 1' homme aerait-U dej& parti. 
 Perhaps the man would already have 
 departed. 
 
 6. In adjective and adverbial sentences it is often more elegant to 
 invert the order of noun subject and predicate, when the verb in the 
 usual order would stand at the end of tne sentence. 
 
 Le relieur auquel a dte oonfl^ mon Johnson. 
 La place qu' ocoupe cette ville c^l^bre. 
 
 Le lion qu'a tu6 Thomme. 
 PitQ8-n\oi p^. dem^ure M, votre fr^re. 
 
rire. 
 
 99 
 
 I- r', V ■ J ' 
 
 6. When the sentence begins with the advefbs quetque, si, tout. . qut^ 
 the noun subject follows the verb. 
 
 Qaelqae puissant que soit votre tchve, Toutes raisonnables qu'elles sont. 
 H&ivever poteer/ul your brother be. Reasonable aa they are. 
 
 7. With verbs in the subjunctive mood when que is omitted. ^ 
 
 Vive la liberty. Puiss^-Je vons aider, P^rissent les tyrans. 
 
 XIV. Complements or Certain Verbs (Complements db certains 
 
 VBRiiKS). 
 
 207. Many verbs that in English are Transitive, in French are Intran- 
 sitive, and vice verad. Many verbs corresponding in meaning in the 
 two languages differ in the jH^eposition employed before the indirect ob- 
 ject. 
 
 Verbs Transitive in Miglish that are Intransitive in French. 
 
 arriver k, 
 attenter b., 
 oonvenir k, 
 deplaire k, 
 dMoMir k, 
 se fier k, 
 importer k, 
 nuire k 
 obMr k. 
 plaire k. 
 
 reach. 
 
 attempt. 
 
 sttit. 
 
 displease. 
 
 disobey. 
 
 trust. 
 
 concern. 
 
 injure. 
 
 obey. 
 
 please. 
 
 renoncer 
 
 register 
 
 ressembler 
 
 succMer 
 
 survivre 
 
 k, 
 
 k\ 
 k. 
 
 s'aperoevoir de, 
 
 s'approcher de, 
 convenir de, 
 ae ddmettre de, 
 
 renounce. 
 
 resist. 
 
 resemble. 
 
 succeed. 
 
 outlive. 
 
 notice 
 
 (mentally). 
 
 approaoi. 
 
 admit. 
 
 resign. 
 
 douter 
 
 !;6niir 
 ouir 
 
 manquer 
 se tnefler 
 se passer 
 se nioquer 
 
 se servir 
 se souvenir 
 user 
 
 de, 
 de, 
 de, 
 de, 
 de, 
 de, 
 de, 
 
 de, 
 de, 
 de. 
 
 doubt, 
 lamtnt. 
 enjoy, 
 lack, 
 mistrust, 
 do without, 
 mock,laugh 
 at, etc. 
 use. 
 
 remember, 
 use. 
 
 209- Verbs that require different prepositions in the two languages b^ore 
 the Indirect Object. Such are : 
 
 aooabler de, 
 
 aider 
 appuyer 
 
 blamer 
 cbargfer 
 
 de, 
 
 ^' 
 de, 
 
 de. 
 
 oongratuler d^), 
 consoler de, 
 
 overwhelm 
 with. 
 
 help vfith. 
 
 aid uoith. 
 
 blame for. 
 
 charge 
 with. 
 
 congratu- 
 late on. 
 
 console 
 
 couronner de, crown with. 
 couvrir de, cover with. 
 dedomniagerde, make up 
 
 for. 
 sedivertir de, have sport 
 
 v/ith. 
 douer dc, endow 
 
 with. 
 felioiter de, congratu- 
 late on. 
 honorer de, honor with. 
 
 indemniser de, indemnify 
 
 for. 
 louer de, praise fw. 
 
 menacer de, threaten 
 
 uHth. 
 plaindre de, pity for. 
 punir de, punish for. 
 
 remercier de, thank for. 
 remplir de, Jill with, 
 
 etc. 
 
 210. Intransitive vrbs that in French require & before the Indirect 
 
 Object, being in general Verbs of Depriving. 
 
 aoheter k, buy from. infliifer k, inflict on. 
 
 arracher k, snatch from. inspirer k, inspire. 
 
 oaoher k, hide from. interasser k, interest in. 
 
 oonf^rer k, confer on. meler a, mix with. 
 d^fendre k,forbi4(&ny one), ordonner k, order. 
 
 demander k, ask. dter k, take from. 
 
 d^rober k, steal from. 
 
 emprunter k, borrow from. 
 
 II lui a vol^ un chapeau. 
 He stole a hat from him. 
 
 II a demand^ son livre, son 
 He has asked for his book, . 
 
 Je lui ai reproch^ sa faute, 
 
 pardouner k, pardon. 
 persuader a, persuade. 
 
 promettre k, promise. 
 prendre k, take away from. 
 procurer k, procure for. 
 prodiguer a, lavish on. 
 r^pondre k, answer. 
 reprocher k, reproach. 
 souhaiter k unah. 
 voler k, steal from. 
 
 I reproached him wiih hisfauU, 
 
 II a aohet^ un livre au libralre. 
 He bought a hook from the book-selUr. 
 
 pere, etc. But : U a demand^ son livre ^ son pere. 
 
 firr his father, etc. He asked his father for his book, 
 
 Je leur ai souhait^ le bonjour. 
 
 J wished them good day. 
 
 IH I- 
 
 
 |1 P' 
 
 Hi lit; 
 
100 
 
 And in general those verbs in English which have an object made 
 indirect by position. 
 
 He gave her the book (gave the book to her) 
 II lui donna le livre. 
 
 He told them that ^that to them). 
 II leur a d^t cela. 
 
 211. Faire + an Infinitive. Faire, followed by an intransitive 
 verb, requires the object to be direct; by a transitive verb to be 
 indirect. 
 
 Je r ai fait chanter. 
 / iMve made him singr. 
 
 Je lui ai fait chanter cette chanson. 
 I have made him slnfiTthis 8ongr> 
 
 The same peculiarities of construction are frequently found after 
 entendre, laisser, ouir, voir, ; 
 "PBire €iQ, do vfith : Que ferai-Je de oet homme. 
 
 212. Several verbs cannot in French have a complement in common, 
 unless the character of the complement required after each verb is 
 similar to that required by the others. 
 
 We may say : II faut honorer, estimer et respecter son p^re. .4 
 
 We shnuld honor, esteem and respect our father. 
 
 We may not say : J'honore et ob^is k mon p^re, l)eoau8e honorer requires the direct, 
 6b€ir the indirect object. Say : J'honore mon pere et Je lui ob^is. 
 
 XV. Position of Complembnts (Place des complements / 
 
 The place of the Personal Pronoun objects has already been discussed. 
 (See 156, 157, 158, 159.) 
 
 213. Other complements usually follow the verb. When of equal 
 length, the direct object precedes the indirect ; when of unequal length, 
 the shorter stands first. 
 
 J'ai achet^ un livre de votre argent. 
 Faites I'aumdne aux pauvres. 
 
 J'ai reproch^ ^ Jean sa negligence orimi- 
 
 nelle. 
 Faites du bien & ceux qui vous haissent. 
 
 214. In interrogations we say in French, as in English: Que voulez- vous ? Deque 
 avez-vous besoin ? Quel livre a-t-il perdu ? Gombien de livres avez-vous ? (Gombien 
 avez-vous de livres ?) :: : . « 
 
 Th4me 52. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the conctord and government of the verbs. 
 
 1. Ou sont mesdemoiselles Marie ei; Julie ? J'esp^re qu'elles ne font 
 pas aujourd'hui I'^cole buissonni^re. 2. L'une et I'autre sont A I'ecole. 
 3. Ge sont elles qui frappent maintenant k la porte. 4. Les voilfi qui 
 entrent. 5. Est-ce vous ou Jean, qui remporterez le prix de fran9ais, 
 Georges ? Vous et lui vous aimez le fran^ais, comme Fran^oise et moi, 
 nous aimons I'allemand. 6. Ce sera vous, monsieur, qui d^ciderez dans 
 cette affaire. 7. Du tout, c'est votre travail, vos efforts, qui d^cide- 
 ront cela. i. Julie et Marie ont remport^ tons le** prix I'ann^e derni^re. 
 9. Cette ann^eni l'une ni I'autre necherchent 4 I )S m^riter. 10. Ge Si>nt 
 les plaisirs qu'elles rechercheht. 11. Ni Jean ni moi ne les rempor- 
 terons non plus, car un grand nombre d'^ldves concourront pour les 
 prix. 12. Travaillez cependant avec constance \ vous dtes d'ancieus 
 
 qu 
 
 ^l^ves 
 thdme. 
 jamais k 
 trompons 
 mort sont 
 mal. 17 
 nerai le c( 
 m^re de 
 neur. 21 
 enfance. 
 s'approchi 
 positions 
 que ma ta 
 naient les 
 a des exer 
 enfants pS 
 nn m^dec 
 locutions : 
 qui m'ont 
 30. Nivoi 
 et des bill 
 universit^f 
 cours. 
 
 1. The 
 the mulii; 
 2. "So mi 
 the shade. 
 Leonidas a 
 (LacidSmo 
 laws. 4. 
 5. One da; 
 ended by ( 
 approaches 
 said the p 
 8. One da 
 celebrated 
 Wishing t< 
 myself on 
 beauty." 
 One day, i 
 him answ 
 water, wl 
 "you, ma 
 should sav 
 {c?ui88e) fo 
 Meeting a 
 waa doing 
 king pass, 
 wishing U 
 where the 
 
made 
 Bm). 
 
 isitive 
 to be 
 
 knson. 
 
 r- 
 
 after 
 
 mmon, 
 rerh is 
 
 direct, 
 
 i I 
 pussed. 
 
 : equal 
 length, 
 
 « oritni- 
 
 ussent. 
 
 De quo 
 :!ombien 
 
 
 le font 
 'ecole. 
 iM qui 
 an9ais, 
 t moi, 
 )Z dans 
 l^cide- 
 rni^re. 
 3e Stmt 
 empor- 
 )ur les 
 uicieus 
 
 101 
 
 ^l^ves qui devez donner I'exemple aux nouveaux. Commengons la 
 thdme. 13. La mort ne pardonne h personne. Personne ne pardonue 
 jamais & la mort. 14. Le temps passe, disons-nous, mais nous nous 
 trompons ; le temps reste, c'est nous qui passons. 15. Le temps ou la 
 mort sont nos remddes. 16. Ce sont des rem^des qui sont pires que le 
 mal. 17. Plus d'une personne agit sans r^tl^chir. 18. Je condam- 
 nerai le coupable, fAt-ce mon fils. 19. Ni cette dame ni sa kioeur n'est la 
 m^re de cet enfant. 20. II n'y a point de noblesse od manque I'hon- 
 neur. 21. Voici les lieux oil se pass^rent les jours de mon heureuse 
 enfance. 22. Napol^n attaqua la ville et s'en empara, mpjs les Anglais 
 s'approch^rent et s'empar^rent de la riviere. 23. lis sont parvenus aux 
 positions qu'ils oherchaient 4 gasner. 24. J'ai ou'i dire k feu ma mdre 
 que ma tante et moi nacquimes le mdme mois. 25. Les Grecs coistraig- 
 naient les onfants, dans les ^coles publiques, k consacrer plusieurs hemes 
 a des exercices violents. 26. Aussi voyait-on rarement pafmi eux des 
 enfants pMes, contrefaits ou maladifs. 27. Dans Florence jadis vivait 
 nn m^decin, c^l^bre assassin, dit-on. 28. Distinguez entre ces deux 
 locutions : G'est un de mes proofs qui m' a ruin6, et C'est un des proems 
 qui m'ont ruin^. 29. Son am^nit^, sa douceur charme tout le monde. 
 30. Ni vous ni moi ne connaissons I'avenir. 31. Ge n'^tait pas de For 
 et des billets de banque qui manquaient ; c'^tait du pain. 32. Aux 
 universit^s du Canada un grand nombre de jeunes gens suivent les 
 cours. 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 
 1. The Persians wishing to frighten the Spartans, told them that 
 the multit<ude of their arrows was such that it could hide the sun. 
 2. "So much the better," replied- the Spartans," we shall fight in {d) 
 the shade. 3. This inscription was read, it is said, on the tomb of 
 Leonidas and his companions : Passer-by {passant), go tell Lacedemonia 
 {LacSdSmone) that we are the soldiers who have died here to obey her 
 laws. 4. Socrates, like many men, had a wife whom he had to obey. 
 5. One day after having overwhelmed him with abuse {injurea)^ she 
 ended by ( par) throwing a bucket of water on his head. 6. His friends 
 approached him to laugh at his misfortune. 7. "Did I not tell you," 
 said the philosopher cooly, "that after the thunder rain would come." 
 8. One day Talleyrand was sitting (seated) between Mme de Stael, the 
 celebrated writer, and Mme R^camier, the celebrated beauty. 9. 
 Wishing to please the ladirs, the diplomatist remarked : "I congratulate 
 myself on my good-fortu^^.e to {de) tind myself seated between wit and 
 beauty." 10. " Yes, and neither is yours," added Mme de Stael. 11. 
 One day, to punish Talleyrand for some remark, Mme de Stael made 
 him answer this question : "If Mme R^camier and I fell into the 
 water, which would you save?" 12. "Oh!" answered Talleyrand, 
 "you, madame, you know everything, you know how to swim; I 
 should save Mme R^camier. 13. Henry IV., in a hunting-expedition, 
 (cluMse) found himself separated from his guards and courtiers. 14. 
 Meeting a peasant seateo by the roadside he asked him what he 
 wa» doing tnere. 15- " I have come," said the peasant, " to see the 
 king pass. 16. "If you will mount behind {en coupe)" said the king, 
 wishing to have some sport with him, " I will take {conduire) you 
 where the king is." 17. " How shall I be able to recognize the king?" 
 
 1 
 
 ill tli 
 
 i 
 
 
102 
 
 aaked the peasant on-the- way (rAemin/aMcmO. 18. "When all [shall] 
 have their heads bare," replied the horseman, "he will have-his-hat-on 
 {Stre couvert).'* 19. Scarcely had the king said that than a number of 
 knights appeared on the road. 20. Great was the surprise oi: the 
 pea4Mut wneu he noticed that they all took-their hats-off {ne dUcouvrir). 
 21. "Which is the king?" asked Henrjr of his companion. 22. 
 "Zounds {'mafoi)V* said the peasant, "it is you or I, for there are 
 only the two of uh «^ith our tiats on (we two who have (pres. subj.) onr 
 hats on the head)." 
 
 Composition 54. 
 
 Stories. 
 
 A PtamrU's Honesty. — During the Thirty Years' War, while the 
 French were making themselves masters^ of a part of Oermany, a 
 French cavalry captain was ordered (183) to' go out foraging'. Not far 
 from the valley where the troops were, he saw a poor hut. Approach- 
 ing it, he found at the door an old man, whom he asked to' indicate to 
 him a field where he could have his horses graze. " In a moment,*" 
 replied the old man. After a quarter of an hour's march, they reached 
 a neld of barley. " There is what we want," said the captain. " Wait a 
 moment," answered his guide, "and I shall show you a field that will 
 make up [to you] for your delay. At last they reached another barley 
 field. The troop dlsmount^ and mow the grain. But the captain 
 asks his guide why he had made his soldiers bring their horses so far, 
 as the first field was better. ''That is true, sir," responded the old 
 man, simply, " but it was not mine." 
 
 Anecdote. abotU Dumas. — One day a French count, worth millions', 
 but not at all well-read, yet desirous of making for himself a name 
 in literature, wrote to Alexander Dumas to propose to him to' write 
 (make) a drama together. You will compose the drama alone, and I 
 shall pay for all the expenses alone. Your name will figure bemde' 
 mine, and you will have all the profits to indemnify you for your 
 work, for I work only for glory. You and I would be able to do that 
 together," he said in ending ; "already I can congratulate you on the 
 success of our work." "8ir," said Dumas in reply, "I am not 
 accustomed to have a horse and a donkey hitched to my carriage. I 
 must therefore renounce the honor that you have just proposed." The 
 couut replied: " Mr. Dumas, I take note of your refusal to' unite our 
 literary labors. You are free, I admit, not ^o' understand the advant- 
 ages they would confer on you, but in' the future remember not to call 
 me a horse." 
 
 ^g'emparer. ^alUr au fourage. ^de. *a I'instant. hnette pied a tarre, W, 6. 
 "*& edti de. %. 
 
 XVI. Tenses of the Indicativk (Temps de l'indicattp). 
 
 1. THE present indicative (PRESENT DE l'INDICATIP). 
 
 215. The Present Tense represents : 
 
 1. V^'^hat is in progress or in existence at the present time. 
 
 J«Mi lit le journal, Ce gatqon eat heureux. 
 
 John reads the newspaper. That boy is happy. 
 
 Jean lit les joumaus (tepuia longtemps. John has been reading the newspapers for a 
 
 long time. 
 
 Nora.-! 
 certain phi 
 where in B 
 
 
 11 y a deu 
 Toronto. 
 
 We have be 
 years. 
 
 Coinbien d 
 
 How long J 
 
 are still : 
 
 2. Ap 
 
 Crdtait le 
 terreurs qii 
 
 SiresB^a ; a 
 tirar^ (fra 
 
 3. An 
 
 Je pars oe i 
 I leave this 
 
 4. Afi 
 {slialli CO 
 
 SI, whet 
 
 216. Tl 
 The Fas 
 The sphe 
 
 217. 1 
 action or 
 must ah 
 period of 
 
 J'ai parl^ 1 
 
 / spoke I 
 
 man. 
 
 NOTK. — J 
 
 animmedi 
 
 218./I 
 
 occurrinj 
 (duratioi 
 is repres 
 ring an i 
 
 a. Je aortt 
 
 I was 
 
 wer 
 
 Carthaj 
 
 Cartha 
 
 NOTBl. 
 
lod 
 
 Nora.— It will be observed in the last example that the Present must be used with 
 certain phrases in French, if the action or state belongs to present as well as past time, 
 where in EnKlish a Present Perfect is employed. Compare the following : 
 
 II y a deux ans que nous demeurons k 
 
 Toronto. 
 We have been living in Toronto for two 
 
 years. (And are still livingr there). 
 
 Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous lisez ? 
 How long have you been readivy f (You 
 are still reading). 
 
 But: Nous avons demeur^ deux aas 4 
 
 Torqnto. 
 We lived two years in Toronto. (We live 
 
 there no longer). 
 
 Combien de temps avez-vous lu ? 
 How long did you read f (You have ceased 
 reading.) 
 
 2. A past, to give vivacity to the narrative : 
 
 C^tait le soir d'une t&te nublique. . . .Tout t coup (suddenly), une de ces inexplioables 
 terreurs qui f rappent de rolie (madness) les multitudes s'abat (descends) sur les rangs 
 preset ; ou crie, on se pr^ipite : les plus faibles tr^bu ohent (stumble), et la foule 
 egar^ (frantic) les ^orasent (crush) sous ses pieds convulsifs. 
 
 3. An immediate future : .. 
 
 Je pars oe soir k cinq heures. 
 I leave this evening at five. 
 
 Je suis & vous dans un instant. 
 / am at your service in a moment. 
 
 4. A future, after si, if: S'i) viennent, faites-Ie-moir savoir. If they 
 (eihaU) come, send me word. '. ...Vf^ 
 
 81, whether, may take the future : Je ne sais s'ils viendront. >...'>■ 
 
 2. THR PAST TENSES (temps passes). ^ : . = / 'V 
 
 216. The Simple Past is represented in French by three tenses : (1) 
 ThePass^ind^fini; (2) the Imparfait; (3) the Pass^ d^fini. 
 The sphere of each of these tenses it is important to understand, 
 
 217. The Fast ludefillite may be used to represent any simple 
 action or event that has occurred in any time whatever in the past. It 
 must always be employed to denote the taking; place of actions in a 
 period of time not yet entirely elapsed ; as, this year, this morning. 
 
 J'ai parl^ k I'homme. I J'ai parl6 ce matin k I'homme. 
 
 / have spoken to the man. ' I spoke this morning to the 
 
 I man. 
 
 Nora.— As the Present for the Future, so the Past Indefinite is sometimes used for 
 
 an immediate Future Perfect : Atteudez, J'ai fini (for : J'aurai fini) dans un instant. 
 
 218. The Imperfect adds to the notion of an action or state 
 occurring or existing in the past, the notion of the (a) incompleteness 
 (duration) or (6) frequency of such action or state. The action or state 
 is represented either (a) as permanent, or else, if transient, (h) as occur- 
 ring an unlimited number of times (habitually). 
 
 J'ai parl6 hie^ k I'homme. 
 / spoke yesterday to the 
 man. 
 
 b. D^s que je me levais, j'allais me pro- 
 
 mener. 
 As soon <M / used to rise, I uud to go for 
 
 a walk. 
 J'^tais toujours heureux quand vous 6tiez 
 
 Chez nous. 
 / always was (used to be) happy vA«n 
 
 you were at our house. 
 
 NoTB 1.— With phrases introduced by il y a, & peine, depuis, the French would 
 
 a. Je sortais au moment que vous entriez. 
 / was going out at the moment you 
 
 were coming in. 
 Carthage ^tait sur le bord de la mer. 
 Carthage was on the sea-coast. 
 
 M I 
 
 I 
 
 1 ! 
 
 
 iiiMrl" 
 
 1 
 
 11 '" 
 ! in 
 
104 
 
 also use the Imperfect to denote an action in •progreaa in the Past, though English 
 usage demands the Pluperfect : 
 
 J'y 6tal8 & peine trois mois que 
 
 / had been been there scarcely three 
 months when.... 
 
 Je n'dtais que depuis trois Jours A Ath^ncs 
 
 quand.... 
 / nad been in Athens but three days 
 
 when.... 
 
 Note 2. — The Imperfect may be used with el expressing a condition (accord- 
 ing to rule, for the action is not represented as completed) : 8'il venalt, Je le 
 verrais. But ei, whether, may require the Imperf. Fut. (Conditional) : Je ne savais 
 pas s'il vlendralt. 
 
 NoTK 8.— The Imperfect is often employed in introducing quotations, etc., to sug- 
 gest that the quotation is general or else characteristic of its author : Les femmes 
 disalt Mile de Scud^ry, sont coquettes quand elles sont belles. 
 
 219. Tbe Fast Definite represents an action or state as having 
 
 occurred or existed in some definite period entirely elapsed. Yesterday, 
 
 last week, last month, last year, etc., would be definite past periods in 
 
 the sense of the rule ; while to-day, this week, this month, etc., would not 
 
 be. (See 217.) 
 
 Je lui parlai hier. Je lui parlai Tannic demi^re. (But : Je lui ai parld 
 oe matin.) 
 
 NoTK. — It will be noticed that the sphere of the Past Indefinite and that of the Past 
 Definite coincide as to definite past periods. Je lui ai parl6 hier ; je lui parlai 
 hier. In general the Past Indefinite is much more frequently employed than the Past 
 Definite. The former is to be preferred in colloquial language ; the latter is more 
 customary in narration, especially in historical narration. 
 
 220. The Imperfect and the Fast Definite in Narration. 
 The Imperfect (1) fills in the description, while the Past Definite (2) 
 narrates the successive events. 
 
 " Les olochers des villages oix. les matelots i^taient nds et qu'ils 'reconnaiu- 
 saient au loin dans les campag^nes, les iremplisaaient d'all^gresse. Mais quand le 
 vaisseau *entradans le port et qu'ils 'vlrent sur les quais leurs amis et leurs parents 
 qui leur 'tendaient les mains, il Sfut impossible d'en retenir un seul & bord." 
 
 221. The Flus-que-parfait and Fass^ ant^riear.— These 
 perfect tenses correspond to the English Pluperfect. The Plus-que- 
 par/avt is used much more frequerUly than tJie Passi antSrieur. Like the 
 Imperfect, the former must be used to denote habitual or incomplete 
 actions or states (218). The PassS antirieur is found with words that 
 
 indicate some definite point of time : 4 peine Cine, scarcely, .... 
 
 when ; aussitdt (d^s) que, as soon as ; quand (lorsque), when ; 
 ne pas plus tdt, no sooner, etc. 
 
 Dto que Je lui avads parld^, 11 sortait. I D^s que Je lui euB parl^t, il sortit. 
 Dis que je m'dtais lev^,* Je sortais. | D^s que Je me fus levdt, Je sortis. 
 ^Habitual action. tCompleted, definite action. 
 
 THB FUTURE (FUTUR). 
 
 222. Futur. The Future tense in English corresponds with the 
 French FiUur, except that with certain conjunctions in English the Pre- 
 sent tense is used with a future sense, while in French the Future is 
 with reason required. 
 
 
 Aussitdt que Je le verrai, Je lui dirai cela. 
 As soon as /see Aim, I shall tell him tJiat. 
 
 Parlez, tant que vous voudrez. 
 Tant que le monde durera. 
 
 liMFutu 
 
 Tu ne tu 
 Shalt thou 
 
 223. F 
 for the CO 
 
 Aussitdt qu 
 
 221 F 
 
 use of th 
 ImpeHect 
 the futur 
 latter regi 
 
 Compai 
 
 Je dilia s 
 J'^taiss 
 
 II est cei 
 Ildtaitc 
 
 II jure q 
 II jura c 
 
 225. O 
 
 ally are e: 
 were rich 
 express C( 
 perfect te 
 Thedausi 
 Antlsrior J 
 Imperfect 
 
 a. Sijesul 
 
 S'llafai 
 
 S'il a fa 
 
 vou 
 
 Ifheh 
 
 do 
 
 Nons 1.- 
 
 in the Impc 
 
 Qtiand ^n 
 
 NOTB 2.— 
 
 really the I 
 
 when the o 
 
 «' On ei 
 
 "La pi 
 
 " Si lea 
 TSt 
 
 Inverted 
 
 * The err 
 Hoed in Fi 
 sarily in th 
 fais, louez- 
 the Pres. I 
 Moreover i 
 Ji€titis8ilr 
 position in 
 
M 
 
 Six day» 
 Similary we employ the Futur anUfrkUir' 
 
 The FxUtnrpfimnt repMaeiito anihipcratlve in stteh senteiiMa aa : 
 
 Tu ne tuera« pas. Thou ihalt not kill. Tu travailleras alx Jouin. 
 8htUt thou labor. 
 
 223. Futur ant^zieur. 
 for the oompleteil action : 
 Auwitdt que Je 1' aural vu, Je reviendrai. At 8oon as I have seen him, I shall return. 
 
 (the so-oallbd conditional.) 
 
 224i FutuF impaj?fait and Futuv plus-que'-pavfb/it. TUe 
 use of the Future and Future Anterior differs only fPom tUe use of 
 Impei'fect and Pluperfect Future in this ; while the former tenses regard 
 the future action or state from the point of view of the present, the 
 latter regard the action or state from the point of view of the past. 
 
 Compare : ' ';• v 
 
 Je ElUiS 8tv qu'il viendra. J am «tm ihat he vrill come. 
 J'^tals nUr qu'il vlendrait. / teas sure that he would come. 
 
 II est certain qu'il le fera. It is certain that he toUl do it. 
 
 II 6tait certain qu'il le ferait. It was certain that he tvould do it. 
 
 II Jure qu'il ira. He promises that he will go. 
 
 U Jiua qull Irait. ae pfomised that he would go. 
 
 22S. Ck>nditioned Glauses. Hypothetical aetions or statw natmu- 
 
 ally are expressed by past tenses both m English and French (eft : It I 
 
 were rich, Si f^tais riche; If I did that. Si je faiaais cela)'; thmigh'tb 
 
 express conditions of fact both languages may use present- or p H a w nfr' 
 
 perfect tenses (If he is here, S'il est ici ; If he has done, S'U a/att cela). 
 
 The clauses dependent on the present would take (a) the Present or 
 
 Anterior Future, while those dependent on the past would take (5)/the 
 
 Imperfect or Pluperfect Future. 
 
 Si Je suis riohe, je serai heureux. 
 
 S'il a fait cela, il sera puni. 
 
 S'il a fait oela, il aura fait plus que 
 
 a. 
 
 vous. 
 If he hcus done that, he will have 
 done more than you. 
 
 b. Si I'dtais riohe, je serais heureux. 
 S'il faisait oela, il serait puni. 
 S'il avait fait oela, il aurait ftdt 
 
 plus que votIK 
 if he had done that, he would 
 
 have daub'm&re tUanyoa. 
 
 iToni 1.— With quand, quand mdme, e^en if, the oonditioninor clause is also 
 in the Imperfect or Pluperfect Future. 
 Qtiand <m6nie) j'lrais, je ne le verrais pas. Though I should go, I should not see him. 
 
 NbTB2.— The Second Form of the Pluperfect Future (Gonditionnelpa88^)/-whicfif)itf« 
 really the Pluperfect Subjunctive, is frequently" employed for the Pint' Voraa; ^igfMKMly*' 
 when the condition is not expressed. 
 
 " On edt dit un portrait de oes vieux h^ros; ...& Versailles.'' 
 " La presence de Robert eflt 6t4 pour lui une garantie." 
 
 "Si les Titans eussent ohass^ du del Jupiter, les pontes eUdsent Ohiuiiiflrieir' 
 Titans." 
 
 Inverted : " E{lt-il 6t6 plus fort, il fCit tombd de m^me." 
 
 Had he been stronger, he uiould have fallen aU the same. 
 
 *T1ieerror in looking upon the Imperfect and'Pluperfect Future as the Conditional' 
 Moed in French is manifest when we observe that the conditioned olattM Is- not' rleMis^ 
 sarily in that mood at all. In : Sil vient, je le verrai, we have a Future •; in : Stiiltf 
 fats, louez-moi, we have an Imperative ; in: Je veux qu'il lefasse, s'il vient, we hav»' 
 the Pres. Subj. ; in: Je voudrais qu'il le fit. s'il venait, we have an Imperf. Subli* 
 Iforeover a sentence in the 'Conditional' is not necessarily oondltlcAial at' all. 
 Jf4tiiiss^r qu'il viendrait. Its formatl<m from an lodloati v« ' tthise likcmis€r lOWIiiS AUP 
 position in the conjugation of the verb. 
 
 'i', 
 
 l!i-i: 
 
 I Mil 
 
 II! llii h. 
 
 
 l!i 
 
106 
 
 SS6. The Futures in Buphemlsms.- From a f'icllng of respect, deference, 
 reierve, or from a desire to avoid harahness, tlie vari)U« Futures are sometimea 
 employed euphemistically for present or past tenses. 
 n le lui aura dlt. 
 
 He told it him, I sup- 
 po$e. 
 
 8i vous n'avez pas r^ussi. o'est que vous n'aurez pas ^tudld. 
 If you have not guceeeded, the teuton it beeaiue yoi\ (pro- 
 bably) have not studied. 
 
 Je voudrais bien savoir oela. 
 / should like to know theU. 
 
 Oseral8-.1e vous demander cela ' 
 Might I (dare) atk you that ? 
 
 Nora 1.— Allied to this use, is the use made of the Imperfect or Pluperfect Futures by 
 A speaker who wishes not to commit himself to the truth of statements alleged. 
 
 Belon oe qu'on dit, la guerre seralt d6J& d^clar^e. 
 Aeeording to tohat they ray, imr has aueady been declared. 
 
 XVII. The Imperative (Impbratif). 
 
 227> The Imperative is the mood of command. It has only three 
 forma, similar to the corresponding parts of the Present Indicative. 
 (With Hre., 170; avoir, 171; savoir, 199, 26; and sometimes vouloir, 
 199, 29, the Imperative forms have been taken from the Subjunctive.) 
 
 parle, speak (thou) ; parlous, let us speak ; parlez, speak (you, ye). 
 
 The forms for the 1st sing, (rare) and 3rd persons are only forms of the subjunctive. 
 
 Que Je ne vous retlenne pas. ( Je veux, J'ordonne) Qull parle, Quils parlent. 
 Let me not detain you. Let him ^peak, Ut them speak. 
 
 NOTB 1.— Verbs ending in a vowel in the 2nd pera. sing. Imperative, add a 
 euphonic s before the vowel of en and y : Cherches-en. Vas-y. 
 
 NoTB 2.— The Ist pers. pi. is ofU.^n employed with the force of a 1st sing. ; when, 
 
 however, any parts in agreement with the understood flubjeot must remain singular: 
 
 T&Cl:ons de me remettre. Let me try to compose myself, 
 
 Voyons quej'examine votre langue. Let me see till I examine your tongue. 
 
 TuftME 55. . 
 
 Translate. Comment on the tense of the verbs. 
 
 1. 1>ans la leyon d'hier nous avons eu quelques contes. Voulez-vcus que 
 je vous en fasse d'autres. 2. Veuillez nous faire ce plaisir ; nous en serons 
 charm^. 3. Vous aimez les contes mieux que les le$ons, c'est Evident. 
 4. Nous avons des lefons tous les jours, mais il y a longtemps que nous 
 n'avons eu de contes. 5. Si vous manquez la le$ou, comment pourrez- 
 vous apprendre le fran^ais. 6. Faites-nous des histoires en fran^ais ; 
 nous apprendrons beaucoup en les ^coutant. 7. Eh bien, nous nous diver- 
 tirons au8sit6t que nous aurons fini nos devoirs. 8. II faut d'abord faire 
 la le^on ; puis, s'il y a du temps, nous aurons les contes. 9. Frenez vos 
 oahiers, ^crivez les phrases qui suivent. 10. S^ ie pars demain, je vous 
 le ferai savoir ; si vous partez, faites*le-moi savoir. 11. La vie, disait 
 Socrates, ne doit Stre que la meditation de la mort. 12. Dans I'flge 
 d'or les hommes vivaient dans I'innocence et le bonheur. 13. Le pares- 
 seux travaille-t-il, les moments lui paraissent des heures ; s'amu8e-t*il 
 les heures lui paraissent des moments. 14. L'Angleterre compte que 
 chaque homme fera son devoir. 15. Les gardes disent en avoir vu 
 se cUsser trois. D'autres disent en avoir vu sept ! . . . . de sorte 
 qu'il pourrait bien n'y avoir personne. 16. L'^tymologie, disait 
 Voltaire, est une science oil les voyelles ne sont rien et les 
 consonnes fort peu' de chose. 17. Kuth r^pondit : Ne me prie point 
 
 de tela 
 je moui 
 la main 
 1608 le 
 Huron 
 tard au: 
 maison 
 a dit 
 les phrc 
 
 ?ne del 
 •our fii 
 Tun tir 
 signifies 
 
 24. 
 jamais 
 ch6vres 
 mdme f 
 oassaiei] 
 dans li 
 loup lea 
 chdvres 
 
 1. Y< 
 
 what I 
 
 tell th( 
 
 means, 
 
 them. 
 
 ber tha 
 
 it is a ' 
 
 lated V 
 
 will be 
 
 well t< 
 
 his 8oi< 
 
 treat, \ 
 
 Berwic 
 
 sol'lier 
 
 marahs 
 
 genera 
 
 a f unei 
 
 One of 
 
 ironica 
 
 much) 
 
 Spanis 
 
 a litth 
 
 a atrai 
 
 who V 
 
 atone, 
 
 frozen 
 
 not t< 
 
 claim( 
 
 tie-up 
 
107 
 
 l:i 
 
 
 { 
 
 de te laisser ; oar j'irai oil tu iras, et jo demeurerai oii tu demeureras ; 
 
 1'e mourrai oil tu mourras, et j'y serai ensevelie. 18. Diog^ne tendait 
 a main k une statue pour s'accoutumer, disait-il, au refus. 19. £n 
 1608 le Fran^ais Cham plain vint en Am^riquo, d^oouvrit les lacs 
 Huron et Eri^ et fonda la colonic du Canada que Louis XIV c^da plus 
 tard aux Anglais. 20. II y a des homnies qui noettraient le feu a la 
 maison de leur voisin pour se faire cuire un oeuf & la noque. 21. Un sage 
 a dit : Les crimes secrets ont les dieux pour t^moins. 22. Expliquez 
 les phrases : Battez le fer pendant qu 41 est chaud, Un tiens vaut mieux 
 que deux tu auras, Revenons 4 nos moutons, Passons au deluge. 23. 
 rour finir noire ^tude des temps de 1' indicatif je vous lis deux passages, 
 I'un tir^ d'AIphonae Daudet, I'autre de Lamartine. Notez bien la 
 signification des temps qu'oo y emploie. 
 
 24. "Monsieur Seguin n'avait 25. " Le prieur salua I'^tranger, 
 
 'i' Ml 
 
 caressa I'enfant et s'informa des 
 circonstances qui les forfaient.. . .H 
 voyager & travers les routes d^tour- 
 n^es de TEspagne. Colomb ra- 
 conta sa vie obscure et d^roula ses 
 pens^es au moine attentif." 
 
 jamais eu de bonheur avec ses 
 ch^vres. II les perdait toutes Je la 
 mdme faf on : un beau matin elles 
 oassaient leur corde, s'en allaient 
 dans la monta^ne, et Id-haut le 
 loup les mangeait. . . .C'^taient des 
 chdvres ind^pendantes." ;^ . 
 
 Exercise 66. ' ' 
 
 1. You wish me to (that I) tell you some stories to-day ? That is 
 what I have been doing for a long time. Will you translate them if I 
 tell them ? We would translate them if they were easy. .3. That 
 means, I suppose, that if they were not easy, yon would not translate 
 them. 4. We could not translate them if they were difficult. 5. Kemem- 
 ber that Napoleon did not have in his dictionary the word " impossible"; 
 it is a word that should not be found in yours. 6. You always trans- 
 lated well the sentences I read you. 7. They were easy, the stories 
 will be difficult. 8. Even if thev should be difficult, you would do 
 well to {de) try them. Let us begin. 9. La Rochejaquelin said to 
 his soldiers at the hour of battle, "If I advance, follow me ; if I le- 
 treat, kill me ; if I die, avenge me." 10. You remember that M<»rshal 
 Berwick defeated (bcUtre) the English and Spanish at Almav.*. II. A 
 soMier once saluted the marshal in Spanish. 12. " Comrpae," said the 
 marshal to him, "where did you learn Spanish?" 'At Almanza, 
 general. " 13. A professor of rhetoric was reading one day to his pupils 
 a funeral sermon {oraison funibre) on Marshal Turenue by Fl^chier. 14. 
 One of the scholars, struck by the beauties of the composition, said 
 ironically to one of his comrades, " when shall you be able [en] to do as 
 much?" 16. "When you are Turenne," replied the other. 16. A 
 Spaniard who was travelling in Holland was spending a winter's day in 
 a little village of {du) Brabaut. 17. The dogs, which but rarely saw a 
 a stranger in the village barked and ran after him. 18. The Spaniard, 
 who wished to frighten them, stooped {se baiaaer) in order to pick up a 
 stone, [and] to throw it at them. i9. There had been a frost (it had 
 frozen) aud the stone stuck {tenir) so firmly {fortement) that he could . 
 not tear it away {atTacher). 20. "The wretched country," he ex- 
 claimed, "where people let loose (Idcher) the dogs, and where they ' 
 tie-up (attiicher) the stones 1" 
 
 iif, 
 
 !i' 
 
 i||| I'll '<: 
 
 iiin 111 1 i I 
 
 ■I'lii'i 
 
 ill III 
 
 Mil, 
 
 i I 
 
lOB. 
 
 Composition 57. 
 Stories. 
 
 V, Cortez, on* his roturn to Spain, was coldly received by the Emperor 
 Oharies V. One day he places himself suddenly before the monarch. 
 " Who are you ?" the emperor asks him in' a haughty tone. " The 
 man who gave you more piovinces than your ancestors [ne] left you 
 cities," replied Cortez. 
 
 2. The arms of Germany, you know, are a t^'o-headed' eagle and' 
 those of the former^ republic of Venice a winged* lion. An emperor 
 of Germany asked an ambassador of Venice once what country winged 
 lions came from. The ambassador, without hesitation, replied, "They 
 come from the country where eagles have two heads. 
 
 3. Ffed<hriok II., after his defeat at KoUiu, meeting one of his soldiers 
 whose face was quite scarred*, said to him roughly : " Jn what tavern 
 did you have yourself slashed that^way*?" "In a tavern, sire," replied 
 the soldier, '* where yon paid the reckoning*." 
 
 4. A wood'cutter went one day to the wood. He looked on all sidto 
 with an e^nbarrassed air, as if he were seeking something. Whereupon** 
 the trees, with a curiosity that some other creatures possess, asked him 
 with eagerness what ho was looking for. The wood'outter replied that 
 he needed a bit of wood to make a handle for* his axe. The good trees 
 deliberated, and finally it was resolved with'' a unanimous voice" that 
 the woodcutter should have a piece of ash as good as they could find in 
 the forest. Scarcely had he received it and ailiusted the handle to his- 
 axe^ when he began to cut [to] 'right and [to] lefc, so that in*' time he 
 felletl the finest and largest trees in the forest. It is said that then the 
 oah spoke thus to the ash : Brother, there is the fruit of our foolish 
 generosity. 
 
 Shall we say with La Fontaine, "We cry in vain**, inntttitude will- 
 not be any the (en) less in'^ fashion," or with Tourguenen, " Since the 
 world has been a world— and it is a long time since then** — Gratitude 
 and Beneficence have never met ?" 
 
 >d *tU. *See 79, note. *ci-devant (invariable), ^volant (flyin(r\ ^eouturi. ^balO' 
 firer. ^ainsi. *ieot, •o»urgi«oi. ^^eominwie mix. Voix commune me&n^ axi ordinary^ . 
 vvigar voicek ^hivee le. "Use avoir beau crier. i<d la, ^^de cela. 
 
 
 XVIIIt Uhs of the Indicative and Subjunctive (Emblot de l'indio- 
 
 ATIF BT DU SUBJONCnF). 
 
 227;. 1^0^*1^ jui^o^v^ lu^^d **^ French is so subtle, so admirabloai 
 nwaTfS'Of expression, its use is so •different from English use, that if 
 is of the utmost importance to understand its fundamental charactlsr. 
 
 lQ;tbe«entencefri (a) (/ knew) thafhe is here and (b) (I ivish) he "W^ere ; 
 h^-ei the fundamental distinction between the Indicative and Subjunc- 
 tive appears. In (a) he is here, we express what we regard as a fact': in 
 (b)^ toere here, we are conscious of a. difference between the assertion of 
 hifrbeingfheve and the fact of hia being here. This- oonaciousnea*, oi 
 difference between our assertion and the objeotive reality ot ijbe- aMOW 
 
 a. 
 
iiMiJ 
 
 'iiMiis the loMii df ahnott «11 qmm of the Subjtinotive in French. Bonftrk 
 
 the application of the principle. 
 
 Compare : (a) Je orois qu'il fait cela, / Mieve that he is doing fhat^ 
 with (6) J'ordonne qu'il fasse cela, / order that he do {him to 
 do) that. 
 
 In a, we assert what is, according to our belief, objective fadt,— Ae is 
 doing it ; in 6, we do not mean he is doing that, or that he will neces- 
 sarily do it, — the thought of his doinc that remains as a subjective 
 conception, which may never 'be realized m fact, for he may never do 
 what I order. 
 
 Compare : (a) Je sals qu'il est ioi, / know he is here. 
 
 (b) Oroyez-VOUS qu'il vienne, Do you think he will come 
 
 in a, we state by the Indicative that he is here, and that the faot is 
 known to the speaker ; in b, although our senten<:e is affirmative, we 
 snake no assertion that he will eome ; we are conscious that he may luU 
 aomei' which consciousness of difference between the assertion and the 
 reality is manifested by the Subjunctive. 
 
 This fundamental distinction seized, it becomes a mere matter of inter- 
 pretittion as^ wiien the Indicative or when the Subjunctive mood is to 
 be employed. 
 
 iiii 
 
 ! I 
 
 S3S, a. Subordinate statements 
 would be presented by us as facts if 
 we used tne verbs of : 
 
 KRowiMo : Je sals qu'il vlent (est vexiu, 
 
 viendrai). 
 BBLiEviNo : Je crols qu'il vlent (vien- 
 
 dra). 
 Hoptne : J'e«pdre qu'il viendra. 
 DBCLARiNo : Je die qu'il viendra. 
 TniNKiNQ : Je pense que cela est vrai, 
 
 etc. 
 
 b. Subordinate statements would 
 show merely a subjective concep- 
 tion of the action after the vevbe 
 of: 
 
 rEARiNo : Je Grains qu'il ne vienne. 
 commanding: J'ordonne qu'il vienne. 
 wisniNo : Je veux qu'il vienne. 
 DorBTiNO, DINYINO : Je dOUte qu'il 
 
 vienne. 
 pRKVRNTiNo : J'empdolxe qu'il ne 
 
 vienne, etc. 
 
 n. 
 
 229. So also with Impersonal verbs : 
 
 a. II est certain (Btr, olair) qu'il vient. 
 II semble que cela est vrai. 
 
 II paralt qu'il vlent. 
 
 b. II faut (il est n^oessai'/e) qu'il vienne* 
 or II seniblait queje sentisse mon coeur 
 s'^purer. (To express doubt or re- 
 serve as to the assertion.) 
 II convient (il est juste, etc.) qu'il 
 Vienne. 
 
 m. 
 
 230. If we question the truth of a statement, or if we deny the truth 
 of it, such statement in general cannot be presented as a statement of 
 fact ; the question or the denial in eeneral admits the consciousness of 
 difference between the assertion and the fact. The Subjunctive conse- 
 quently is usually employed after Interrogations and Denials. 
 
 a. Je crois qu'il est ioi. 
 J'esp^re qu'il viendra. 
 Je ais que cela est vrai, etc. 
 
 Croyez-vous qu'il'soit ioi? 
 
 Esp^rez-vous qu'il vienne. 
 
 Je ne dis pas que cela soit vrai, etc. 
 
 II :l 
 
no 
 
 NOTR.— The use of the Indicative in subordinate statements after Interrogations is 
 very frequent. The oases in which the Indicative would be employed are : 
 
 a. Questions about statements of fact : 
 
 Savez-vous qui est cet homme ? Do you know what that man is f 
 Croyez-vous qu'il viendra ? Do you believe he wiU come ? (I believe it.) 
 
 b. Questions that are merely rhetorical : 
 
 N'est-il pas Evident que c'est la m^me chose ? 
 
 l» it not evident that it is the game thing f (It certainly is evident, etc.) 
 
 Oii avez-vous vu que les gens mines ont d«s amis ? 
 
 Where have you seen ruined men with friends ? (They have none.) 
 
 IV. 
 
 231. With adjective and adverbial sentences (a) the Indicative indi- 
 cates the result that has been attained or that certainly vnll be attained, 
 while (b) the Subjunctive expresses a result desired, sought after. 
 
 a. J'ai trouv^ une revraite oVi je suis 
 
 tranquille. 
 J'irai dans une retraite oi!i Je serai 
 
 tranquille. 
 J'ai un dictionnaire qui COntient mille 
 
 pages. 
 J'ai trouv^ quel()u'un qui peut me 
 
 rendre ce seri'ice. 
 
 b. Je cherche une retraite oil je sols 
 
 tranquille. 
 J'irai dans une retraite oi!i je sois 
 
 tranquille. 
 Je cherche un dictionnaire qui con- 
 
 tienne mille pages. 
 Je cherche quelqu'un qui puisse me 
 
 rendre ce service. 
 
 V. 
 
 232. lu the sentences depending on superlatives, the fundamental 
 principle is still to be seen. When I say : / shall lend you the best book that 
 I have, I do npt mean to claim that 2 have the best book. Yet on a strict 
 analysis of the sentence that inference — if the Indicative force of the 
 verb be present — must be drawn ; for the relative is by substitution the 
 best book, and the sentence must consequently stand : / shall lend you 
 the best book which (best book) I have. This is obviously not the sense 
 the speaker wishes to convey. Hence in French the Subjunctive 
 interposes for the purpose of modifying what otherwise would be the 
 absolute force of the superlative. 
 
 C'est le meilleiir homme que je con- 
 
 naisse. 
 Neron est le premier empereur qui ait 
 
 persdcut^ I'eglise. 
 
 Je suis le seul qui vous connaisse. 
 
 C'est U la moindre recompense qu'on 
 lui doive. 
 
 NoTB.— The Indicative mood is, however, frequently found aftei Superlatives, when, 
 according to its nature, it expresses positive fact, or statements that the speaker 
 puts forward as statements of fact. 
 
 Vouloir ce que Dieu vetit est la seule science qui vous met en repos. 
 To wish what Ood wishes is the only science that gives us tratiquility. 
 
 VI. 
 
 233> With verbs that denote emotion — pain, joy, astonishment, 
 fear, etc., the subordinate sentence containing the cause of the emo- 
 tion naturally falls into the Subjunctive, as something looked upon for 
 the moment from an entirely subjective point. 
 
 Oftei 
 ceded 
 tory of 
 
 ^tes 
 Je 
 
 Je m'^tonne qu'il soit id. 
 Je suis bien aise qu'il soit ici. 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne soit ici. 
 
 Je suis f&cn6 qu'il ne soit paa ici. 
 
Ill 
 
 Often the dependent sentence with a verb of feeling, etc., is pre- 
 ceded bv ee, when it requi.\;8 the Indicative, being merely explana- 
 tory of we substantive pronoun thjt precedes. 
 
 £teB-vou8 f&oh^ de ce que vous dtes en retard. 
 
 Je me plains de ce que voua dtes en retard. ■■^^ ' • : < 
 
 vit. :.'':'■-:'■.... 
 
 234. The Conjunctions will be found to follow closely the general 
 principle. 
 
 With the conjunctions de manih'e que, de eorte que, tellement quef 
 tither (a) the Indicative may be employed to make statements of positive 
 act, or (6) the Subjunctive to make statements of subjective concep- 
 ions : 
 
 either \a) «ue xuuicauve ma 
 fact, or {h) the Subjunctive 
 tions : 
 
 a. II s'eat conduit de mani^re que tout le 
 monde est satiafait. 
 II agira de sorte que tout le monde sera 
 satisfait. 
 
 235. ft' Assertions would habitu- 
 ally be presented as facts after the 
 conjunctions : 
 
 k mesure que, 
 in proportion as. 
 
 d^s'que, 
 as soon as. 
 
 ainsi que, 
 as well 08. 
 
 lorsque, 
 when. ./ > 
 
 apres que, 
 c^ter. 
 
 8i,* 
 
 if. 
 
 aussitdt que, 
 wsoon as. 
 
 parce que, 
 because. 
 
 autant que, 
 an much as. 
 
 pendant que, 
 while. 
 
 oomme, 
 as. 
 
 quand, 
 when. 
 
 attendu que, 
 eonsiderim that. 
 
 puis que, 
 since (of reason) 
 
 peut-Stre que, 
 perhaps. 
 
 tandis que, 
 whiist. 
 
 depuis que, 
 since (of time). 
 
 vuque, 
 seeing that. 
 
 b. II faut se conduire de mani^re que tout 
 le monde soit satisfait. 
 II faut agir de sorte que tout le monde 
 soit satisfait. 
 
 b. Assertions would habitually 
 show merely a subjective concep- 
 tion of the action after the con- 
 junctions : 
 
 k mointf que, 
 unless. 
 
 afin que, 
 
 (in order) that. 
 
 avant que, 
 before. 
 
 Tquoique, 
 < bien que, 
 V encore que, 
 though. 
 
 de peur (crainte) que 
 lest (for fear that). 
 
 jusqu' h. ce que, 
 tiU. 
 
 loin que, -, 
 
 far from. 
 
 non (pas) que, 
 not that. 
 
 pour que, 
 (in order) that. 
 
 pourvu que, 
 provided that.' 
 
 quel... que, 
 whatever. 
 
 qui... que, 
 whoever. 
 
 quoi que, 
 whatever. 
 
 sans que, 
 vnthout. 
 
 si... que, 
 however. 
 
 soit aue, 
 whether. 
 
 suppose que, 
 supposing that. 
 
 *Qi may take the Subjunctive with pluperfect tenses. 
 
 236. Que in place of other CorJ unctions. —As gu* is used very frequently 
 to avoid the repetition of other conjunctions, such as Mm qv^, depuis que, parce que, 
 quand, the Indicative or the Subjunctive will be found after que thus used, 
 according as the conjunction tor which it is substituted takes the Indicative or the 
 Subjunctive. But que holding the place of si is followed always by the Subjunctive. 
 Quand on est riche et qu'on est belle, on ne I'ignore pas. 
 Quoique vous soyez riche et que vous soyez belle, vous n'^tes pas air-.^e, 
 S'il revenait et qu'il vous dit cela, vous seriez fort embarrass^. 
 
 I i 
 
 I 
 
 i! 
 
 :f 
 
 
 I ! 
 
112 
 
 XIX. Use of ixhe Tensbs ob the Subjunctiy.e (Emploi dbs temps 
 
 DU subjonotif). 
 
 237> The use of the tenses in the Subjunctive corresponds closely to 
 that of the tenses of the Indicative. It must be kept in" mind, however, 
 that as there is no Future form for the Subjunctive, the Present and 
 Past Subjunctive do duty for the Future and Future Perfect, while the 
 Imperfect and Pluperfect are used for the Imper ect and Pluperfect 
 Future (Present and Perfect Conditional). 
 
 Je crt^ins qu'il n*' aiUe pas. 
 /fear he will not gro 
 
 OeitcrsignaiB qu41 n'all&t pas 
 ./ !fiMkS9d he would not 90 
 
 Je cralns qu'il ne* soit parti avant V0U8. 
 / fear he will be Grone uejore you. 
 
 Je craiflrnais qu'il ne fClt parti avant moi. 
 1 feareahe would be gone before you. 
 
 * The use of ne after expressions of fear, etc., is explained in 264, 3, a 
 
 3SSi, Conclitioiie.d Clauses Subjiinntive tenses by this twoHfoid 
 use can exj>ies!8 conditioned clauses in the same manner as the Indicative 
 itoues. 
 
 J/eared e^at Ae would do t'Hf he came. 
 Je craid^nais qu'il ne le fit s'il venait. 
 
 The SiuBJUNO/iVE m Optativb Sentbncbs. 
 
 -ttS. 'The itse of the Subjunctive in optative sentences, with the {^^veming verb 
 understood, is quite frequent. 
 
 Ainei soitiU. 
 So bt.it. 
 
 . M r.'-" 
 
 J>ieu soit lon^. 
 Sod be praised. 
 
 Vive le roi I 
 
 (Long) live the king ! 
 
 Th&me 58. 
 
 Puissiez-vous Stre heureux. 
 May you be happy. 
 
 Translate. GQOiment on the mood and tense of the verbs. 
 
 1. N«u8 c(«nmen9ons aujourd'hui la difficile mais int^ressante ^tude du 
 Bubjonctif. Je regrette que tons les ^l^ves ne soient pas presents. 
 
 2. Savez-!vou3 od est M"« A ? C'est dommage qu'clle ne soit pas ici. 
 
 3. Expliquez, aussi vite que possible, I'empioi du subjonctif dans les 
 phrases ,que je vais vous lire. 4. Je ferai ce voyage k condition que 
 vous viendrez itvec moi. 5. Faites aux autres ce que vous voudiiez qu on 
 vous fit. 6. Ce que vous dites \k prouve qu'il eat riche mais ne prouve 
 pas qu'U soit honnete. ?• Quelque puissacts qu'ils soient je ne les 
 crains pas. %. L'homme est un strange animal ; je ne suis pas le 
 prenuer qui l!ait dit. 9. Quels que soient les hommes il faut vivre avec 
 eux. 10. Je suppose que les hommes soient ^ternels sur la terre. 
 11. Croyez-vous que I'fime est immortelle ? 12. Donnez-moi des livres 
 que je puisse lire, des conseils que je puisse suivre. 13. S'il est vrai 
 .^u'lHom^e ait fait Virgile, c'est son plus bel ouvrage. 14. Je ne nie pas 
 4u'il ait raison. 15. Vous avez fait de sorte que votre ami est irrit^ ; 
 iadtes de .aorte qu'il soit content. 16. C'est la plus belle He, ^orivit 
 ii/olomb, ^ue jamais I'ceil de Thomme ait contempl^e. 17. Quoi que 
 VOU0 .^envies;, ^vitez la bassesse. 18. II aurait fallu que les livres 
 fussent vendus. 19. II n'y a que les grands coeurs qui sachent combien 
 il y a de bonheur k pardonner. 20. Qui etit pu seulement pens^ que les 
 ann^ eussent d^ manquer k une jeunesse qui semblait si vive. 21. Les 
 mortels quels qu'ils aoient aont ^gaux devant la mort. 22. Loin que 
 
 mon cat 
 ne croisl 
 24. J'^cj 
 manquei 
 partira. 
 27. 11 n' 
 une posi| 
 dain, il 
 rien. 2^ 
 nous 
 31. Socrsj 
 le lui pel 
 neladi 
 plus grs 
 34. L'A^ 
 voyez-vo 
 qu k ce 
 th^me qi 
 fasse obs 
 * Que aft 
 
 1. I at 
 
 all atteni 
 
 very wel 
 
 me them] 
 
 is not y 
 
 have evei 
 
 [that] yo 
 
 you thin] 
 
 doubt th 
 
 astonishi 
 
 difficult. 
 
 taphysici 
 
 that met 
 
 wish [thi 
 
 I shouk 
 
 child. ] 
 
 the Indi 
 
 tive witi 
 
 its raisi 
 
 Subjunc 
 
 philosop 
 
 not say 
 
 sentence 
 
 practice 
 
 ences ^o 
 
 it becon 
 
 whatev« 
 
 may be, 
 
 I do r 
 
 Labor ii 
 
113 
 
 !!l!f 
 
 'BMPS 
 
 ly to 
 ever, 
 and 
 3 the 
 rfect 
 
 fold 
 
 tive 
 
 i^erb 
 
 »ux. 
 
 du 
 ts. 
 ci. 
 es 
 ue 
 cm 
 i^e 
 es 
 le 
 
 3C 
 
 B. 
 
 is 
 u 
 
 I'S 
 > 
 
 t 
 
 e 
 
 9 
 
 mon camarade soit savant, il devient de jonr en jour plus ignorant. 23. Je 
 ne crois pas qu'il etA f^gi de la sorte, s'il en eM prdvu les cons^uences. 
 24. J'^cnrai ^ mon ami malade, dii8s4-je (quand m4me je devxais) 
 manq[uer la classe. 25. Qu'il perde son ;procto ou qu'il le gaf^ne, il 
 partira. 2f. Voulez-vous qu'on diae du bien de vous ? n'en diteis point. 
 27. 11 n'est gu^re de p^re qui pretende que son fils ne doive pas oocv^per 
 une positiox^ sup^rieure k la sienne. 28. Par ma foi ! dit M. Jour- 
 dain, il y a plus de quarante ans que je dis de la prose sans que j'en ausae 
 rien. 29. Etudions pendant que vous sommes jeunes, c'est le mieux ^ue 
 nous puissions faire. 30. Attendez k me louer que* je llaie m^ati^. 
 31. Socrate disait adieu tons les soirs k ses amis, ne sachaut pas si la mont 
 le lui permettrait le lenderaain. 32. Si tu veux qu'une chose soit s^or^te, 
 ne la dis pas ; si tu ne veux pas qu'on la sache, ne la fais pas. 33. Le 
 plus grand mal qu'on puisse souhaiter k I'avare, c'est qu'il vive longtemps. 
 34. L'Angleterre compte que chaque homme fera son devoir. 35. Ne 
 voyez-vous pas qu'il est ^uatre heures ? D6fendez-vous qu'on sorte jus- 
 qu k ce que la le9on soit termin^e ? 36. C'est la demi^re phrase du 
 th^me que je vienb de troduire. 37. C'en est assez. Sortons avant qu'il 
 fasse obscur. 
 
 * Que after attendre has the foroe of till. 
 
 ' :^ ^ ■ Exercise 59. 
 
 1. I am waiting till you are ready, Miss Louisa. As soon as we .ave 
 all attentive we shall begin. 2. I fear I have not prepared my leason 
 very well to-day, sir. I trust that if I make mistakes you will pardon 
 me them. 3. Why should you need (/o/Zoir) to make mistimes ? That 
 is not your habit. 4. To-day's lesson is the most difficult that I 
 have ever studied. 5. I am surprised at your saying that ; [it] may he 
 [that] you are mistaken, though you say that it is very difficult. 6. J>o 
 you think, Charles, with Miss Ijouisa, that the lesson is difficult ? .7. I 
 doubt that there is a more difficult one in French grammar. 8. It is 
 astonishing that you are both agreed (d'acoord) that the Subjunctive is 
 difficult. I do not think it is. 9. I fear I do not understand very well jne- 
 taphysics (la m^taphysique). 10. You take for maxim, don't you, Charleci, 
 that metaphysics are not suited {convenir d) to children ? 11. I do ned; 
 wish [that, etc.] you to think that that is what I mean. If I said that 
 I should condemn myself. I do not wish anyone to call me a 
 child. But is there no Subjunctive that has no metaphysics ? 12. it is 
 the Indicative that you desire, perhaps. In-order-to use the Subjunc- 
 tive with intelligence it is necessary [that, etc.] for one to understand 
 its raiaon d'etre ; without that, I do not believe tha*^ one can use the 
 Sul)junctive with certainty. 13. I fear I must turn («e/iire).a German 
 philosopher in order that I may continue my study of Ftencdi. 14. £)e 
 not say that — although you could become something worse — for your 
 sentences show that you understand all you are saying. 15. It is 
 practice that is wanted. 16. Then give us, please, some difficult sent- 
 ences 'O translate before oui^lesson is over. 17. Make haste then, lest 
 it become late. 18. Translate, Charles : I doubt that you will succeed 
 whatever you do. 19. Whoevei* you are, whatever your talents 
 may be, however poweiful (so powerful as be, etc.) your friends may be, 
 I do not believe that you will succeed, unless you learn to labor. 
 Labor is the only means that one has in-or4cr-to succeed. 20, It is 
 
 !, '' 
 
 "^ 
 
 ill 
 
 1 !, 
 
 
 .,■ 'I ! 
 IIP 
 
 ii 1 1 
 
 m' 
 
114 
 
 better for [that etc.] one to have much industry and few talentc than 
 many talents and little industry. 21. It is doubtful that the ancients were 
 more industrious than the modems. 22. The fear that he would not 
 study has always tormented me. 23. As long as people are workint; at 
 the social edifice, the inhabitants are badly lodged. 24. When Socrates 
 was having a house built ^lis neighbors criticised it ; each judged that it 
 would be too small. " Would (might-please) to heaven," cried the philo- 
 sopher, "that I could fill it with true friends." 25. Shortly before 
 Socrates died some one came to him, wept, and said, "Then you will 
 die innocent ?" " Would you prefer me to (that I) die guilty ?" asked 
 the philosopher. 26. A rich man is said to have complained that 
 Providence had not had sleep sold in the market. 27. A lawyer once 
 died very poor, and some one wondered that a man of law {droit) should 
 have so few effects. " But he had few causes ! " answered another. 
 
 Composition 60. 
 
 Louis XI V. and his Madrigal. 
 
 I must* write you a little story, which is q''ite true and which will 
 amuse you. The king has lately^' been making verses ; MM. de Saint- 
 Aignan et Dangeau are teaching him how he must^ set about it'. He 
 made the other day a iittle madrigal that he himself did not find any 
 too pretty. One morning he said to Marshal de Gramniont : " Mar8hal^ 
 I wish^ you would read this little madrigal, and would tell me if you 
 have ever seen so silly a one : because people know that for-some-time' 
 I have been fond of verses, there is not a aay that I do not receive some 
 of all kinds." The marshall, after having read, said to the king : " Sire', 
 your majesty judges^ all things divinely well : it is true that that-is^ 
 the most foolish and piost ridiculous madrigal that I have ever seen." 
 The king be^an* to laugh, and said to him : " Is it not so^^ that the man 
 who made it is very silly i*?" "Sir, it is impossible to give him 
 an[y] other name." "Well"!" said the king, "I am delighted that 
 you have spoken to me so honestly" about it: 7" made it." "Ah, 
 sire, what treason ! Let your majesty give it back to me ; I have read 
 it too quickly." " No, marshal, first thoughts are always the most 
 natural. The king laughed^^ much at this folly, and everybody thinks 
 that that is^ the most cruel thing that one can do to an old courtier. 
 [As] for me, who always like making'* reflections, I should like the 
 king to make some on-that-point^'' and judge how far he comes (how 
 much there is lacking'^ that he) from ever knowing^' the truth. 
 
 ^falloir. *depui9peu. *s'y prendre. <U8e the polite address : monsieur le mar4ehal. 
 ^Say: wish that you read, etc. *sire. ^uger de. Hoild. ^se mettre a. ^^»rai. *^fat. 
 ^*cA bien. ^^bonneinent. "151, e. i^nre de. ''Say : to make, ^''la-dessus. ^^s'en 
 faUoir. ^^eon'tuiUre. 
 
 XX. The Infinitive (De l'infinitif). 
 
 1. THE BARE INFINITIVE. 
 
 240. The bare Infinitive in French is used : 
 
 a. As subject or predicate nominative : 
 
 Trop parler nuit. I Adieu, te quitter, c'est mourir. 
 
 Too much speakiny does harm. 
 
 Farewell, to leave thee is to die. 
 
 b. Asaci 
 (1) As in El 
 
 apercevoir, 
 
 devoir, 
 
 ecouter, 
 
 entendre, 
 
 faire, 
 
 ffvlloir, 
 
 laisser, 
 
 oser, 
 
 pouvoir, 
 
 re^arder, 
 
 voir, 
 
 vouloir, 
 
 (For the m 
 auxiliarie 
 
 Note 1.- 
 infinitive w 
 infinitive : 
 
 II aime mie 
 
 Note 2.- 
 meditate oi 
 
 III 
 
 e. In app 
 
 Naitre, 
 
 d. In vag 
 
 Voir pajf< 
 See page 
 
 241. a. 
 that den< 
 tive, to d 
 
 s'abaisser, 
 
 s'accorder, 
 
 aider, 
 
 s'appliquer 
 
 apprendre, 
 
 s'appreter, 
 
 s'attendre, 
 
 avoir, 
 
 avoir peine, 
 
 chercner, 
 
 concourir, 
 
 Also afte: 
 hair, hate ; 
 tarry. 
 
 Je ne m'abi 
 / shall not 
 
 NOTB. — i 
 
 Je 
 /( 
 
115 
 
 1 I 
 
 b. Ab a oomplement to certain verbs : 
 
 (1) As in English after ■ 
 apercevoir, perceive. 
 
 devoir, 
 
 ecouter, 
 
 entendre, 
 
 faire, 
 
 fflloir, 
 
 laisser, 
 
 oser, 
 
 pouvoir, 
 
 re^arder, 
 
 voir, 
 
 vouloir. 
 
 must, should. 
 
 hear (listen). 
 
 hear. 
 
 make {have). 
 
 must. 
 
 let. 
 
 dare. 
 
 can 
 
 wateh{look at). 
 
 see. 
 
 will, wish. 
 
 (For the most part model 
 auxiliaries.) 
 
 (2) After verbs of motion ; 
 
 acoourir, 
 
 aller, 
 
 courir, 
 
 descendre, 
 
 envoyer, 
 
 mener, 
 
 rentrer, 
 
 retourner, 
 
 reveiiir, 
 
 venir. 
 
 hasten. 
 
 go. 
 
 run. 
 
 descend. 
 
 send. 
 
 lead. 
 
 re-enter. 
 
 return. 
 
 come back. 
 
 come. 
 
 But : venir de, to have just ; 
 venir k, to hiappen to. 
 
 (3) After : 
 
 avouer, coTj/ess. 
 
 oroire, think, believe, 
 
 daigner, deign. 
 dmrer(or d«) desire. 
 espiter(orde)hope. 
 s'imaginer imagine. 
 parattre, seem. 
 pr^f^rer, 'prefer. 
 pr^tendre, tntend,pretend 
 
 reconnaitre, acknowledge. 
 sembler, seem. 
 savoir^ know how to. 
 
 souhaiter unsh. 
 
 NoTK 1.— aimer mieux, to prefer, valoir mlexiz, to be better, take the bare 
 infinitive when one infinitive follows, but after que they usually take de with a second 
 infinitive : 
 
 II aime mieux rester ici que d'aller \k. He prefers staying here to going there. 
 
 Note 2.— Penser in the sense of intend takes the bare infinitive; meaning to 
 medttote on, penser takes d ; 
 
 II pense partir k cinq heures. | II p«nse k partir. , 
 
 c. In appositions of the nature of the following: — **; 
 Naitre, souffrir, mourir : Voil^ notre histoire en troismots. -^ . 
 
 d. In vague commands, as in foot-notes, advertisements, instead of the Imperative : 
 
 Voir page 32. 
 See page SH. 
 
 Pour conditions s'adresser k .• , 
 
 Edouard Bernard, 
 - - ' \ Rue St. Joseph, 7, Quebec. 
 
 2. THE TNFINITIVK WITH A. 
 
 241. O" The primary meaning of ^ is direction towards. Hence verbs 
 that denote Striving or Tendency will be followed by ^ before the infini- 
 tive, to denote the object, purpose, destination of thie action. 
 
 s'abaisser, 
 
 s'accorder, 
 
 aider, 
 
 s'appliquer 
 
 apprendre, 
 
 s'appreter, 
 
 s'attendre, 
 
 avoir, 
 
 avoir peine, 
 
 chercher, 
 
 concourir. 
 
 Also after : aimer, like ; covlter, cost ; se divertir, amuse o.s. ; s'entendre, be expert ; 
 hair, hate ; se plaire, delight ; s'obstiner, persist ; prendre plaisir, take pleasure ; tarder, 
 tarry. 
 
 Aidez-le & descendre. 
 Help him down. 
 
 Note.— fttre, not used impersonally, usually takes &. * ' 
 
 Je suis lb ^crire. C'est facile & faire. 
 
 / am writing (familiar). That is easy to do. 
 
 stoop. 
 
 consentir, consent. 
 
 exciter. 
 
 excite. 
 
 agree. 
 
 conspirer, conspire. 
 
 se fatigu-v. 
 
 weary o. 
 
 aid. 
 
 contribuer, contribute. 
 
 instruire, 
 
 instruct. 
 
 apply o.s. 
 
 convier, invite. 
 
 inviter. 
 
 invite. 
 
 learn. 
 
 se determiner, rescue. 
 
 mettre. 
 
 put. 
 begin. 
 
 prepare o.s. 
 
 employer, employ. 
 
 se mettre. 
 
 expect. 
 
 enoourager, encourage. 
 
 montrer, 
 
 show. 
 
 have. 
 
 engager, induce. 
 
 persev^rer, 
 
 persevere 
 
 have difficulty. 
 
 enseigner, teach. 
 
 pousser. 
 
 urge. 
 
 seek. 
 
 tssayer(orde) try, endea- 
 
 reussir, 
 
 succeed. 
 
 co-operate. 
 
 vor. 
 
 servir. 
 
 serve. 
 
 Je ne m'abaisserai point & me Justifier. 
 / shall not stoop to justify myself. 
 
 I! i 
 
 ! ir 
 
 
116 
 
 6. Adjeotives that take & with their Noun objeot will take 4 with the Inflnitive. 
 
 See 88. 
 
 Ce bois est iiropre & brtiler. C'est un paysagre agfrdable k voir. 
 
 Thia veood is fit for burning. It is a landscape pleating to look at. 
 
 e. The Infinitive with.& is also used as a descriptive adjunct .to nouns. 
 
 Maison & loner ou & vendre. Un faomme k oraindre. Du bois k brfller. 
 
 House to let or for sale. A man to be feared. Firewood. 
 
 d. It is alio used after certain prepositional pbraaeu: de mani^ire &,<o cw to; 
 1ll8qu!4, even to, as far as to ; 
 
 II faut agir de maniere k se faire aimer. 
 
 Wt mutt act in suah. a way as to make ourselves loved. 
 
 8. THE INFINITIVE WITH DE. 
 
 242. The chief uses of the preposition de are to express : 
 
 . (a) A rdstion df identity or possession,; (b) a relation of aiiigin,; 
 (c) a relation of separation. The Infinitive consequently mill be 
 ^preceded by de after expressions ihst signify any of these fnnda- 
 ' mental relations. 
 
 a. Identity or poaseasion after nouns : ' ' "* 
 
 L'ert de planter. 
 
 The art of plarUing. 
 
 J'ai I'honneur de vous'saluer. 
 
 2 have the honor to wish you good day. 
 
 Ce n'est^pas la peine d'en iMurler. 
 It is not worth while speaking gf it. 
 Le.plaieir que J'ai de vous voir. 
 ThepUastire I have to see, you. 
 
 b. A relation of ori^n, after verbs that denote a.personal feeling or emotion, to irtiow 
 the source of the feeUng.: 
 
 s'affliger, grieve. 
 htHler, wish ardently. 
 
 se chagriner grieve. 
 
 craindre, 
 
 enrager, 
 
 s'etonner, 
 
 f^liciter, 
 
 se flatter, 
 
 fr^mir, 
 
 II s'atflige de vous voir. 
 
 fear. 
 
 be vexed. 
 
 wonder. 
 
 congratulate. 
 
 flatter o.s. 
 
 shudder. 
 
 g^mir, lament. 
 
 ne pas haiir, rather like. 
 
 s'endigner, be indignant. 
 
 si mo()uer, laugh. 
 
 niourlr, long. 
 
 se niquer, take pride, 
 
 plaindre, pity. 
 
 se plaindre, complain. 
 
 regretter, regret. 
 
 II brdle de continuer jses etudes. 
 
 se r^jouir, rejoice. 
 
 remercier, thank. 
 
 se repentir, repent. 
 se reprocher, reproach o.s. 
 
 rire, laugh. 
 
 rongir, blush. 
 
 trembler, irembie, 
 
 se vanter, boast. 
 
 e. A relation of separation. 
 
 s'absteriir, abstain. dcsenperer. 
 
 cesser, cease, leave off. d^tourner, 
 
 d^couriwer, dscouruge. dispenser, 
 
 d^daigner, disdaiv. douter, 
 
 d6fenare, forbid. empecher, 
 
 se defendre, defend o.s. eviter, 
 
 "^tut^"' } ^«««« 'y^- »'«*«"««'^V 
 
 II a oess^ de pleuvcfir. 
 
 It is used also after verbs of : 
 
 despair. 
 
 dimmd^,. 
 
 dispense. 
 
 doubt. 
 
 prevent. 
 
 avoid. 
 
 excuse o.s. 
 
 se garder, 
 nianquer, 
 nJer 
 
 pardonner, 
 se passer, 
 
 take Tmd. 
 
 fail. 
 
 deny. 
 
 excuse. 
 
 do without. 
 prendre garde, take 'heed. 
 refuser, refuse. 
 
 II evite de voir oes hommes. 
 
 d. Commanding, 
 commander, command. 
 d^fier, defy. 
 
 dire, tell. 
 
 ordonner, order. 
 sommer, svmmon, 
 
 e. Entreatimg, Advising, 
 conjurer, beseech. 
 conseiller, advise. 
 presser, urge. 
 prier, bdg. 
 
 reoomniender, recommend. 
 
 f. Idioms with avoir. 
 avoir besoin, need. 
 
 " coutunie,&e accustomed. 
 
 •' dessein, intend. 
 
 " envie, *oish. 
 (For full list see.^ge 67, 6.) 
 
 Also with 
 convince ; 
 threaten ; 
 
 II m' 
 Met 
 
 g. It is ei 
 
 II est 
 It is 
 
 h, ic is ui 
 
 JesuiS 
 lamgt 
 
 i. With 
 I ffrderto; a' 
 xinUss ; fai 
 
 Avantde 
 
 A moins 
 
 it is h 
 
 j. It' is 8< 
 finite verb. 
 
 243. Pi 
 
 in the sen 
 
 II cotnm 
 He bega 
 
 244. Pc 
 It muati be 
 
 Poupdeveni: 
 (In order) ti 
 
 Notice als 
 
 245. Sa 
 
 246. M 
 
 Ilfautb 
 
 5. 
 
 2Wr Whei 
 
 eto., are uto 
 used, provid 
 
 We nuty> i 
 
 II oroit' 
 He thin 
 Il'avout 
 H» conj 
 
 But if the 
 
 Jfe- crois 
 I'lMUti 
 
flnitive. 
 at. 
 
 ler. 
 
 > 08 to; 
 
 trjgm,; 
 fimda- 
 
 r. 
 
 fit. 
 
 tortiow 
 
 'Jl 0.8. 
 
 mt. 
 
 Unned. 
 
 r,6.) 
 
 1117 
 
 Also with : n'aglr, to be the qtustion ; bltiiner, blatM'; ohoisir, ettoom; oonvainor*, 
 convhuse ; se d6p6cher, se h&ler, hasten ; feindre, feifin ; Jurer, swtar ; menaoer, 
 threaten ; mettre h tneme, enable ; proposer, propose ; promettre, promise. 
 
 II m'a ordonne de faire oela. II m'a conseille de le faire. 
 
 He ordered in* to do that. He advieedme to doit. 
 
 g. It is employed also after dtre, used impersonally with all adjectives. 
 
 II est ti^cessaire de partir. n sera facile de faire cela. 
 
 It i8 necettory to depart. It wiUbeeaey to do that. 
 
 h. iG is used'alco after such adjectives as take de with their noun object. See 89. 
 
 Je suis d^Ii d6 vous Toir plfeurer. Vons etes impatient de partir. 
 
 / am. ffvieioedi to see you weep. You are eager tostt 'Ht^ 
 
 i. With- prepositions, such as pr^B de, near ; loin de, far ftom ; afln de, in 
 order to; avant (que) de, be,fm-e; si... (que) de; so.... as to; h>moia»^ dA; 
 unleas ; faute de, for lack of; & force de, by dint of. 
 
 Avantdemouririlavoua son crime. Before dying he caiyfesstd his crime; 
 
 A. moins d'etre fou, il n'est pas possible de raisoniier ainsi. Unless one is a fool, 
 it is impossible to reason thus. 
 
 j. It' is sometimes used to give vivacity in narrations, being then equivalent to a 
 
 finite verb. 
 
 Rats en campagne aussitot ; 
 
 Ktlecitadinde dire (=dit): « 
 
 Achevons tout notre rdt. 
 
 4. INFIMTIVB Wira OTUER PREPOSITION**. 
 
 243. Par with the infinitive follows the verbs conilliencer, fluir, 
 in the sense of doing Jirat, doing last. 
 
 II commenQa par trop parler ; il finit par se taire. 
 
 He began by speaking too much ; he ended by being silent. 
 
 244. Pour with the infinitive means in ordtT to, fortfte piirpo^ of. 
 It rnuii be used with the infinitive following assez and ti-op. 
 
 Pourdevenir -savant^ il f aut* ^tudier; 
 
 (In order) io become' a scholar one mt$at'8tudy. 
 
 Jil est assez hgi) pour marcher. 
 Ht isold'enough'toioalk. 
 
 Notice also: II a ete puni pour avoir menti. . , -'" 
 
 Hi vfasptmishedfov having lied. .i' - , * -,,. 
 
 II est bi«n ignorant pour avoir etudi6 si 1ongtemp». 
 
 He is very ignoratU' thOMghhe has studied so Umgj .'..■'.■ ':.■, 
 
 245. Sans; vnthout: II s'en alia sans rien dire. 
 
 246' .^pl«68 usually requires t^e Perfect of the Infinitive. ' ' 
 
 II taut-bonne m^moire apr^s avoir xnenti. 
 
 5. COHPARISONft BCTWRBN ENGIiUH AND FRSKCH AS TO INFINITIVES. 
 
 2W< Wien 'the vwbs eroire^ avouer, dire, esp4rer, nier de, penser, pritendre, voHtoir; 
 eta, areuted in connection with another verb, the infinitive of thefieoond verb uiay be- 
 used, provided both verbs refer to the same subject. 
 
 We may> say :. Instead of : ^ 
 
 II oroic devoir r^ussir. 
 He thinks he must succeed. 
 Il'avoiia I'avoir fait. 
 He> confessed having done it. 
 
 II croit qu'il doit reussiri 
 II avoua qu'il I'avalt ftkit. 
 
 Btit if tile verbs refer to different subjects the infinitive must not'be used^ 
 
 J6 crois qu'il fidra oela. II veut que j'aille \k. 
 
 IfbiriUwthmt ha wiU d»^>thati Ht v)i$hia me to gor there: ' 
 
118 
 
 Non.— Following the above, we say : 
 II retourna sans me voir. He returned without seeing me. 
 because " retourna" and " Toir" refer to one and the same person. 
 
 But when the subjects of the two verbs are different persons we must employ a 
 clause : 
 
 II retourna sans que 1e le Visse. He returned without my having seen him. 
 
 II f ut puni pour avoir menti. 
 He was punished for having lied. 
 
 But : II fut puni & cause quej'ai menti. 
 He was punished for my lying. 
 
 348. The English construction with the past participle, after faire, have, make ; 
 entendre, Aear; voir,««e, etc., is not admissible in French. The French construc- 
 tion demands the simple infinitive, which will be understood by supplying queiqrCun 
 (somebody) after the principle verb. 
 
 I am having a house built. Je fais b&tir une maison. 
 
 The horses we have seen put together. Les chevaux que nous avnr^s vu atteler 
 
 ensemble. 
 
 I have heard thco«; songs sungr. ' J'ai entenda chanter ces chansons. 
 
 Note.— It will be noticed that the noun object of the infinitive must, according to 
 the usual rule, follow the infinitive. 
 
 349. The English present participle after see, hear, watch, are usually expressed in 
 
 French by the Infinitive. 
 
 J'entends chanter la dame. J'ai sntendu chanter la dame. 
 
 / hear the lady sing(ing). I heard the lady 8ing(ing). 
 
 NoTB. —Often a phrase with qui is used instead of the infinitive. , - ' .^ 
 
 Je I'entends ^ui chante. Le voilii qui tombe. 
 
 I hear him singling ). Behold hivifalUyng), 
 
 ^ ThIime 61. 
 
 Translate. Explain the constructions with the infinitives. ' - ,f . '-f 
 
 1. Bonjour, mes ^l^ves. Quelle le9on vous ai-je dit d'apprendre ? 2. 
 Nous avons aujourd'hui la le^on des intinitifs, le^on assez difficile pour 
 apprendre. 3. D^pecliez-vous de commencer ; nous avons beauooup k 
 faire. 4. Oommencez par traduire les phrases du th^me frau9ais. 5. 
 Trop parler nuit. 6. S' ^tonner est du peuple, admirer est du sage, 7. 
 
 II faut manger pour vivre et non pas vivre pour manger. 8. Naltre avec 
 le printemps, mourir avec les roses, voil^ du papillou le destin 
 enchants. 9. Je desire apprendre le fran9ais ; je veux savoir le lire 
 aussi facilement que I'anglais. 10. II vous faudra beaucoup travailler 
 pour cela. 11. Je crois devoir faire mon possible pour y r^ussir. 12. 
 Travaillons pour devenir savants, pour vous faire aimer. 1.3. Lire trop 
 et lire trop peu sont deux d^fauts blamables. 14. Les paresseux pas- 
 sent leur temps k fl^ner ; les diligeuts emploient leur temps k lire, k 
 dessiner, k ^tudier. 15. Quoiqu' il soit rare de voir les riches faire 
 visite aux savants, on voit tr^s sou vent les savants aux portes des 
 riches. 16. C'est que les riches n'ont pas coutume de dire, comme dit 
 monsieur Jourdan : La belle chose que de savoir quelque chose ! et que 
 les savants out appris k appr^cier la valeur de la richesse. 17. Venez 
 me voir demain matin. 18. Je ne pense pas (j^ue je puisse aller vous 
 voir demain. 19. Aussit6t que je serai r^tabli j'irai vous voir. 20. Je 
 vais tacher de lui plaire et ^u'elle me plaise. 21. On commence par 
 Stre dupe, on iinit par Stre fnpon. 22. Quoique la justice ne se vende 
 pas, il en eolite beaucoup pour I'obtenir. 23. H4tez-vous lentement et 
 
119 
 
 Hi!!i 
 
 sans perdre courase. 24. Je commenfais k d^sesp^rer et j'allais in'en> 
 dormir dans un com solitaire, lorsqu'an rossignol se mit h chanter. 25. 
 Loin do troubler le sommeil d'autrui, sea accords semblaieut le bercer. 
 26. Personne ne songeait k le faire taire. 
 
 Exercise 62. 
 
 1. A certain scholar, who had the misfortune to be an atheist or who 
 at least pretended to be (155), used to come to visit Isaac Newton. 2. 
 One.day he began to examine a fine celestial globe that Newton had 
 just had made for-himself (se). 3. After haviuff examined it some time 
 without ceasing to express his admiration for (oi) the perfection of the 
 work, he at last asked (243) Newton who had made that magnificent 
 elobe. 4. "No one," answered the philosopher coolly, not sorry to 
 hnd the opportunity of making his friend see how diiiicult it is to 
 maintain atheistical {ath4e) opinions. 5. Mrs. Budd has nerves and 
 babies. She has a way of saying, "Mr. Budd !" that destroys conver- 
 sation. 6. To try his new hatchet, George endeavored to cut-down a 
 number of cherry-trees that his father had just planted. 7. His father, 
 as you can easily believe, was astonished and angry at seeing the damage. 
 8. George hastened to throw himself at his feet. 9. Far from endea- 
 voring to conceal his fault, he confessed that he was the author of the 
 misdeed. 10. "I cannot tell a lie," said he, "I did it." 11. The 
 father, without waiting-for an excuse, embraced him, and thanked 
 heaven for having given him a son who was not afraid of telling the 
 truth. 12. Some one came to warn Charles the Fifth that a criminal 
 had hidden himself near a town on his (the) way {route f . ) in order to 
 profit by the circumstance to ask-for his pardon {grdce f.) 13. "It 
 would have been better," answered the emperor to tell him where I am 
 than to tell me where he is. 14. "There are several things that I can 
 do and which you cannot [do]," said Lord Byron to Polidori, who had 
 boasted of having done great things. 15. Polidori defied him to name 
 
 them. 16. "I can," said Byron, "swim across this river (cross by 
 
 swimming, traverser dla nage), I can snuff-out that caudle with (de) a 
 
 pistol-shot, and I have written a poem of which 14,000 copies {exemplaire 
 m.) were sold in one day. 17. "Madam, your conduct astonishes me as- 
 much as it afflicts me. 18. Not content with rending (d4chirer) my 
 heart by your disdain(8), you have the indelicacy to keep-back (retenir) 
 from (to) me a tooth-brush, which my means do not permit me to 
 replace, my property (proprUt^s pi.) being burdened (grev^es) with 
 mortgages (hypotMque t). 19. Adieu, too beautiful and too ungrateful 
 friend ! May (pres. subj. of pmivoir) we see each other again in a bett^Br 
 world!" " Charles Edward." 
 
 Composition 63. 
 
 1. A Story of Bonaparte. — After having gained the battle of Areola, in 
 which the soldiers scarcely left off fighting during three days, Bonaparte 
 was going-through' his camp to see if the great fatigues of those three 
 days had not made his soldiers lose anything of their habitual discipline 
 and watchfulness. The general finds a sentinel asleep, succeeds in 
 depriving him softly of his gun without awakening him, and mounts 
 guard' in (at) his place. After sleeping several minutes more the 
 soldier awakes, astonished at seeing Bonaparte holding his gun ana 
 
m 
 
 at finding himself asleep at his post. " To sleep at one's post is to die," 
 her exclaimed, 'Tarn lost!" "Reassure yourself," said Bonaparte. 
 "After having undergone so much, a brave soldier may be allowed' to 
 succumb to sleep. But another time, take care to choose your time 
 better." 
 
 2. A Story of ^nop*. — Xanthus, /Esop's master, wishing to enter- 
 tain*^ a few of his friends, ordered his slave to buy what there was [ot] 
 best. JE»o]^ bought only tonsues, which he had the servants prepare with 
 much skill. The guests at hrst praised the dishes, but at last tliey grew 
 disgusted with' them. " Did I not order you," said Xanthus, " to buy 
 what there was [of] best." " Where can one iind anything [of] better 
 than the tongue ?" replied i^sop. " It serves to unite, to instruct, to 
 elevate men ; by^ it we can persuade and rule assemblies. It helps us 
 to discharge the first of all duties, which is to praise the gods. "Well," 
 said Xanthus, who thought he would catch him, "I order you to buy 
 to-morrow what there is [of] worst. " Xanthus again invited his friends 
 to dine with him, but great was his anger to rnd that Mao^ had again 
 bought only tongues. "The tongue," said the slavo to excuse himself, 
 " never abstains from doing evil. It always delights in slandering and 
 speaking, ill of others, and if by it we can praise the gods, it also 
 enables us to blaspheme them. Let us learn to govern it so as never to 
 have to regret having received from the gods the gift of speech^" 
 
 ^pareourir. *faire faction, 'perinettre, whioh requires the indireot object. See 
 184. *Eaope. ^rfgaler. ^se digouter de. ''par. ^parole. 
 
 XXI. The Fartioiplb (Lb Participle). ; 
 
 I. 
 
 Verbal forms in -ant are of three kinds : (1) Adjectives ; (2) Gerunds 
 (Paitioiples preceded by en) ; (3) Present Participles. 
 
 I. THE VBFBAL ADJECTIVE (ADJECTIF VERBAL). 
 
 25Di The Yesbal Adjeotwe in -ant signifieH Quality, State, Dis- 
 pomtion, etc. It is variable, like other adjectives. 
 
 Ila dM ilk ob^issants, une temme oharmante et des filles almantes. 
 He han obedient song, a charming wi/e, and loving daughters. 
 
 Note li —While Present' Participlee may become Verbal Adjectives, it must be 
 remembered thftt ayanty having ; dtant, being, soi-disant, self-styled, are in- 
 vuiable. 
 
 NvrB< 2.^There is rarely an^ difference in form between the Verbal Adjective and 
 th» Hresent Partidple from which it is derived. Some differences, however, do exist. 
 
 Pres. Participle. 
 from equivalant. 
 " fabriquant. 
 " pr^oMant. 
 " pr^sidant. 
 " r^sidant. 
 
 2. TUB QERUND (O^RONDTP) . 
 
 251. The G-emntl in French is only used after the preposition en, 
 aud'is equivalent to a noun governed by (2an« or 27e)ic{an^ It expresses 
 
 Compare : 
 Verbal Adjectives. 
 
 
 Pres. Participle. 
 
 Compare al« 
 Verbal Substanl 
 
 convaincant 
 
 from 
 
 convainquant. 
 
 un Equivalent 
 
 different 
 
 <4 
 
 different. 
 
 un farbicant 
 
 exortlent 
 
 <l 
 
 exoellant. 
 
 un pr^cMent 
 
 pi«o6dent 
 
 • 1 
 
 fatiguant. 
 
 un president 
 
 << 
 
 negligeant. 
 
 un resident 
 
 <l 
 
 pr^oraant. 
 
 
 provoeant 
 
 « 
 
 provoquant 
 
 
121 
 
 either an Accompanying Action or else Meant) or Instrument. It U in- 
 variable in form. .*■■.,■ 
 
 Lea flots s'avancent en muffissant. The wavu ndvance ntarlng. 
 
 Bn lisant on se fatigue. One tiren one's »elf by reading. ' < ' 
 
 Ildortenmarchant. Lea ouvriera travaillent en ohantant. etc 
 
 NoTB.— It must be remembered that English gerunda can be translated by the form 
 in -ant only where we can use the preposition en. After other prepositions in French 
 the infinitive or a noun must be employed. 
 
 We may say with tha Prea. Part : Bn (in, by, while) marchant, on se fatigue. 
 But we must say with the infinitive or the noun : 
 
 II a peur de dormir. II aime & tra- 
 
 vailler. 
 Aprda avoir marohd, on est 
 
 fatigu^. 
 II a fini par avouer son crime. ■ 
 Je n'aime pas aa leoture. 
 Le Jeu et la ohaaae I'ont ruin^. 
 
 lie it a/raid of sleeping. He likes 
 
 workintf. 
 After having walked, one is tired. 
 
 lie ended by x,on/essing his crime. 
 
 I do not like his reading. 
 
 Oaming and hunting have ruined him. 
 
 In many cases the use of the gerund with en, or the participle is a matter of indif- 
 ference. 
 
 Bn rentrant (or Rentrant) chez nous, nous avons vu I'erfant. 
 
 3. THE PRBSENT PARTICIPLE (PARTICIPLE PRESENT OM ACTIP). 
 
 252- The Present Participle is thoroughly verbal in force. It 
 denotes always action. It is invariable. 
 
 Un gargon (une fllle) dtudlant sa legon. Des garoons (des flUes) dtudlant leurs 
 A boy (a girtf studying his {her) lesson. leQons. 
 
 Boys (girls) studying their lessons. 
 
 In dealing with Verbal Adjectives and Present Participles, it will often be found 
 difficult to tell whether it is the verbal force that predominates or the adjective force* 
 This difficulty will be lessened by remembering, that in the Present Participle Action 
 is strongly marked, and that such action is usually transitory and definite. The Verbal 
 Adjective, on the other hand, denotes an inherent Quality or State ; and, if the adjec- 
 tive seems to denote action, it will be found on closer examination that it is a perma- 
 nent quality rather than an action in progress. Compare : ' 
 
 Pres. Participle,— Action. Invariable. 
 Voyez-vous ces debris flottant vers {to- 
 wards) la cote. 
 Cette bouche sourlant & choque mot. 
 
 La veuve d'Hector pleiirant 4 vos 
 
 genoux. 
 Voyez-vous la ros^e (dew) ruiaselant 
 
 (streaming) des feuilles. 
 
 Verbal Adjective,— State. Variable. 
 Calypso aperqut des cordages flottants 
 
 sur la cdte. 
 De riantea prairies qui nous offrent des 
 
 paysagcs charmants. 
 Une voix toujours caresaante et tendre. 
 
 Voyez-vous les feuilles ruiaaelantea de 
 
 ro86e. 
 
 253' The participle is used much more frequently in English than in 
 French. >iotice m the following examples that relative sentences, 
 infinitives, or past participles are used in constructions which in English 
 require present participles : / 
 
 I heard them ainsfinsr. 
 
 There he is faUlngr. 
 
 / saw m^n beatinfiT children. 
 
 Je les ai entendus chanter. 
 Le voil4 qui tombe. 
 J'ai vu des hommes qui battaient 
 des enfants. 
 
]28 
 
 II. 
 
 The Past Partioiplb (Pauticipe pass* on pashii-.) 
 
 264. The Past Fartioiple used Adjectively. The Paut 
 Participle used without an auxiliary verb agrees like an a<ljective. 
 
 Un habit g&tA. Det habit* ir&t^* I Une robe g&t^. Des to\>*sn gftt^es. 
 As to the agreement of deini, nu, attendu, eompria, etc., see 00, 68, 00. 
 
 255. The Past Participle with Hre. After the verb 6tre, not 
 used as the auxiliary of the reHective verb, the Participle agrees with 
 the subject. 
 
 Ce gargon est aitnd. Ces gargons sont aimds. 
 Ma aoBur est partie. Mes soeurs sont parties. 
 
 256. The Past Paiciciple with avoir. The Past Partici|)lu 
 with avoir, and with Stre as the auxiliary of reflective verbs, agrees with 
 the direct object preceding it, otherwise it is invariable. 
 
 Direct object preceding : 
 Voioi les livresque J'ai ochet^s. 
 Combien de livres avez-voua a> het^B ? 
 
 §ue de maison il a bAtles ! 
 lies se sont adressdes i^ moi. 
 
 Direct obieot following, or lacking : 
 J'ai achet^ des livres. 
 J'ai aohet^ beaiicoup de livres. 
 Elle a dormi toute la nuit. 
 Je lui ai parld. / have spoken to her. 
 Elles se sont donnd la main (i.e., to one 
 another). They have shaken hands. 
 Ces homniesse sont nui. (Niiire ii=to in- 
 jure. " 8e " is an indirect object.) 
 
 En is not to be regarded an a direct object. 
 
 They applied to ine 
 
 Ces notnnies se sont lou^S^ 
 
 Ces lilies se sont loupes. 
 
 NOTS 1. 
 Avez-vousdesfleurs? Oui, J'en ai aohet6> 
 
 NoTS 2.— The student will be careful to distinguish nouns used as adverbial phrases 
 to denote Amount, Measure, from real objects, and consequently to leave invariable 
 the Poiit Participles of such verbs as peser, to weigh, ooClter, to cost, oovirir, to 
 run, valoir, to be worth, etc., when following such adverbial expressions. 
 
 But : Les dix kilogrammes que la viande 
 
 a pesd. 
 Les sommes, les ennuis, que cette affaire 
 
 a coilt^. 
 But : Les deux kilometres que nous 
 
 avons couru. 
 But : Les dix mille francs que cette mai- 
 
 son a valu. 
 The ten thousand francs that this house 
 
 was worth.. 
 Les heures qu'il a dorzni ( = Le8 heures 
 
 pendant lesquelles il a dormi.) 
 
 2B7. Past Participle of an Impersonal Verb.— The Past Participle of an 
 
 Impersonal Verb is always invariable. 
 
 Les chaleurs qu'il a fait cet ^t^. Les orages qu'il y a eu. 
 
 The heat there has been this summer. The storms there have been. 
 
 II est arriv6 des malheuraik, votre Mre. But : Des malheurs lui sont arrives. 
 
 268. The Past Participle followed by an Infinitive. -There is sometimes 
 
 difficulty in deciding whether the object in such sentences as : 
 
 Les dames que J'ai entendues chanter. The ladies whom I have heard sing. 
 
 Les chansons que ^'ai entendu chanter. The songs which I have heard sung. 
 
 is the object of the principal verb or of the Infinitive. It must be kept in mind that 
 ^he French construction in the second of these sentences is as if we understand ' quel- 
 
 Tia viande que J'ai pes^e. 
 Tht meat which I weighed. 
 
 •Lm oerfs que nous avons courus. 
 
 The stags we have hunted. 
 
 Les recompenses que ces talents lui ont 
 values. 
 
 The rewardi that his talents have pro- 
 cured him. 
 
128 
 
 qu'im' (taiMoody) after 'entendu', or elae reifarrl 'chanter' m equivalent to a pas- 
 Hive inflnitivo : The $ong» which I have heard somebody «tn.'/. I have heard aome- 
 hody alng the sonfl:". conHe^iuently 'que' in the ohjeut of 'ohanter' and not of 'ai 
 entendu,' whioh therefore refiioinii Invariable. 
 
 Compare : 
 
 LeH bl^ que j'al vU8 mftrir (ripen). 
 he* aoteurs que J'al entendus r^nlter. 
 
 Compare alio ; 
 La le^on que J'al oubli^. 
 
 Lea hUm que J'ai vu aeiner <tow). 
 Lea vera que J'ai entendu rooiter. 
 
 La legon que J'ai oubli6 d'apprendre. 
 
 JHwM 1.— The paat Participle ot/aire followed by an inflnitive la Slwaya invariable. 
 Lea hommea quo J'ai fait ayir. Lea maiaons que J'ai fttit b&tir. 
 
 Not* 2. —The past participle ^U ia alwaya invariable. 
 
 TnftMB 64. 
 
 Translate. Comment on the form and avreement of the partioiplea. 
 
 1. Aujourd'hui je vais vous interroser sur les partioipea. Avez- 
 votts trouv^ la le9oa difficile. 2. Nous ne Pavons pas trouv^e difficile ; elle 
 est mdme int^reaaante. 3. II a'y eat trouvd moina de difficult^ que dans 
 les lecoDS pr^c^dentes. Cest en ^tudiant qu'ou voit disparaitre les 
 difficuilt^s. 4. Vous avez fait d&jk des progr^ ^tonnants. Jamais 
 vous ne vous repentirez des efforts que vous avez faits pour apprendre 
 le fran9ais. 5. Gependaut combieu de personnes se sont repenties d'avoir 
 mal employ^ les ann^es qu'elles out v^ou. 6. lies ^ours domi^s k 
 r^ude ne sont jamais perdus. 7. Combien de gens j'ai vus se repeutir 
 d'avoir perdu trop d'neures k I'dcole. G'est ainsi qu'ils sont punis. 
 8. Cela dit, commen^ons. Beaucoup de beaux sentiments qu on a 
 entendu prononcer ont 6t6 perdus faute d'etre appliques. 9. line per- 
 sonne obligeant quelquefois pent ne pas ^tre une personne obligeante. 
 10. Les individus obligeants sont toujours aim^s de leurs connaissances ; 
 ou voit leur amis s'en allant partout publier leur ^lose. 11. Voild des 
 preuves convainquant tout le monde de ce qu'elle a mt. 12. EUes ne 
 sont pas, selon moi, tr^s convaincantes. I^s deux amis se sont fait des 
 presents ; lis se sont ^crit plusieurs lettres. Voilk tout. 13. Deux 
 malheureux sont comme deux arbrisseaux qui, s'appuyant I'un centre 
 Vantre, se fortifient I'un I'autre. 14. Tout en disant cela, elle s'en est 
 tU^e sans se plaindre. 15. Lea Romains, se deatiuant k la guerre et la 
 regardant comme le seul art, voulaient la perfectionnor. 16. II y a eu 
 des soldats qui se sont laiss^s prendre. 17. II est arriv^ des troupes k 
 la ville. On les a vus combattre ; on les a vu battre. Les avez-vous 
 vues ? 18. La guerre a fini plus tdtque nous ne I'aurions cru. 19. Autant 
 de bataiilea notre g^n^ral a livr^ea, autant de victoires il a gagn^es. 
 20. Les grands hommea appartiennent moins au sidcle qui les a vus 
 naitre qu' k celui qui les a formes. 21. Tous ceux qui aiment la pSche, 
 la chasse, la promenade devraient aller visiter les ilea du Saint-Laurent. 
 22. Que de chansons nous y avons entendu chanter ! Que de belles 
 ▼oix nous y avons entendues chanter ! Combien de cfaarmants 
 paysages on y voit ! 23. Quoi de plus bean que les iles dont les 
 riants ooteaux sont converts de vignes et d'arbres. 24. La petite maison 
 Uanche que j'y ai fait b&tir m'est bien ch^re. 25. Cest 1^ qu'il s'est 
 6ooal^ bien de douces heures. 26. Get ^t^ le temps m'a manqn^ pour 
 I'excursiou que J'avais compt6 que je ferais aux MiJle-Iles. 
 
124 
 
 - .^/ .^. ■..-/..'.".,■• ^ Exercise 65. ■■.. :,^,. y^-v ■■>;.-'.•.-: 'v-: ':';■/ ->.,■■ ■ 
 
 1. Some one asked an Irishman, recently home (returned) from 
 Canada, what sort of pastime bear-hunting (chaase a Voura) was. 2. 
 Very diverting and amusing, he replied, as long as (tani que) you are 
 chasing the bear. 3. But it sometimes happens that the bear, pressed 
 too hard (fort), turns and chases you in his turn, then bear-hunting is 
 not amusing at all, and is even unpleasant (displeasing). 4. The 
 Danaides (X>ana2(26s f.) ceaselessly drawing {puiser) water, and trying 
 to fill pierced vessels (vase) are the emblems of men devoting themselves 
 to some (a) useless labor. 5. The toil of dro2>ping buckets into empty 
 wells and growing old in drawing nothing up ! 6. War is a horrible 
 scourge. 7. Imagine the fields ravaged, the harvest(s) trampled 
 {fouler) under the feet of horses, fences overturned, trees cast-down 
 {abaUre) roads interrupted, bridges destroyed, your father and your 
 brothers torn from their loved ones to fill, perhaps, a distant grave, your 
 mother and your sisters weeping and lamenting, cursing, perhaps, those 
 who have caused all this desolation. 8. The smoke of glory dissipated, 
 the conqueror finds the land desolated, his people destroyed, his power 
 annihilated and his own happiness ruined. 9. Swallows are charming 
 birds ; charming everybody by the surprising grace of their movements. 
 10. It is a most interesting spectacle to see them eating, drinking, 
 bathing while flying ; catching the insects on (of) which they live, 
 grazing (raser) the surface of the pond and seizing the insects gathered 
 (here ; changing the direction of their flight at every moment, rising, 
 descending, losing themselves and reappearing, and describing thou- 
 sands and thousands of {mille et mille) circles in the air. 
 
 Composition 66. 
 
 1. Tiiree Nations. — A Frenchman, an Englishman, and a German were 
 commissioned, it is said, to give the world the benefit of their views on 
 that interesting animal, the Camel. Away goes the Frenchman to the 
 Jardin des Plantes, spends an hour there in a rapid investigation, 
 returns, and writes a feuilleton, in which there is no phrase the 
 Academy can blume, but also no phrase which adds to (increases) the 
 general knowledge^. He is perfectly satisfied, however, and says : 
 '*Le voild, le chameau !" The Englishman packs-up' his tea-caddy' 
 and a magazine of provisions ; pitches* his tent in the East ; remains 
 there two years studying the Camel in its habits ; and returns with a 
 thick volume of facts, arranged without orde;, expounded without 
 philosophy, bui serving as^ valuable (precious) materials for all who 
 come after him. The German, despising the frivolity of the Frenchman 
 and the unphilosophic' matter-of-factness' of the Englishman, retires^ 
 to his study there to construct the idea of a Camel from out of the 
 depths of his Moral Consciousness. And he i? still at-it*. 
 
 G. H. Lewes. 
 
 2. The Vision of Mirzah. — I saw the valley opening at the other end 
 and spreading-forth*' into an immense ocean. Traversing this ocean 
 and dividing it into two equal parts, a huge rock of adamant could be 
 seen. The clouds still rested on one half of the ocean so that I could 
 discover nothing in it. But the other appeared to me a vast ocean 
 planted with innumerable islands that were covered with fruit and 
 
.-. -■.;.. .-.>.\v:''-- 125 --', : -;* "''■ 
 
 flowers, and interwoven with*' a thousand little shining seas. I could 
 see persons dressed in*^ glorious habits, covered with garlands, passing 
 among the trees, lying down by the side of fountains, or resting on beds 
 of flowers ; and could hear a confused harmony of singing birds, falling 
 water(>, human voices and musical instruments. I wished-for the 
 wing& of an eagle to fly away*' to those happy places ; but the genius 
 told me there was no passage except through the gates of death that I 
 saw opening upon the bridge. "The islands," said he, "that are so 
 fresh and green before thee, and with which the whole ocean appears 
 filidd as far as thou canst see, are more numerous than the grains of 
 sand of the sea-shore ; there arc myriads of islands behind those which 
 thou hast here discovered, reaching*" further than thine eye, or even 
 thiue imagination can extend itself. Are not these, O Mirzah, habita- 
 tions worth contending for ?" Addison. 
 
 ^connaissarices, pi. *emballer. ^boite (f.) d thS. dresser. ^55,3. *peu philoso- 
 phique. lesprit positif. 8«e retirer. 'j/. ^%'iteiidre. ^^entrelacer de. ^Hetu de. 
 i*s'envoler. 
 
 VI. THE ADVERB (DE L'ADVERBE).* 
 
 I 
 
 I. The Principal Adverbs (Les principaux adverbks). 
 259. The Adverbs of Time are : 
 
 avant-hier, day before 
 
 autrefois, 
 
 formerly. 
 
 puis, 
 
 then. 
 
 yesterday. 
 
 parfois, 
 
 at times. 
 
 jadis, 
 
 of old. 
 
 hier, yesterday. 
 
 de temps k autre, at times. 
 
 depuis. 
 
 since. 
 
 aujourd-hui, to-day. 
 
 rarement, 
 
 seldom,. 
 
 demierement 
 
 lately. 
 
 demain, to-morrow. 
 
 toujours, 
 
 always. 
 
 maintenant. 
 
 now. 
 
 aprcs-demain, day after to- 
 
 jamnis, 
 
 ever (never). 
 
 bientdt, 
 
 soon. 
 
 morrow. 
 
 quand, 
 
 when. 
 
 d^sormais, 
 
 hereafter. 
 
 hier(au)8oir, yesterday 
 
 tard. 
 
 late. 
 
 longtemps, 
 
 long. 
 
 evening. 
 
 en retard. 
 
 behind time. 
 
 aussitdt, 
 
 immedintely. 
 
 demain matin, to-morrow 
 
 tdt ou tard 
 
 , sooner or 
 
 dej^ 
 
 already. 
 
 morning. 
 
 
 later. 
 
 encore, 
 
 Sim, yet. 
 
 avant, auparavant, liefore. 
 apr^s, afterwards. 
 alors, then. 
 
 enfln, 
 ensuite, 
 
 at last, finally, 
 afterwards. 
 
 d'abord, 
 quelquefois, 
 
 at first, 
 sometimes. 
 
 260. Tlie Adverbs of i 
 
 °lace are : 
 
 
 
 
 ailleurs, elsewhere. 
 
 environ, 
 
 about. 
 
 yi 
 
 there. 
 
 alentour (autour), around. 
 
 ici, 
 
 here. 
 
 en, 
 
 from there. 
 
 aupres (pres, proche), nsar. 
 dedans,* within. 
 
 \k, 
 
 there. 
 
 quelque part, 
 
 somewhere. 
 
 Id-bas, 
 
 yonder. 
 
 nulle part, 
 
 nowhere. 
 
 dehors,* without. 
 
 li^-haut, 
 
 aloft. 
 
 partout, 
 
 everywhere. 
 
 derri^re, behind. 
 
 loin, 
 
 far. 
 
 de toutes parts, on all sides. 
 
 dessous,*^ under. 
 
 oh. 
 
 where ? 
 
 de part et 
 a'autre. 
 
 (on both 
 \ sides. 
 
 dessus,* above. 
 
 d'oii, 
 
 whence. 
 
 devant, before. 
 
 ju8qu'oi\, 
 
 how far. 
 
 n'importe oi!i, 
 
 anywhere. 
 
 ^Distinguish the adverbs 
 
 dedans, dehors, desso 
 
 lis, dessus. 
 
 etc. from the 
 
 prepositions dans, hors, i 
 
 sous, sur, 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 
 *In translating English adverbs into Frfinch the student must be on the alert to 
 express in the verbs in French many of the adverbs which so frequently are used in 
 English to complete the meaning of the verb. 
 
 Compare : 
 He sets out at five o'clock. He runs through the book. 
 
 Jl part a cinq hmres. 
 
 II parcourt k ixvrt. 
 
 FUlitup. 
 Bemplissez'ie, eto. 
 
126 
 
 261> Adverbs of QttantUy : 
 
 MMz, enough. 
 autant, asm.'och^asmany, 
 beauooup mucA, many. 
 bifln, much, many 
 
 combien, howm%ieh1 how 
 
 many? 
 moins, less, fewer. 
 plus (davantage),* m4)re. 
 
 ne. .gaere,&it< little,butfew. 
 tant, «o much, so many. 
 trop. too much, too many. 
 
 Force is sometimes used adverbially for beaucoup de : II a force amis. 
 *Davantaffe usually takes the place of plus at the end of a phrase : Cela me 
 plait davantasre. Je n'en dirai pas davantagre. 
 
 Non 1.— The construction of these Quantitative Adverbs with nouns is explained in 
 60, 2 ; 51, b. 
 
 may also be used like other adverbs to modify adjectives. 
 
 202' Tht Admsrbn of Affirmation 
 
 oui, yeg. \ aasur^ment, 
 
 yes. 
 yes indeed. 
 
 *In affirmative answer to a negative question or statement, 
 263. Adveros of Negation, r , 
 
 si, * 
 si fait, 
 
 faoit, 
 
 I peat^tr«i 
 
 certainly, 
 be it so. 
 perhaps. 
 
 d'accord, 
 
 vraiment, 
 voloutiers. 
 
 agree {done />. 
 
 indeed. 
 
 willingly. 
 
 ne, not. 
 non, no, not. 
 
 pas (point) no, not. 
 
 pas (point) du tout, not at all. 
 
 Dollement, by no means 
 peu, aft in peu iwUn "sant 
 uninteresting. 
 
 2M:. "iHe. The primary negative particle in French is "Die. 
 
 1. By itself it is able to mark negation only in certain cases. 
 
 a. With pouvoir, oser. cesser, bousrer {budge), in a familiar style. 
 with savoir, used for pouvoir, or when expressing uncertainty. 
 
 On ne saurait qu' y faire. 
 It cannot be helped. 
 
 Je ne sais quel chemin prendre. 
 / know not what road lo take. 
 
 Also 
 
 .que, 
 
 b. With a verb in the past tense, after the time-phrases 11 y a. 
 depixlB que. 
 
 II v a longtemps (fae Je ne I'ai vu. Depuis deux ans que Jene I'ai vue. 
 
 / have not seen him for a long time. Since 1 saw her {I have not seen her since) 
 
 two years ago. 
 e. In various phrases, such as : ' ' , 
 
 ne — aucun (96), no. 
 
 ne gu6re, but little, 
 
 but few. 
 ne — Jamais never. 
 
 ne — personne, nobody. 
 
 ne nul(97), no. 
 
 ne plus*, no ifwre,no 
 
 longer. 
 ne que, only. 
 
 ne 
 
 .rien. 
 
 nothing, tiot 
 anything. 
 ne — ni. . . ni, neither . . nor. 
 ne — nulle part, nowhere. 
 
 * Plus has a negative force in abbreviated expressions such as : Plus de Icrmes ! 
 No more tears ! 
 
 d. In various other phrases, such as : n'importe, no matter ; n'avoir que 
 
 faire, have nothing to do ; qu'il ne d^plaise, may it please ; si ce 
 n'est, except, etc. 
 
 e. After que meaning pourquoi. Que n'etes-vous arrive plus t6t ? 
 
 2. In other instances ne is found connected with other words, such as pas. point 
 (rarely mot, gfOUtte), which strengthen the negation. 
 
 Jene lis pas. Je ne lis point. Jenedismot. Je ne vols goutte. 
 
 8. Ne is employed in what seems a pleonastic usage :— 
 a. After expressions otfear : 
 le crains qu'il ne vienne. [ But : Je crains qu'il ne yienne pas. 
 
 / fear that he mil come. 
 
 I 
 
 / fear he tvill not come. 
 
 266. 
 
127 
 
 Aho 
 
 b. After & moins que, except, unless (and si, unless) : ' 
 
 Je ne sortirai fl moins qu'il ne faase beau. 
 
 / shall not go out except it be (i.e. should it not be) fine. 
 
 e. Usually, thougfh not necessarily, after expressions of hinderinff, preventing : 
 
 Prenez garde qu'on ne voua sMuise. Empechez qu'il ne vienne. 
 
 Take care that you are not misled. JWvent him from comiug. 
 
 d. After negative exprewions of Doubt (paid aometimes Denial : 
 Fudedouteqailne vienne. JeneniepasqQecei»ftl^aaii» -^ 
 
 3. After e.n affirmative sentence, containing a comparative o: autre, aiUrement : 
 II est plus habile que vous ne pensez. 
 He is cleverer than you think, (You do not think him cleverX 
 
 C'est autre chose que je ne croyaia. That is other than I thought. 
 The disjunctive form of ne is non. 
 
 266. Non.— ^Ton is used, and not ne: 
 
 a. In negative answers : £tiez-vous la ? Non. A more emphatic answer would 
 
 be : Non pas (not non ^otnt)' 
 
 b. In such expressions as : 
 
 Je dis que non. / say no. Peut-etre que non. Perhaps no. 
 
 c. Before phrases not essential to the sentence containing them : 
 
 II I'a fait, non pour moi mais pour mon p^re. He did it, not/or me, but, etc. 
 Dans une maison non loin de I'endroit. In a house not far from the spot. 
 J'irai non que je le veuille mais parce que vous le voulez. 
 / shall go not because I wish it, mit because you wish it. 
 
 266. Pas. Point.— Both are used to strengthen ne, but with a difference of force. 
 Point denies absolutely ; pas permits qualifications to its denial. Consequently pas is 
 preferable before numeral adjectives and quantitative adverbs, and before comparisons. 
 Point is preferred for absolute negations and for negations as to habitual actions. 
 Both may be used absolutely. Point alone may be used {=non) in answers : 
 
 II n'a pas assez de livres. 
 
 II ne lit pas. He is not reading. 
 
 Pas beauooup, pas trop. 
 
 II n'a pas (point) de livres. 
 II ne lit point, tie never reads. 
 £:te8-vou8 cqntent ? Point. 
 
 267. Adverbs of Order^ made by adding -ment to the feminine 
 Ordinal Numerals. 
 
 premi^rement, deuxi^mmeent, troisi^mement, etc. 
 
 268. Adverbs of Repetition^ maAehy \X9Q oi fois (time). 
 
 une tois ; deux fois ; trois fois ; plusieurs fois ; beaucoup de (bien des) fois. 
 once ; twice ; thrioe ; several times ; many times. 
 
 269. Adverbs of Manner, Reason. 
 
 ainsi, so, thus ; aussi, as, also, consequently ; oomme, as, like ; pourquoi, why ; 
 done, therefore. 
 
 Note.— Here we may notice the use of an absolute construction with adverbial force : 
 
 Les chasseurs s'en all^rent, le fUsil SVir I'dpaule. 
 
 The hunters went away with their guns on their shoulders. 
 
 But the great mass of adverbs of manner are derived from adjectives 
 after the following rules. 
 
 II. FOEMATION OF AdVBRBS FROM ADJECTIVES. 
 
 270. Gene'.'Vkl Rule. The adjective can be changed into an adverb by the addition 
 of -ment to the fern. sing, of the adjeotive. If the ma«o. sing, of the adj«otive ends 
 in a vowel, -ment is added to it. 
 
128 
 
 (frano) franohe gives franchement, frankly. 
 (fort) forte " fortement, strongly, 
 (aotif) active '• aotivement, actively, etc. 
 
 saere gives sagement, toisely. 
 poli " poTiinent, politely. 
 vrai " vraiment, truly. 
 
 foUement, belle- 
 
 Note.— Fou. beau, mou, nouveau require also the feminine : 
 ment, molletnent, nouvellement. 
 
 Irresrularities. 
 
 a. The adjectives ending in -ant, -ent undergo a slight modification into -amment 
 •emment : 
 
 constant gives oonstamnient, constantly. 
 pesant " pesamment, heavily. 
 
 rudent gives prudemment, prudently, 
 vident " evidemme"t, evidently, etc. 
 
 But present becomes presentment, at present -, v^hdment, v^hdmente- 
 ment, vehemently. 
 
 6. Change e into ^ when adding -ment with : 
 
 aveugl^ment, blindly. 
 commodement, conveniently. 
 communement, commonly. 
 confomi^mnnt, conformably. 
 confus^ment, coiifusedly. 
 
 ^nonn^ment, enormously, 
 express^raent, expressly. 
 immens^ment, immensely. 
 importun^raent, importu- 
 
 na,tely. 
 obscurement. obscurely. 
 
 umflex accent : 
 
 opin&tr^ment, obstinately. 
 pr^cisement, precisely. 
 profond^raent, profoundly. 
 profusement, ptqfitsely. 
 unitorm^ment, uniformly. 
 
 c. The following take a ci 
 assldCiment, assiduously ; crdment, crudi Zy ; gaiment (gaiement), gayly. 
 
 d. Bref becomes bridvement ; grentil, Grentiment ; traltre, traltretise- 
 ment, treacherously. , , ' 
 
 III. Comparison of Adverbs (Comparaison des adverbes). 
 
 271. Oomparison is indicated with the Adverb in the same manner as 
 with the Adjective, except that, being adverbial, le is always invariable. 
 
 posmvK. 
 
 vite. 
 quickly. 
 
 COMPARATIVB. 
 
 ( moins vite't 
 Elle lit \ au8«i vite Vque vous. 
 f ■• (plus vite J 
 
 BUPERLATIVB. 
 
 rie plus (most) vite. 
 Son fr^re lit \ le moins (least) vite. 
 i.bien (very) vite. 
 
 NoTB 1. — In the negative sentence si may be used for aussi : 
 Elle ne court pas aussi (si) vite que vous . She does not run as (so) fast as you. 
 
 Note 2.— The comparison of equalitj' will be regular : Elle court aussi bien (peu, mal) 
 que vous. She runs as well (as little, as badly) as you. But instead of beaucoup— 
 which can never be modified except by pas— autant, or in negative sentences, autant 
 or tant, is used. 
 
 Elle court autant que son f r^re. 
 He runs as mu^h as her brother. 
 
 Elle ne court pas autant (tant) que lui. 
 She does not run as much as he. 
 
 272- The adverbs mieuz, better, best ; moins less, least ; pis, worse, worst ; plus, 
 more, most, of themselves indicate comparison. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 rbien. 
 ■weU, 
 
 li 
 
 peu. 
 little. 
 
 mal. 
 badly. 
 
 beaucoup. 
 ^mueh. 
 
 
 COMPARATIVB. 
 
 'mieux que lui. (Never : plus bien.) 
 better than he. 
 
 moins que moi. (Never : plus peu.) ,^ 
 less than I. *i § 
 
 pis que vous. (Or : plus mal.) » ^ 
 worse than you. r » 
 
 plus au'eux. (Never: plus beaucoup.) 
 jnore than they. 
 
 SUPBRLATIVB. 
 
 /'le mieuz. 
 the best. 
 
 le moins. 
 
 the least. 
 
 le pis(<»' le plus mal). 
 the worst. 
 
 le plua 
 J:he mott. 
 
lUl. 
 
 plus, 
 
 smal). 
 
 129 
 
 273' Nouns used Adverbially.— Many nouns of Time, Mea- 
 sure, Quantity are used adverbially, with the preposition understood. 
 
 On travuille (pendant) le Jour ; on dort (pendant) la niiit. 
 
 Nous avons aohet^ ce livre (pour) diz ftuncs. II a pay^ six firanoB le livre. 
 
 Nous irons la semaine prochaine (I'annde prochaine). 
 
 iV. Position of the Adverb (Place de l'adverbe). 
 
 274. 1. For the position of Negative Adverbs, see 156. 
 
 2. Interrogative Adverbs and Adverbs of Locality usually hold the 
 same positions in French as in English, preceding or following the verb. 
 
 3. The Adverb usually precedes the noun, adjective, or adverb to 
 which it refers : 
 
 Assez de livres. Books enough. Assez beau. Fitie enough. 
 
 (4) It will usually immediately follow the verb it modifies, and pre- 
 cede (according to 3) the perfect participle in compound tenses : 
 
 Vous avez mal employ^ votre temps. On I'a beauooup loue. 
 
 Note 1.— Adverbs of Time can scarcely be said to modify the past participle. They 
 do not stand between the auxiliary and the past participle : 
 Hier je me suis promen^ ; Je me suis promen^ hier. 
 
 Note 2.— Long adverbs in -me'/it, or long adverbial phrases, are usually not placed 
 between the auxiliary and the verb : 
 
 Malheureusement il n'est pas encore arrive. ' Unfortunately he has not yet arrived. 
 
 5. The adverb is sometimes found detached from its phrase, as in : 
 
 Que (oombien) cette ville est belle. Combien avez-vous de mains ? 
 
 Plus vous serez diligent, plus vous serez heureux. - ' 
 
 The more diligent you are, the happier you vnll be. . ~ 
 
 The adverb is rarely found, as in Engrlisli it so frequently is found, 
 between the subject and the verb : 
 
 Je puis k i>eine vous dire. I scarcely can tell you. 
 
 ThAme 67. 
 
 Translate. Comment on any peculiarities in the use of the adverbs. 
 
 1. Mercredi soir j'ai recu de Mme A. un billet comme suit : Madame 
 A. fait ses compliments ^ M. — et le prie de lui faire I'honneur de venir, 
 samedi soir, prendre le th^ chez elle. 2. Vous irez, n'est-ce pas ? On 
 s'amuse toujours chez elle. 3. Je n'irai pas k moins que vous n'alliez. 4. 
 Moi aller ! Non, c'est tout k fait impossible. En outre, je ne suis pas au 
 nombre des invites. 5. Je ne vois Ik aucune difficult^. 6. Merci bien. 
 Je n'aime pas trop ces repas de famille oil les strangers se trouvent 
 toujours de trop. 7. Chez Mme A. ils sont plus agr^ables que vous ne 
 pensez. On ne s'y gSne jamais. 8. Eh bien, je ne dis pas non. Don- 
 nez, cependant, un coup d'oeil k la traduction que voici. II y a 
 beaucoup de fautes, j'en suis bien stir. 9. Lisez les phrases k haute 
 voix. 10. Qui n'est que juste est dur ; qui n'est que sage est triste. 
 11. A qui se confesser si ce n'est k sa m^ret 12. L'hypocrite parle 
 toujours autrement qu'il ne pense. 13. Oomptez-les un k un. Ne prenez 
 qu'un k la fois. Autant de tSt^'S, autant d'avis. 14. La France est 
 
... ', ■ ■ '' ■ »30 
 
 soixifnte^trdze foi» pluv petite que I'Am^rique. 15. Eschine ^titit 
 ^loqaetti miMS D^mosthtoe r^atit davtltotage. 16: II est 86rti vers les 
 cinq heures et je ne I'ai pas vu depuis. 17. On ne feime iamais tout-d* 
 fait la porte attx flatteiirs, on la pousse tout^au plus douoement sur eux. 
 18. Mon jeune homme ne se nt pas ^riet; nonr voil4 mangeant et 
 buvant, lui du moins. 19. On n est jamais aussi heureux ui aussi 
 mMheureux qu' on se I'imagind. 90. II ne dit mot, mais il n'en pense 
 
 Sas moins. 21. Les pluies qu'il fait depuis trois jours me mettent au 
 ^sespoir. 22. II y a taiit de peine et ok mis^fie dtitiEr ce monde qu'il 
 faut non seulement se repentip du mal que 1' on a caus^^ mais aussi du 
 bieo qu'on p'a pas fait. 23< Je n'empSche pas qu'il (ne) fasse ce qu'il 
 voudra. 24. Les portes des palais sont moins hautes qu'on ne pense : 
 dn n'y passe qu'en se baiss^nt; 25. Si til sis bien v^9u, tu as beaucoup 
 v^9u. 26. La vie s'ach^ve que I'on a k peine ^bauch^ son ouvrage. 27. 
 La nature nous » donn^ deux oreilles et une setile langue, pour nous 
 apprendre que nous devons peu parler mais beaucoup ^couter. 28. 
 Rap]^ lez-vouB qu'il ne faut pas n^ghger les bagatelles pour atteindre k 
 la perfection, et que la perfection n'est point une bagatelle. 
 
 Exercise 68. 
 
 1. Lord Chesterfield one day vi&ited Lord Sti-afford, one of his ihoe(1^ 
 intimate friends. 2. His host hiid a little dog that he was very fodd of 
 and which followed him everywhere. 3. As the two friends were taking 
 a walk together the dog suddenly bit Lord Chesterfield on {d) the leg. 
 4'> "Fear nothing," said Lord Strafford, calmly, who saw his friend 
 turn-round quickly, *' My dog never bites." Immediately Lord 
 Chesterfield made the dog howl well with {de) a blow from his cane, as 
 he answered (in answering) quite aa calmly, "Fear nothing, my lord 
 (milord), I never strike little dogs. " 6. One day Count de Granc4 was 
 seriously wounded in {d) the knee by a ball. 7. Surgeons were at once 
 sent-for, who immediately did their best to {hur possible pour) find the 
 ball, but in vain. 8. However, they made the count suffer horribly. 
 9. At last, unable to stand the pain any longer, he asked them why 
 they were torturing him thus. 10. **We are only searching-for (do 
 but search, ne faire que chercher) the ball," they answered. 11. "Good- 
 ness !" replied the count, "Why (264, e) didn't you tell me that before? 
 I have it in my pocket." 12. There -^S dhce-upon-a-time (formerly) a 
 fisherman fishing tranquilly in a littl» brook. 13. He was not catchiiig 
 rnueh^ which does not prevent » fishenaan, however^ from being quite 
 happy, and there was no doubt that he^ was* 14 At last he caught a 
 fish,, a very little one, not larger than your fingeh 15. The poor ilttld 
 Oiinffi thoroughly frightened,, eonld searc^y speak at first* 16. At last 
 it sticceed<.i(I m b^ging the- fisherman to throw it baek (rejeter) intd the 
 water. 16. "What will you do with (211) me^ I am not yet big 
 eaough," it said. 7. "Give me time to become so (155), and then^ 
 another day, you will fisfa me out-ag£Mn {repScher)^ Then I will make 
 you a good dish {plat) ; at present I can afibrd (make) you but a ven^' 
 little mouthful. The little fish will groW big, " it said pitifully, ' * pro-^ 
 vided(28g) God lends him life." 20. "Not at all/' said the fisherman^ 
 " for altaj^tinKf I haven't caught- a fish. 2}. I have net seen one fot tWc) 
 hounv 22. .No, now I have (hold) you^ Mid>I aim not sure of cateMng 
 you again. 23. It cannot be helpedt 24; One^ must not quit- t)ie 
 
131 
 
 certain for the uncertain. 25. You will go into the frying-pan and be 
 fried this very ((i^8 ce) evening." ^ . .: . 
 
 CoMPoarrioN 69. 
 
 Drawing Near the Heavenly City. 
 
 (A free rendering of this exercise into French will be found best.) 
 
 This done, they compassed^ them round^ on every side. Some went 
 before, some behind ; and some on the right hand, some > on the left (as 
 if it were to guard them through the upper regions) continually sound- 
 ing their trumpets most melodiously, as they went on ; so that the very 
 sight to the eyee of those who could -behold it was not other than if 
 heaven itself was come-down' to meet them. Thus, therefore, they 
 walked, ever and anon (at times) these trumpeters would, with -their 
 looks and gestures, still (ever) sigAify tp.QhristiaA ^n^ );»fi brotlxer how 
 welcome" Uiey were into their company and how gladly they had come 
 to meet them^. An<l i^oF were these two men, as it were' in ^th^J 
 heaven before they came to it, beine overpowered by the sig'nt of the 
 angels and with hearing o^ their melodious notes. Here also they had 
 this city itsek in view Mid'^ey thought ^«y heard alHhe bells^hei^iu 
 to ring to wejopme* them there. Bujt jftbove-fill^ the Wftrm (ardent) find 
 joyful thoughjbs tl^^t t]iey 1^ Qf their dweUpig there with MJUfih 
 company, anq that for ever-and'^ver^ ! Oh ! how can tongue or pen 
 express their glorious joy ! And thus they came up to the gate. 
 
 BUNYAN. 
 
 ^entoitrer. '*dMCMdre. Htre le bienvenu, be w«loome. Ito oome (go) to ni«et them, 
 venir (alter) a ieur r^contre ', or venir(igller)au devant de-iiMy be used, ^pouraitm 
 dire, ^soahaiter la bienoentie d, faire Itw <ifO|^t2 a. "fsurtout. ^ur to^^awsj etfir- 
 nellement. 
 
 VII. THE PREPOSITION (I>E LA PREPOSITION). 
 
 The Principal Prepositions (IiEs principales propositions). 
 
 $)7J?« A. serves to inarjk. 
 
 1. jTepdenoy : (a) Al^r adJeotiv«|i(^).; (A) a|^ verbs (241) ; (e) bg^HSf) iiftp^ts <it 
 persons, places, etc. :;• •„ ' ;»yr{./ 
 
 Venez A. moi. Aller^ Paris. Allerau college. An march^. 
 
 Vomeiome. Togo to Fans. To goto oolite. To market. 
 
 Note.— Also with maseuHtw or j^litral MV*^ pf cp^P^riej9.: ,11 v^ a^ €$1^(1^, fM 
 
 Mexique, aux Ipdes. 99 al^o for place : II est au Canada, etc. 
 
 2. Possession. 
 
 This book is mine (thine, et^>)- 
 
 A dog of my own (qf *hy m.i(\, etjp.). 
 
 Yoars trulyi. 
 
 8. Place where. Time when : 
 
 Ce livre est k PQi (^ toi, etc.). 
 Une ohien k i9pl(% tpi.'^j^.). 
 Tout&vous. 
 
 II d')meure <\ la campagne. 
 He lives in the country. 
 
 Nousrestons ^Ja Quiii0i>P> 
 We stay at home. 
 
 Jusqu' k quatre heures. 
 Tmifmr^'4^QQik. 
 
 II (}f9i|^uee^ 3?proQto (k liQodc^, etc.). 
 He lives in Toronto (in Lo/ndon, eio.). 
 
 i. With attributes, to «ignify'(a) the purpose, (6) thedistinguishio^ attribute. 
 
 a. HftUe au;c drape. 
 utifth market. 
 
 Salle k diner. 
 Dining-room. 
 
 Verre ^ vin. 
 Wine gfasfi. 
 
 CluMpbce a poucher. 
 [■^amm. 
 
 b. Moulin ifcie. 
 'Saw-mill. 
 
 Gl^ise & bras. 
 Arin-ehair. 
 
 L'hon^roe &;rb»hiti)<Hr. 
 The man toith ihe i^acfe coat. 
 
132 
 
 B. With verb* of selling, engagring, etc., to signify (a) the manner, (b) the price. 
 
 a. Les oaufs se vendent & la douzaine. 
 Egga are sold by the dozen. 
 
 Nous prendrons la chambre k la semaine. 
 We shtUl take the room by the week. 
 
 0. Instrument. 
 
 ficrire m crayon, k la plume. 
 Write inpencil, in ink. 
 
 b. A un franc la douzaine. 
 At one franc a dozen. 
 
 Un diner h trois francs. 
 A three franc dinner. 
 
 P^cher h la ligne. 
 
 Fish with hook and line. 
 
 7. In many phrases, to shew an adverbial relation. 
 
 Aller k pied, k cheval. Peu k peu. 
 
 Oo on foot, on horseback. Little by little. 
 
 X la fois. Se battre au jpistolet. 
 
 Fight with ptstols. 
 
 Deux h deux. 
 Two by tivo. 
 
 Aller k droite, k gauche. 
 Oo to the right, to the l^t. 
 
 At the same time. 
 
 8. In exclamations such as : Au feu ! ^I'assassin ! au seoours ! Fire I murder ! help I 
 
 9. Separation, deprivation, after certain verbs. See 210. 
 
 276. De. 1. 2>e is used as the sign of partitive nouns (49) ; with the complement of 
 adjectives (89) ; and of verbs (212) ; as the preposition after passive verbs (182). 
 
 2. It serves to mark Possession, Origin, Point of Departure, Separation : 
 
 Coup de poing. 
 
 Blow. 
 
 Des vins de France. 
 
 French wines. 
 
 Partir d'Europe. 
 Depart from Eu- 
 rope. 
 Absence de I'^cole. 
 Absence from school. 
 
 Un coquin d'enfant. 
 A rogue of a child. 
 
 D'aujourd'hui en huit. 
 This day week. 
 De dimanche en quinase. 
 Sunday fortnight. 
 
 Gueuse de flevre 
 Rascally fever ! 
 
 De qui 4te8-vou8 flls? 
 Whose «on are you ? 
 Le flls de I'ami de 
 
 votre pere. 
 Your father's friend's 
 
 son. 
 
 8. Serves to mark Identity : 
 
 La ville de Paris. Le mois de mai. 
 
 The city of Paris. The m,onth of May. 
 
 4. Serves to mark Substance, Profession, Quality. 
 
 Maison de brique(s). Homme de parole. 
 
 Brick house. Man qf his word. 
 
 Homme de guerre. Fleurs de printemps. 
 
 Warrior. Spring flowers. 
 
 0. Is used in many adverbial phrases. 
 
 De Jour en jour. De jour et de nuit. 
 
 From day to day. By day aud by night. 
 
 Canadien de naissance. Je e connais de nom. 
 
 Canadian by birth. I know him by name. 
 
 6. Is used to Join an adjective or participle (a) to the indefinite pronouns (quel- 
 qu'un, quelque chose, rien, au4}un, personne) or to ce qui, qu£, quoi, ceci, cela ; (&)to a 
 noun preceded by a numeral or a quantitative adverb, or to en, m such sentences as : 
 
 Air d'homme. 
 Manly look. 
 
 Maison de campagne. 
 Country-house. 
 
 Parler d'un tonmenagant. 
 Speak in a threatening tone. 
 De ce cdt^-ci, de ce c6t^-la. 
 On this side, on that side. 
 
 a. Je n'ai rien de bon. 
 / have nothing good, 
 Ce que J'ai de bon. 
 What J have good. 
 Qudi ds plus beau que cela ! 
 What [could be] finer than that I 
 Personne de capable. 
 No one capable. 
 
 277. Dans, En. — Dans is less vague and indeterminate ihan en. 
 
 b. 11 y eut cent hommes (de) tu^s. 
 Inhere were a hundred men killed. 
 Parmi vos pommes il y en a de gkt^es. 
 Among your apples there are some spoiled- 
 Combien y en eut-il de tu^s ? 
 How many vjere there kiUed. 
 
 Dans, rvith a Determinate Sense. 
 
 1. Place : Dans le tiroir, dans le verger. 
 In the drawer, in the garden. 
 Dans TAm^rique du Sud. 
 In South America. 
 2. — State, in such phrases as : 
 
 £tre dans la disgr&ce, dans le doute 
 To be in disgrace, in doubt. 
 
 En, with an Indeterminate Sense. 
 
 a. State, Position : 
 En voyage. 
 On a journey. 
 Enpaix. 
 Inpeace. 
 • En Af rique 
 In Afrusa* 
 
 En campagne. 
 On a campaign. 
 En Amdnque. ' 
 In America. 
 
133 
 
 3. Motion into : Entrer dans la maison. | b. Motion to (of countries): Alter en Europe 
 
 En is used before le and la in a few phrases : en I'air, en (la) pHuenee, en I'absence, 
 en Vhonneur, en (Fan) 1890. 
 
 4. In, of definite periods of time : 
 
 Dans cet hiver. 
 In that winter. 
 
 At the expiration of : 
 Je serai 1& dans dix minutes. 
 I shall be there in ten minuteg. 
 
 e. In, of indefinite periods : 
 
 En hiver, en ^t^, en automne. (Au 
 
 printemps.) 
 In winter, in summer, in autumn. (In 
 spring.) 
 In the space of : 
 
 Je puis le faire en dix minutes. 
 / can do it in ten minutes. . 
 
 En is used likewise before nouns with the sense of like, as; before pronouns; before. 
 
 the gerund (251) ; in many adverbial expressions. 
 
 Agirenhommo. Parle enrol. Ilestenmoidelafaire. Mon espoir est en vous. 
 
 To act like a man. To speak like a ln7ig. 1 am able to do it. My hope is in yoit. 
 
 Alleren foule. 
 Oo in erotods. 
 
 En haut, en has. 
 Upstairs, dotvnstairs. 
 
 Fondre en lam\es. 
 Burst into tears. 
 
 En avant, en arriere. 
 Forward, backward. 
 
 278. Avant denotes priority of time 
 
 and place : 
 
 Avant dix heures. Be/ore ten o'clock. 
 Je vais avant vous. / go (in time or by 
 right of precedence) before you. 
 
 279. Devant denotes in front of : 
 
 Devant la maison, devant vous. 
 B^ore the house, in front of you. 
 
 281. Derri^re denotes in the rear of. 
 
 280. Aprds denotes sequence of time 
 and place. With infinitives (246). 
 
 Apris votre depart. After your departure. 
 Apr^s vous. After (in time or pre- 
 
 cedence) you. 
 
 NoTB 1.— Avant is the opposite of apr^s. Devant is the opposite of derrldre^ 
 NoTK 2.— D'apr^8=i7' conformity with : peindre d'apres nature. 
 
 Un petit Jardin derri^re la maison. 
 A little garden behind the house. 
 
 282. Entre= between, amMig. 
 
 Entre Toronto et Montreal. 
 L'un dfentre eux. One of them. 
 Entre nous. Between ourselves. 
 
 288. Parmi=amu2«e, among. 
 
 Parmi la foule. In the midst o; the crowd. 
 Parmi les arbres. Am4)ng the t ees. 
 
 284. Vers, towards (of time and place) 
 
 Vers le sud. Vers midi. 
 
 Towards the north. About noon. 
 
 286. Envers, towards (with feeling). 
 
 Compatissant envers les pauvres. 
 Compassionate to the poor. 
 
 286. Avec— (a) In company with ; (b) by maans of: 
 
 a. J^^tais avec lui. / urns with him. 
 Ecouter (listen) avec int^ret. 
 
 287. Chez.— (a) At the house (shop) of: 
 Chez son p^re. Je viens de chez elle. | 
 
 288. Sur, (resting) on : Sur la table. 
 About : Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 
 Over : L'aigle plane (hovers) sur la 
 
 montagne. 
 On: La maison donne sur (over- 
 
 looks) la rue. 
 Upon : Malheur sur malheur l 
 By: Dix metres de longueur sur 
 
 dixde largeur. 
 Etre sur le retour=:pa«t middle age. 
 
 Note.— DesBUS and de8£K>U8 are used in place of sur and sous when the meanings 
 of the words are contrasted : II n'est ni dessus ni dessous la table. 
 
 291. De dessus, from above : i 292. De deasous, from below. 
 
 Otez le tableau de dessus la fenStre. I De dessous terre. Fromunder ground. 
 
 b. J'^cris avec une plume d'or. 
 / unite with a gold pen. 
 
 (P) among (a people), in (an author) : 
 Chez les Remains, chez La Fontaine. 
 
 2^9. Sous, under : 
 
 Etre Sous clef, sous la table. 
 Sous le pr^texte de. 
 
 290. Oo'ntve=against : Trois contre un. 
 Centre ^contrarj/ to) mon avis. 
 Parier (bet) mille contre (to) un. 
 Se f&oher (grow angry) contre (at) 
 lui. 
 
184 
 
 398. i^r'd«fleuB, ov»r : 
 
 II porte un luanteau par-dflwua son 
 habit. ' 
 
 296. Par, through : Pi^r la f«ndtre. 
 V%& : Vovaifsr par Londres. 
 From : Par d6pit (8pit«),^pox amour, 
 
 par piti^. 
 Under : Par un aoleil brdlant. 
 On : Par un beau Jour. 
 By : Prendre par fa main. 
 A (per): Tant par p«r8onne, par 
 
 leoon. par jour. 
 Par on allez-vous ? Par ici ou par 1^ ? 
 Which way do yott go f This way or 
 
 thatf 
 By : Patfe par page. With infinitives 
 (243). 
 
 294. Barrde— Que, Uneath : 
 
 II PJ^irte HP gl^t WK-de/sioMs jon 
 
 296. Atraver8(au tra vers de), acroM, 
 
 through. 
 
 A. travers ses Jambes. ' 
 
 A travers les champs. 
 
 297. Pour, /or: With inflpitlves (au). 
 II va pour moi (on my behalf). 
 
 Un remede bon pour le mal ae tdte. 
 Six poiK osnt. Six per o»nt. 
 (With f^t^re time.) Poi^r 4ernain ; 
 
 pour toujours. 
 Trad)iire (tranalate) mot pour mot. 
 
 298. Depuls, since: Depuis mon depart. 
 
 Depuis Paris Jusqu'd Lyon. From Paris to Lyons. 
 
 With past time : II est ioi depuis une heure. He has been here for an hour. 
 
 299. Void, Aere t« (ar«). Vqi}^, there is (fire) : ^ 
 
 Voici ma pipe, voild mon cigare. Me voioi. Le moaiLBur que voiU. 
 
 Voilii ce que vous avez dit ; voici ce qu'il vous faut faire. 
 That is what you have said ; this is what you m^t do. 
 
 Note.— The verb foroe (\'o\»-=see) is jitill strpng Qnouffh j(p ^fFect the position pf 
 the personal pro^Q^n8, whiph ^ust precede theisepr^K^nicfpii^': \ia voil^, 'ri{ere he is. 
 
 300. Pendant (durant), during ; hOFS (hormis), except ; malffr^, in spite 
 f\f; ^oyanomtt, by means of; ,i;ionQb9tcvnt, wAw^h^aming ; oulre, hemes ; 
 sans, without ; sa^f, save ; a^lQp, according to. 
 
 301. The followiug prepqsitioiis are followed by de: 
 
 ^ralson 
 
 aupr^s de, \ 
 pre8(proche)de, f 
 
 near. 
 
 autour 
 k cause 
 faute 
 hors 
 4 fleur 
 k force 
 
 de, around. 
 
 de, on.a«cQmUAf' 
 
 de, jfor wtint of. 
 de, out of. 
 de, even with. 
 de, by dint of. 
 
 Notice also : 
 
 Par rapport a lui. 
 With regard to Jiilfi- 
 
 de, by reason cf; 
 at the rate qf. 
 au rez de,on a level vnm. 
 epdeca lie, thifiMifieaf. 
 s^\^ d^}& de, that sride of. 
 au-a#i^u^ de, under. 
 aii-dessusde, above. 
 audedAQ9de, vtUhiH' 
 
 Suant k lui. 
 .04QMm. 
 
 aud^hprs de, ivithout. 
 aiirdevf^it de, b^ore. 
 "(alter au-devant de, to go to 
 
 meet.) 
 au travers de, throjigh. 
 le l(tngr de, alon0. 
 vis a vis (de), oitposite. 
 
 Jusqu'^ quatre heures. 
 Till four o'cloek. 
 
 ^V^^lJiiqH 9dr THE Pjtl^OSITIONS. 
 
 302' The pr^poB^ioiifi.d, de, en muat ^be EeMated .befove evecy com- 
 plement. Other |)repo8ition8 may remain understood, espeoially if the 
 complemeiits {^ '^ync^^yiiio^. 8hould the complemepjifg be of opposed 
 natvice^, it.is.f^w^y^ bett^ jio repeat the preposition,. 
 
 Note 1.— The omission of de and the Artiole takes place in a few pI^raM?, which 
 may be regarded as compounds. 
 
 Le syst^me das poids^t me^uref . 
 
 A 
 
 L'^cple dei» pppt89 et phftg^HB^a.. 
 
 A 
 
 Note 2.— Sans is not repeated when followed by ni, but is 'i>^)eated after «t^< 
 Sans or ni argent. Sanspeur^t aaa8T«pFOobe. 
 
 A 
 
195 
 
 VIM. THE CONJUNCTION (DE LA OONJONCTION). 
 
 j()8> The charaoteri§tio» of the varions conjunctions have already lieen 
 remarked on. (See 234, 236, 236.) 
 
 8014. ]£t nnd male have R coordinate use in French, with complemetits of different 
 conBtrution, while and and but in Eniflieh may connect only similar cdnttructions. 
 
 C'^tait un Jlitihe hotame tr^tr habile et nue toute le motide almait. 
 
 He wrt« a young man iftho "WAa VBty elfvet and ivhmn everybody loved. 
 
 IX. THE INTERJECTION (DE L'INTERJECTION). 
 
 306< The interjections most frequently used in French are : 
 
 306. 
 
 hohV ! holloa ! 
 bah ! nomense ! 
 parbleu I zounds I 
 
 Other parts of speech are frequently used as intellections. 
 
 aht 
 
 ah! 
 
 fi{Aonti)\fle! 
 
 bon ! 
 
 well! 
 
 hein 1 hey ! 
 
 chut! 
 
 hush 1 
 
 h^las 1 auu ! 
 
 oh! 
 fcare! 
 
 zi'st ! 
 
 oh! 
 
 look out I 
 pshato I 
 
 allons ! come ! 
 
 eh bieri ! toell ! 
 
 A la bonne heure ! very welt ! 
 
 silence! 
 
 silence ! 
 
 tiens (tenez) ! here ! 
 tont boau ! gently ! 
 
 mon Dfeu ! goodness ! 
 par exemple ! indeed I 
 peste ! plague take it ! 
 
 Composition 70. 
 
 The Prayer of Nature. 
 
 Nature is now at her evening prayers ; she is kneeling* before those 
 
 red hills. I see her prostrate' on the jsreat steps of her altar, praying 
 
 God for" a fair night for mariners at sea, for travellers in deserts, for lambs 
 
 on moors, an.d unfledged (\irithont feathers) birds in woods. I see her 
 
 now, — her robe of blue air spreads^ to the outskirts of the heather where 
 
 yonder flock is grazing ; a veil, white as an avalanche, descends from 
 
 her head to her feet. Under her breast I see her zone, purple like the 
 
 horizon ; through its blush shines the star of evening. Her steady eyes 
 
 I cannot* picture, — they are deep as lakes ; they are lifted and full of 
 
 worship^ ; they tremble with the softness of love. Her forehead has 
 
 the expanse of a cloud and is paler than the moon risen long before 
 
 dark gathers. She rests her bosom on the ridge of moor ; her mighty 
 
 hands are joined beneath it. So kneeling, face to face, she speaks with 
 
 God. Charlotte Bront£. 
 
 ^stagenouUler. *prostem6. Sprier de. *s'4tendre. 'ceinture t. 'lei, Note, fado- 
 ration. 
 
 Composition 71. 
 
 The Ghud. /^ •; 
 
 "On a burning suminer morning a little clbud issued from the depths 
 of the sea, hovering* lightly, like a child who gives himself up^ to joyous 
 frolics,^ across the olue sky and above the thirsty earth exhausted by a 
 long drought. While tralversin^ space, the little cloud perceived beneath 
 it the poor laborers, working m the sweat of their brow, while softly 
 carried 6n^ by the breeze, it was making-its-way'^ without difficulty. 
 "Oh!" it said to itself, "if I could do something to relieve the 
 miseries of those poor people who are down-there upon that ungrateful 
 earth ! " 
 
 The day was slipping away, and the cloud kept increasing, ever in* 
 creasing ; and as it got larger the desire it had formed of l^ing useful 
 
136 
 
 to suffering hamaniiy also increased. The heat became more intense on 
 the earth ; the sunbeams burned like a hot lire, till the laborerx were 
 near faintino* ; and yet, with (by) a last effort, they kept m "king 
 (worked stilT), for they were very poor. From time to time they cast 
 an entreating look upon the cloud, as [if] to say to it : " Alas ! how 
 miserable we are ! Help us." 
 
 " I will help you," said the cloud, and it began to descend softly. 
 Suddenly it remembered having heard it said, when it was still a child 
 in the depths of the ocean, that if a cloud ventured too near the earth, 
 death became its lot. Undecided, it wandered to and fro,' carried 
 by the course of its thoughts ; but at last it stopped, saying : "0 tired 
 men, I will help you ! " 
 
 Stimulated by this thought, the cloud took gigantic proportions. 
 Like an augel, it hovered above the earth, unfolding its broad winas 
 over the thirstv fields. It became so imposing that men and animus 
 were filled with fear in its presence. 
 
 " I will relieve you ; 1 will die for you !" exclaimed the cloud and 
 the echo of its words was heard from one extremity of the horizon to 
 the other. The thunder resounded' through the sky, the rain fell 
 abundantly upon the earth. 
 
 But the cloud was gone for ever." 
 
 ^planer. *se livrer. *ibat, *entralner. ^eheminer. *$'ivanouir. ''ga et Id. hin- 
 porter, ^retentir. 
 
 GOMFOSITIOM 72. . ' 
 
 The Dying Gladiator. \ v 
 
 I see before me the gladiator lie : 
 He leans upon his hand — his manly brow 
 Consents to death, but conquers agony. 
 And his droop'd head sinks graduuly low — 
 And through nis side the last drops, ebbing slow 
 From the red gash, fall heavy, one by one, 
 Like the first of a thunder-shower ; and now 
 The arena swims around him : he is gone, 
 Ere ceased the inhuman shout which hail'd the wretch who won. 
 
 He heard it, but he heeded not — ^his eyes 
 Were with his heart, and that was far away ; 
 He reck'd not of the life he lost nor prize, 
 But where his rude hut by the Danube lay, ' 
 There were his youn^; barbarians all at play, ■ 
 There was their Dacian mother — he, their sire. 
 Butchered to make a Roman holiday — 
 All this rushed with his blood — Shall he expire, 
 And unavenged? — Arise ! ye Goths, and glut your ire. 
 
 Bykon.